Home

Discover Mobile 3.8 - Pitney Bowes Business Insight

1. ccccccesseccessenceeeesssseeesesseaeeees 66 6 Using the GO Menu cssccccseeeseseeeeseeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeesneeeeneeeeesneaeeeneeeees 67 XIU MGI ci sedecacis Ea a E daaweduas can piaten sia T 68 AHO MENU iiacectanicsideiscasciteeadardeiaes aaa A ites Tea aia aaia 69 LIGEMSING Manu sikiane ra a E EE 69 Preferences MOU T araa a aara a a a a aa AE aSa 70 CoO CHO r aa a a anay dana O A 71 GPO PO OCO a a ea a a aeaa a techies 72 SETUD a a a a E 72 Update Intervals sere aarep supe eS E E EEES 75 Preferred Interval ninia aa a a a a a anaa 76 Stop After EMOn aan atie Anat ea e t aaa aaiae 76 letel ma eeo 101o EEE R A T 76 Post Procossi ienirt aa EA a R ARE 77 Point Capture 200 eeeceeeeececceeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaeeesaaeeeeaaeeseaeeeeseaeeseeeeeseaeeseaes 77 Tolerance MN a a a a a a anta 77 Tolerance MA a a a ana aai i da 78 Min Sample Points cc cecectecchetsseereahisuedlagetstievegshasieicaeaceedieteds beets 78 Precision Aee a 79 Display aaa e avin neice eae 79 Re Centie GRS vas scsiiseccideva E OE AOT 79 Atitude IN sigh sO i an raaraa a 80 Speed Mena aa aaa aa aa e E e rere aa a A A EDE 80 Default SCale e a a eanta 80 GPS Position Style ceeeccececeeceseneeeceneeeeeeaeeceeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeseaeeeeaes 80 Map RONO a resna E ENEE E E wevd 81 Deg Tolerant sunne gunana A S 81 Speed Tolra NOE a r e aa e aeaea ies ashi ied eee 81 AAIEN EEEE E AEA AE E EE 81 Opject Creationin i aata aaea tebe shelgiediveedicbeleteeyi a a
2. Configuring the Named Styles and Pick Lists directories within Discover Mobile to the Storage Card locations 4 Under GO gt Preferences gt Object Creation set both the Named Styles and Edit Attributes dialogs to Always appear during data capture and the Point XY Editing dialog to Never appear DiscoverMobile er 10 57 lok EI Object Creation Edit Attributes Named Styles Point XY Editing EI Session m Autoload last Map Projection User Projecti User Projection Longitude Distance in Meters Area in Sq Meters Grid Overlay Setup Waypoint Tolerance 10 0 m E System Settings Busy Cursor On Fant Size 1 ME oe 10 Working with Objects 233 5 To examine the Regional_Sampling Named Style library and its related Quick Pick options select the GO gt Edit gt Named Styles menu option and select this library from the pull down list At this point do not modify any settings DiscoverMobile er 11 03 ok Poil Poil Poil Poil Poil Line 6 Finally choose GO gt Map gt Set gt Insertion Layer and set to None Named Styles will ignore any insertion layer set however if the user cancels out of the Named Styles dialog Discover Mobile will utilise any Insertion Layer set to capture the object Switching between Drawing object types e g from point to region during the object capture process will still result in the Insertion Layer prompt being displayed 234 Discover Mobile User
3. MSS 338 00 340 00 5 0 10000 485 900 Msg 340 00 342 00 4 0 08000 887 600 Msg 342 00 344 00 1 0 03000 661 200 Mss 344 00 346 00 2 0 00500 733 69 Msg 346 00 348 00 3 0 00500 860 90 Msg 348 00 350 00 4 0 00500 495 387 MS3 350 00 352 00 o 0 00500 912 380 Msg 352 00 354 00 4 0 00500 968 352 Ms9 354 00 356 00 5 0 00500 70 646 Mss 356 00 358 00 5 0 00500 247 7 Mss 358 00 360 00 3 0 04000 36 Cam 4 m M 4 2827 of2827 gt E New Record 8 Delete Record SP Filter Validate lt Label save _ __Gose Enter Data dialog showing entry of data in a non mappable table To digitize mappable objects with the Data Entry tool 1 On the Discover menu point to Data Entry and select Setup Table The Select Tables dialog is displayed All open tables are listed in the Select Tables dialog box Select a table To open another table Click the Open button and select the TAB file you want to open in MapInfo Professional Click OK to load the selected table in the Data Entry tool The table names are displayed on the tab at the top of the data sheet The number of records and the current selected record are displayed on the navigation bar at the bottom of the dialog box 1 of 5152 gt bil Use these tools to open another table or view table information Z Open another table for data entry p Close selected table 374 Discover Mobile User Guide Note A
4. 2 In the Picklists box select the picklist 3 In the Styles box select the style you want to apply Note By default all styles are selected if you wish to apply certain styles select those styles 4 In the Style Table Options box select Thematic Map 5 Select the table you want to apply the style description 6 Select the table column you want to apply the style description 364 Discover Mobile User Guide Note 7 Click Apply Individual Thematic map styles are the only type current supported by this tool Applying Structural Styles from a Picklist Multiple structural picklist styles can be applied to point map objects To apply multiple styles permanently to a table 1 Select Data Entry gt Apply Structural Symbols to open the Apply Structural Symbols dialog ET Structure Australia Description Structure Symbols Styles 114 items Bedding Bedding Horizontal Bedding Vertical Bedding Overtumed Bedding Overtumed Horizontal Bedding Facing Facing Vertical Style Structural Options Table Dip Direction DIP_DIR Dip DIP Discover Code Discover_Code Label Options Apply Close 2 In the Picklists box select the structural picklist 3 In the Styles box select the style you want to apply Appendix D Digitizing and Data Entry in Discover 365 Note Note By default all styles are selected if you wish to apply certa
5. File menu e Recent Files New Table Open Table e Close Table Close All Tables Save Table Copy As e Save Geoset Edit Table Structure Pack Table 6 Using the GO Menu 127 Recent Files GO gt File gt Recent Files Any recently used Tables or Geosets are listed in the Recent Files option of the File menu Highlight the required table or Geoset and press OK to open the file into Discover Mobile Alternatively double click on the target file to open it New Table GO gt File gt New Table Use this command to create new TAB tables directly in Discover Mobile Tables used in Discover Mobile are identical to those used in MapInfo Professional You can also create and maintain tables on your desktop PC using MapInfo Professional and then transfer these to Discover Mobile for use in the field DiscoverMobile er 4c 2 19 ok Create Layer Fie iscover Mobile NewLayer tab I New Table dialog accessed from the File gt New Table menu item Create Layer The name and location of the new table is displayed in the File box To edit tap the browse button Fields Displays the fields in the new file Tap the Setup Fields button to add and remove fields columns in a table Discover Mobile User Guide Setup Fields File Zoom Tools Help DiscoverMobile e 4c 2 16 ok Creation of new data fields for a new table Add To add a user defined field tap the Add button A new entry title
6. Operator Precedence Comparison Operators A comparison operator is often used in creating query expressions to describe differences between values The following shows the comparison operators and a description equals lt gt not equal greater than less than gt greater than or equal to Like like a wildcard for selecting subsets of multiple characters 192 Discover Mobile User Guide Logical Operators And Or and Not are logical operators They are used to combine expressions Discover Mobile treats these expressions as a test and applies it to each record in the table Each test will evaluate to a yes no true false answer Discover Mobile uses the logical operators to tell it how to combine the individual yes no answers For example does the current record meet the selection condition And is true when and only when both of its arguments the expressions it joins together are true A record must satisfy both of these conditions to be selected Or is true when either one or both of its arguments the expressions it joins together are true A record need satisfy only one of these conditions to be selected It is also selected when both of its conditions are satisfied Not is true when its argument the expression it applies to is false A record is selected when it does not meet the stated condition Operator Precedence When Discover Mobile evaluates a query it needs to know which c
7. Pan and Center tools share the same button position and can be switched with the arrow button next to the displayed tool a Pan button moves the view around the map display area Position the ig stylus on the map and drag it in the direction you want the map to move ye Center tool repositions the map display so that it is centred on the position where you tap the stylus 5 Mobile Interface 61 bs cB The Distance Measurement tool has two modes To change mode select the arrow next to the currently selected mode button The default mode is a freehand polyline measure tool which will measure the cumulative distance along a polyline as you draw on the screen The distance is shown in the units set in GO gt Preferences gt Session Distance 4 781682 kms The straight line distance mode measures the distance between consecutive points The information displayed shows the distance between the last two consecutive points of the polyline as well as the total accumulated distance between the origin and the last point The distance is shown in the units set in GO gt Preferences gt Session Double tap the screen to complete a line and reset the measurement Last Section 11 033615 kms Total 21 054977 kms The Information and Hotlink tools share the same button position and can be toggled with the arrow button next to the display tool Use the Information button to display and edit object attributes field valu
8. ccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeessaeeeeees 282 Post process Field Data File ccescceeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 284 APPONGICES c cc5c ccc lecesencivetensceis ecencecedescnsceet tevendcevy cecceecviescucuetedeenscceye 287 Discover Mobile Quick Reference Guide ccsseeeesseeseeeeeeeees 289 TOONIS fo cseesedets yaaa ace ea ches See cg eh Salle fod oe aes ey EEES 289 Malin TOOIB ar nasin e a a tlt deveselts E 289 Select View Toolbar ccccccsecceeceeeeeeeneeeceeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeaeeessaeeeseneees 290 Draw Edit Toolbar aserria tence ai toai neuer A al hele ks 291 GPS Toolbalesccsstesticcti kee Anchtrs acu tts eetceahs A acces 292 Preference Settings renie er aea aaa ep E aaaea aaa aE aiia 293 Discover Mobile User Guide B Structural SyMDolS scs2scccc cc cess cescccervvasccessevesecesssuacetastecersocerevseevexcoct 297 Structural Symbols Ordered by Discover Code cceceeeeeeees 297 Structure Symbols Ordered by Name cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeneeees 303 Working with Portable XRF Devices eccesseeeeeeesseeeeeeenseeseeeees 311 Setting Up the Bluetooth Connection to an XRF Device 08 312 Connecting a Niton XRF device with the PPC on Windows Mobile 5 or Se E EEE A eee eee cor eee pre ere eee reer T 312 Connecting an Olympus Innov X XRF device with the PPC on Windows Mobile 20083 sevetcerecesstctsstetevtes tis leer raeas E araa trae ae Tia aE aTa 315 Conne
9. 7 Controlling Layers and the View 145 DiscoverMobile en 4c 3 55 eS Of a OPN O B ta QQ OP Al il Oo ae SAET Map Rotation dialog and slider bar The rotation angle is measured in degrees and can range in value from 0 360 The bearing is measured clockwise from North Note Map rotation is not possible when a raster image layer is listed in the Layer Control dialog even when the raster image is not visible in the map window Auto Rotate and Auto Centre These functions are only available when the GPS is connected 146 Discover Mobile User Guide Sh Auto Rotate View Auto Rotate Map button will turn on off the Auto Map Rotate function The Auto Rotate Map function will automatically rotate the map view so that the top of the map is oriented towards the direction of travel The auto map rotation preferences can be configured using the GO gt Preferences menu Two settings are available for the auto rotate function Rotation Degree Tolerance specifies the angular difference required between two consecutive points before the map view will rotate The recommended and default value is 45 degrees although the value can be set to any integer between 0 and 360 degrees Speed Tolerance specifies a speed value below which the map view will not rotate By adjusting the Speed Tolerance you can control the rotation so that the map view will only rotate if the GPS speed across ground is greater than th
10. Soil Soil 80 The Named Styles dialog after capturing a point object the list has been filtered to display only point type styles The object is then added to the table assigned to the selected named style Any preset Quick Pick field values will also be populated in the table and if the Edit Attributes option is enabled additional field values may be added see Populating Fields The current insertion layer for drawing objects and data capture table for GPS objects are ignored when using named styles However the standard insertion tables are used if a named styles is not selected and the Named Styles dialog is cancelled If the insertion layer has not been set you will be prompted to select a table Selecting None here will terminate the object capture 10 Working with Objects 227 Note Applying Range Styles For information on creating and assigning range styles see Range Styles To apply an existing Range Style library to a numeric dataset open in Discover Mobile select the Go gt Edit gt Apply Range Style menu option In the following dialog from each appropriate pull down list 1 Select the target table layer 2 Select the numeric field to apply the range style to 3 Select the Range Style to apply en 10 24 ok DiscoverMobile Select a Layer Copper Hill Soils Style by Field 4 Style Copper styles X x cares 4 Tap OK This is a one o
11. Structure Type Bedding v Structural Data Dip Direction uog Dp aaa Preview shown at double size Entering structural data In the Structural Data entry boxes type the Strike or Dip Direction using the number pad on the right and also the Dip box Dip values must be between 0 and 90 degrees If you leave the box empty Discover Mobile will assume no dip is to be recorded and will enter a value of 99 in the table To change between the Strike and Dip Direction conventions tap the Setup button to display the configuration dialog Select the appropriate option to record azimuth using Dip Direction and Dip or Strike and Dip right hand rule 10 Working with Objects 213 DiscoverMobile e7 q 3 00 ok Symbol Set Australian Symbols Mod AGSO Ag Record Structure Orientation by Dip Direction and Dip C Strike and Dip Right Hand Rule Specifying the Symbol Set and preferred Structure Orientation 6 To change the symbol library between the Australian US or Canadian symbol set select the required Symbol Set from the Structure Symbol Library pull down list 7 To change the symbol style and size tap the Advanced Symbol Style button to display the Structure Symbol Styles options Here the structure symbol size colour and background and effects can be modified Any changes made to the Font or Symbol text boxes will be overridden by the Structure Type and Structure Symbol Library
12. To rename a style select the style in the Styles box and click a To add remove a style to a group select the style in the Styles box and click a Note Styles can be added to a group to streamline the data entry process when using the Data Entry gt Enter Data tool EI To edit a style select the style in the Styles box and click laj The MapInfo style dialog is displayed from which you can edit the style Click OK and edit the description Click OK To reorder styles in the Styles box select the style you want to move and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to reposition in the picklist styles 4 Click the Save button to save your changes Applying a Single Style from a Picklist A single picklist style can be applied to selected map objects or applied when creating new map objects The textural description for the picklist can be added to the selected object record in the Browser table To apply a single style to one or more map objects 1 Select Data Entry gt Apply Style to open the Apply Style dialog 360 Discover Mobile User Guide 5 Description Decade of North American Geology DNAG 1983 Geologic t Styles 148 items Insert style description Table Column lt Select the map object s in the Mapper window or Browser window In the Picklists box select the picklist In the Styles box select the style you want to apply Cl
13. amp h Discover Mobile er 4c 2 05 X Dm 500D 10000 x FRIS GF OF Eh ik x See Re Oo Discover Mobile map window showing the dynamic Scale Bar in the lower right corner of the map window Save and Restore View Restoring a view will return the map display to the same scale and map centre at the time it was saved It will not reopen layers that were in use when the view was originally saved If you want to save a view which includes all associated map layers and display properties you need to save a Geoset For details refer to the Saving and Restoring Your Workspace The Previous Zoom button on the Select View toolbar provides a selection of options for saving and restoring multiple views Tap the arrow button to select a saved view and to display the functions available from this tool Save View saves the current view properties with a unique name Multiple views can be defined and restored directly from the pop up menu Note that only the display area properties are saved not the view contents Delete View deletes a saved view from the list Display View Settings Information about the view settings is available from the Status Window This is a floating window displays the following information 7 Controlling Layers and the View 151 The screen width in metres of the map window display The current object Insertion Layer GPS information such as GPS position GPS Map Position Date Time Sp
14. 10 Working with Objects 211 gt j To pause the capture of a polygon tap the Pause button on the GPS toolbar This allows the user to move around and determine where the feature being mapped extends e g where precisely the fault trend continues When this has been determined return to the position where the next node is to be added and then tap the Pause button again to continue capture You can also use the Pause button to capture polylines one node at a time by pausing capture while moving to the new node position To complete polylgon capture tap the GPS Polygons Capture button again If the capture layer has not been assigned you are prompted to select a table Depending on the options selected under GO gt Preferences gt Object Creation a number of dialogs may appear which will allow you to select and enter line style and field values For more information about object creation options see Setting Object Creation Preferences and Field Data Entry and Editing To add a node to the polygon tap the Insert Node icon once and a new node will be added using the current GPS coordinates Capturing Elevation Data If collecting field data for which elevation information is important for instance to create a topographic surface or contour file the data should be captured as points If data is collected as polylines or regions for instance a track or fence line only a single elevation value is recorded for the object not for each
15. 10 Working with Objects 243 Aly The Add Annotation button allows additional text to be placed in the Annotation Layer at a set location on a map This text is placed in the Annotation layer and cannot be transferred or saved to a specified layer Ensure the pop up keyboard is open before selecting this tool Removing Labels and Annotations To remove all labels from the annotation layer choose GO gt Edit gt Clear Custom Labels To remove all annotations from the annotation layer choose GO gt Edit gt Clear Annotations Individual labels and annotations cannot be removed Hotlinking Files to Map Objects Information located in external files can be linked as attributes to map objects in Discover Mobile using the table Hotlink function For example if you wish to record a detailed description of a sample site you can record this information using Pocket Word and then store the file path and file name as an attribute in the browser for the sample Similarly Pocket Excel spreadsheets Audio files or image files can also be hotlinked e Adding Hotlink Field to Table Creating a Hotlink Editing a Hotlink File Using the Hotlink Files in MapInfo Hotlink Images from the PPC Camera Adding Hotlink Field to Table To attach a hotlink file to a map object you must first add an attribute field to your table to store the pathway for the hotlink object This can either be done on your desktop computer in Maplnfo Professi
16. 11 Working with the GPS 267 Note iT Eg GPs Fix 3D E 46 4 06 GEA piscovermobile 461204 D GPS Map Coordinates Permanently save points ies x enia oes Map Y 5799216 848385 GPS Recommended Min Data R Lat 37 88497333 Long 145 00155 M Date 19 8 2004 M time 4 5 11 pm C Full Time 8 19 04 4 05 11 Speed 0 8 km h M course 0 0 deg O warning False C mag Variation 0 0E L GPS Fix Information GGA O Lat 37 88497333 ok E The Setup dialogs for the Point Track Log function Any attribute fields listed in the Data to be logged list will be added to the Point Track Log table and will be automatically populated with data from the GPS Use the Setup button to change the list of fields to be logged Within this dialog the list of output fields can be customised When finished tap OK to create the table and start the Point Track Log function Once a Point Track Log table is created additional fields cannot be added to the table in Discover Mobile Either add these fields on a PC using Maplnfo Professional or to save a copy of the Point Track Log table and add the extra fields to the copied table To stop the Point Track Log tap the Point Track Log button on the toolbar to toggle it off Turn it on again at any time by tapping the same button again If an existing Point Track Log table is already open a prompt will be displayed to either cont
17. 330 Discover Mobile User Guide GPS Connector 4 62 30 ok om GPS I COM2 NMEA Available PCOM3 TSIP Available gt COM4 Real time Available COM1 Available No connections to create The various Masks available in this dialog allow poor satellite data to be filtered out e g satellites low on the horizon or those resulting in a high signal to noise ratio improving the precision on the position fix 4 4 2 39 bk DiscoverMobile GPS Settings Port Masks DOP Type PDOP Max PDOP Max HDOP Min Elevation Min SNR Min Satellites Mi O Apply Velocity Filter General Real time These settings will be automatically retained unless Discover Mobile is reinstalled or the settings are changed for instance if a different GPS receiver is used Appendix C Working with Portable XRF Devices 331 5 Select the GO gt GPS gt Connect menu option to connect to the GPS receiver Once the receiver has found sufficient valid satellites see View Satellite Positions and Status a current position fix will be displayed A GPS Fix 2D or GPS Fix 3D message will be displayed at the top of the map window Discover Mobile is now ready for GPS data capture View Satellite Positions and Status The GPS will commence acquiring of satellites and downloading of the almanac This can sometimes take up to several minutes depending on
18. The Name Style Editor facilities the creation and management of Named Styles for Discover Mobile from a desktop interface Named Styles enable the user to create a style library for point line and region objects Named styles allow the textural capture of data to be attributed to user defined object styles this enables streamlined data capture and validation Named Styles can be directly created in Discover Mobile however the Desktop interface provides a more functional user interface The directory of the Named Styles is specified by the DiscoverMobile anager tool Alternatively the directory can be manually redirected from the Output File option 3 Data Preparation 31 Note orn Create new or modify existing Named Styles for Discover Mobile Input File Mobile Style Points Lines _ Regions Description Style Colour Font Click to add ET Mobile OE Mobile Style C Discover Mobile Encom_DM_Namestyles New Style Library b4 E Save Cancel Mobile Style Editor dialog Any tables fields and fonts referenced by the Style library must be opened in Mapinfo Professional prior to opening the library Create Named Style Named Styles can be created from one of two methods from an existing style library or from a blank template To create a Named Style from an existing file click the Open Mobile style button and select either an existing Named Style TXT The text file will
19. pbEncom Discover Mobile v3 8 User Guide Pitney Bowes Software Inc is a wholly owned subsidiary of Pitney Bowes Inc Pitney Bowes the Corporate logo pbEncom and Discover are registered trademarks of Pitney Bowes Inc or a subsidiary All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners 2013 Pitney Bowes Software Inc All rights reserved pbEncom Discover Mobile v3 8 User Guide Discover Mobile is developed and supported by ENCOM DISCOVER MOBILE RELEASE HISTORY Pitney Bowes Software Pty Ltd se Marnas ASIA PACIFIC AUSTRALIA ved Fepuaty 2004 v2 5 October 2005 Level 7 1 Elizabeth Plaza Gi Jine 2007 North Sydney NSW 2060 Australia v3 5 November 2008 SUPPORT v3 6 December 2010 T 61 2 9437 6255 v3 7 September 2012 a v3 8 December 2013 software support pb com www pbencom com Pitney Bowes Software Inc is a wholly owned subsidiary of Pitney Bowes Inc Pitney Bowes the Corporate logo pbEncom and Discover are registered trademarks of Pitney Bowes Inc or a subsidiary All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners 2013 Pitney Bowes Software Inc All rights reserved Table of Contents i Table of Contents 1 Mtiroductho co cc secede iat e aaaea E 1 Hardware and Operating System Requirement ccceeereeeesteeeees 2 Pocket PC Device Requirement ccccceceeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeneeees 2 Desktop or Laptop PC Requirement cccccccccc
20. Anticline F1 Anticline F1 Horizontal Anticline F2 Anticline F2 Horizontal Anticline F3 Anticline F3 Horizontal Anticline Overturned Anticline Recumbent Discover Code 13 14 20 20 21 22 ASCII Code 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 Australia Canada USA 300 Discover Mobile User Guide Name Syncline F1 Syncline F1 Horizontal Syncline F2 Syncline F2 Horizontal Syncline F3 Syncline F3 Horizontal Syncline Overturned Syncline Recumbent Normal Fault Normal Fault Low Angle Normal Fault High Angle Thrust Fault Shear Zone Shear Zone Wide Fault Zone Breccia Trend Line Parallel Lines Vein Dyke No Dip Vein Sill No Dip Vein Dyke With Dip Discover Code 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 37 ASCII Code 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 Australia Canada USA P feo Appendix B Structural Symbols 301 Name Vein Sill With Dip Oriented Drill Collar 1 Oriented Drill Collar 2 Oriented Drill Collar 3 Dipping Fault Gouge Sinistral Fault Wrench Dextral Fault Wrench Columnar Joint Bedding Facing Unknown Bedding Facing Unknown Vertical Undulating Bedding
21. Auscity amp Auscity amp Auscity 34 Darlot Image J Discover Mobile aj Sylvania_Scan 4 Darlot_Image a Copper Hill Pr I Encom_DM_T I Encom_DM_Pi I Encom_DM_N I Encom_DM_H 11 10 11 11 10 11 29 08 12 29 08 12 11 10 11 20 03 07 31 08 12 31 08 12 19 10 05 en 10 54 X Then copy the contents of the Example Data NamedStyles and Example Data PickLists subdirectories into the appropriate directories on the PPC as defined under GO gt Preferences gt Directories Alternatively copy these subdirectories in their entirety to the root level of the PPC storage card and then point the Directories settings to these new directories Example data and the named Styles and PickLists subdirectories placed onto the Storage Card 232 Discover Mobile User Guide en lt 10 55 ok DiscoverMobile Confirm Deletion Hardware Buttons Alert Configuration Setup E Directories m Project Root Storage r Current Project Discover El Set Individually Storage Card Track Log Storage Discover Mobile Pick Lists Storage Encom DM Picklists m Named Styles Storage Encom DM Hotlinks Hotlink Files Storage D J Encom DM Namestyl Encom DM Tables Program Files Storage Card2 E Windows E Documents and Settings DiscoverMobile e7 10 56 lok r New Tables Storage m Image Files My Doo
22. Encom Training Sylvania Geology Sylvania_Geology Map tab E 3 Select the window you to wish to convert to a raster image from the Select Window to Save list 4 Select the raster format from the Image Type drop down list Available formats include ECW PNG BMP JPEG TIF GEOTIFF note though that Discover Mobile does not support PNG For best compression save the window as an ECW 5 Use the Detail drop down list to increase the level of detail in the image from the fixed screen resolution 96 dpi By default Discover will save an image which is double 2x the size width and height of the map window on the screen 6 Enter a value into the Image Transparency window to apply a transparency to the entire image enter 0 for an opaque image 7 Check the Set background transparent box to change the white background default 8 Check the Create World File box to create an associated world file for the image which contains the registration information this is useful for opening in programs without using the TAB file 9 Click OK for the conversion to raster image to proceed 4 Getting Started 47 Getting Started The Discover Mobile interface is easy to understand and simple to use so the best way to learn how to use Discover Mobile is to start using it For a quick introduction to starting and using Discover Mobile see Starting Discover Mobile The User Interface Interacting with the So
23. Mobile Zoom layering is set in the Display option of the MapInfo Professional Layer Control Managing Objects in Layers New drawing objects are added to the current insertion layer You can also create a temporary cosmetic layer which can be used to hold graphic objects If a cosmetic layer has been added to the map then it will be automatically set as the insertion layer You can add labels to objects with any field in the table and control the format and visibility of the labels GPS located objects are not added to the insertion layer but are added to GPS capture tables assigned for each type of GPS object Setting the Insertion Layer Assigning GPS Capture Layers Adding a Cosmetic Layer Labelling Objects Setting the Insertion Layer Before adding drawing objects to the map window you must choose which layer the objects are added to To determine which layer is currently set as the insertion layer tap the Status Window tool on the Main toolbar or choose GO gt View gt Status Window The current insertion layer will remain selected for as long as the current object type point polyline or polygon remains active For instance if the Point capture button is enabled when the insertion layer is set to soils all points captured will be automatically inserted into the soils table As soon as a different object type is selected e g polygon the Insertion Layer dialog will be displayed so that you can sel
24. Setting Default Styles for GPS Located Objects Applying Named Styles Applying Range Styles Applying a Range Style Library During XRF Data Capture 10 Working with Objects 221 k Oly Bly Note Setting Default Styles for New Drawing Objects Default styles can be applied to symbols lines and polygons To modify the default style for an object type 1 Select a Symbol Line or Polygon object tool 2 Choose GOsEdit gt New Object Styles 3 Modify the preferred display settings for the object type See Formaiting Drawing Objects for details on the various dialog controls 4 Tap OK on the Title bar The default object styles are not saved between Discover Mobile sessions Formatting Drawing Objects Before an object can be formatted the layer that contains the object must be editable and selectable see Managing Layers To format one or more objects 1 Select the object or objects see Selecting Objects 2 Choose GO gt Edit gt Selected Object Style A style dialog is displayed The dialog depends on the type of object selected If multiple items are selected then the first item in the selection will configure the display property dialog Symbol Style Line Style Fill Style 222 Discover Mobile User Guide Symbol Style The Symbol style dialog allows the symbol style size and colour and symbol rotation properties to be controlled DiscoverMobile e 23 15 lok Ge
25. These settings do not allow you to access external Internet Servers If you want to change these Windows settings go to the Windows Control Panel and choose the Internet icon Or you can press the Set up Internet Connection button gt Set up Internet Connection Do you want to continue Don t show this message again Trimble provides no guarantee as to the speed or reliability of the download process For questions or support concerning your Internet connection please contact your System Administrator or Internet Service Provider Confirm Internet Setup dialog Followed by the Confirm Selected Base Files dialog Confirm Selected Base Files Rover Files and Matching Base Files Rover File Coverage Base File Start Time End Time Outcrop_mappi 100 29 08 2005 3 01 3 29 08 2005 5 08 4 Cancel FEA_241F 050 29 08 2005 2 59 4 29 08 2005 3 53 4 Hel FEA_241G 050 29 08 2005 3 59 4 29 08 2005 4 59 4 sh FEA_241H 050 29 08 2005 4 59 4 29 08 2005 5 59 4 Confirm Base files dialog This dialog details the temporal extents of the rover and matching downloaded base files If a rover file is not fully covered by the base file s positions outside of the coverage will not be differentially corrected Select OK to continue or Cancel to back and reselect the base files Press OK to close the following Reference Position dialog base files sourced from a public data source such
26. They must be defined when the table is first created 200 Discover Mobile User Guide Setting Object Creation Preferences The procedure followed when creating objects is controlled by the preference settings available from the GO gt Preferences gt Object Creation command The following editable criteria are available when capturing object data Edit Attributes Named Styles Point XY Editing The preferences for these can be set as follows Always Upon data capture the edit dialog is opened Ask The user is prompted to open the edit dialog Never The edit dialog is not opened Edit Attributes The Edit Attributes option opens a browser for the new object allowing the user to edit any attributes as well as assign attributes from predefined Pick Lists Named Styles An existing style can be applied to the new object from the Named Styles library This is an excellent way to visually differentiate identical object types eg point samples such as rock chips lag and soil samples can have differing existing symbol types applied during data capture See Named Styles Point XY Editing After data capture the X and Y coordinates can be edited Creating Drawing Objects Use the Draw Edit Toolbar to Place a symbol Place a structural symbol Draw a straight line 10 Working with Objects 201 Draw a polyline or freehand polyline Draw a polygon or a freehand pol
27. and saves the Lag and Soil tables as Lag_MJ220107 and Soil_MJ220107 The user s initials are important if multiple samplers are working with multiple devices otherwise the database administrator may receive three Lag_22 01 07 tables from three different users If or when possible download them to a PC or email them to the data administrator At the end of a field campaign the main field data tables e g Lag and Soil can be saved as say Soil_MJ15 02 02_final and sent to the office These tables will contain all the data for the period of the field campaign To start a new field campaign delete the existing field data tables e g Lag and Soil then clone new ones from the templates Alternatively to utilise a new empty data table each day save the previous days field tables off with a date and sampler suffix GO gt File gt Save Table Copy As close the field tables then clone new tables from the templates This will result in a series of date stamped tables with data just for the date indicated This is a little more complex to get right particularly with continuation of sample number series and is not generally recommended to save user confusion Nevertheless it is another way of handling field data Neither method requires any user modification of the Named Styles library nor its Quick options except for the user name and sample number setups discussed in steps 4 and 5 Setting up Named Styles for Multiple Users As demo
28. dialog hold the stylus over the Status window DiscoverMobile en 11 12 ok MI Screen Width 0 0 m O Insertion Layer _ 4 GPs Map Coordinates MV Map X 0 M map 0 M GPs Recommended Min Data RMG M Lat 0 0 M Long 0 0 M Date 30 12 1899 M Time 0 0 0 am C Full Time 12 00 00 AM M Speed 0 0 kmh O course 0 0 deg M warning True C Maa Variation 0 0E bi bH Some of the Setup options displayed from the Status Window 116 Discover Mobile User Guide Map Window Screen Width displays the distance across the screen in metres e Insertion Layer displays the name of the current Insertion Layer GPS Map Coordinates Map X displays the current X Easting or Longitude position received from the GPS in the map Session Projection To change the coordinate display to another projection use the GO gt Preferences menu and change the Session Projection to the required format Map Y displays the current Y Northing or Latitude position value received from the GPS in the map Session Projection To change the coordinate display to another projection use the GO gt Preferences menu and change the Session Projection to the required format GPS Recommended Min Data RMC The information in this section includes GPS data received from the RMC Recommended minimum data sentence of the NMEA data stream An example of this data sentence in provided below GPRM
29. for information on the various field types See Working with Tables for more information about working with tables 7 Fields a Yy d 11 07 ok Name Type Size ceoloay String z 20 7 Press OK to complete the XRF connection Appendix C Working with Portable XRF Devices 337 Enhance the Map Window Display When the Sample Batch has been created Discover Mobile displays a point object at the centre of the map window this is your current GPS location A wide variety of grids aerial photos geological maps or any thematic layered data can be added to the map window to help you during the sampling program For information on how to display other map data and control the map window refer to the relevant sections in the Discover Mobile User Guide Capturing XRF Data Photo courtesy of Thermo Fisher Scientific You are now ready to begin streaming analysis from the XRF device to the PPC Run an Analysis on the XRF device e Record the GPS Location Review XRF Data and Record Comments and Observations Save Reading in Discover Mobile 338 Discover Mobile User Guide Note Run an Analysis on the XRF device 1 Ensure that the XRF instrument is correctly configured to suit the sample program Items such as mode test timings and sample information may need to be entered depending on the device prior to running the instrument Refer to the XRF device User Guide for more information 2 Per
30. lt p F te t Canada 4 F He USA E ae ae b lt p F Le 4 Appendix B Structural Symbols 305 Name Boudin Plunge Chert Contortion Plunge Cleavage S1 Cleavage S1 Horizontal Cleavage S1 Vertical Cleavage S2 Cleavage S2 Horizontal Cleavage S2 Vertical Cleavage S3 Cleavage S3 Horizontal Cleavage S3 Vertical Columnar Joint Crenulation Crenulation Horizontal Deformed Bedding Dip Dextral Fault Wrench Dipping Fault Gouge Dipping Shear Zone Eutaxitic Foliation Eutaxitic Foliation Vertical Discover Code 75 76 48 44 42 81 78 78 ASCII Code 156 t57 41 43 42 44 46 45 47 49 48 71 58 59 134 100 115 114 161 162 Australia B8 gt c gt EA I gt i ll p Canada 8 gt c gt ll f p USA B8 gt c gt a I i i p 306 Discover Mobile User Guide Name Fault Zone Breccia Fold Verge Left Fold Verge Right Foliation Foliation D1 Foliation D2 Foliation D3 Foliation Horizontal Foliation Vertical Glacial Striae Sense Known Glacial Striae Sense Unknown Joint Joint Horizontal Joint Vertical Kink Fold With Plunge Lineation Lineation L1 Lineation L2 Lineation L3 Lineation Horizontal Discover Code 34 68 69 17
31. then an error will be displayed If this happens you will need to manually register the image in MapInfo Professional and then copy the image file and TAB file back to the PPC For information on copying files to the PPC see Transferring Data Between Devices 168 Discover Mobile User Guide Important Creating a New Table with Discover Mobile You can create a new table and create the field structure or you can clone the new table from an existing table Table fields can be user defined or you can add a predefined Auto field for capturing GPS data When you create the table you can select where the table is stored The default folder for tables can be changed with GO gt Preferences gt Directories You can also select the map projection for each table or use the default projection For more information about map projections see Controlling the Map Projection Make sure that you fully define the table structure when it is first created because it cannot be changed later To create a new table 1 Choose GO gt File gt New Table command The New Table dialog is displayed DiscoverMobile e7 2 19 lok Create Layer File iscover Mobile NewLayer tab E Fields New Table dialog 2 Under Create Layer tap the browse button and type a name for the new table and select a folder in which to store the table 3 To define fields tap the Setup Fields button 9 Working with Tables 169
32. 1 Display the legend format dialog in two ways Double tap the legend Choose GO gt Map gt Modify Themes select a theme and tap the Legend button 2 Modify the title subtitle text appearance and choose compact or normal format Discover Mobile a ER O Show empty ranges O Compact O Use currency format a Copper Hill Soils Hill Soils Legend format dialog 3 Tap OK The controls provided in the legend dialog may alter depending on the legend and Theme Type used 8 Working with Maps 161 Modifying Themes Themes can be modified from the modify themes dilaog which displays a list of existing themes DiscoverMobile e 4c 3 18 ok Themes er Hill Soils Dataset By Com Modify themes dialog To modify a theme 1 Choose GO gt Map gt Modify Themes to display the modify themes dialog 2 Select a theme from the list and tap Modify 3 Edit the data specification symbols annotation and appearance The displayed dialog and associated controls vary depending on the thematic type being used Below are examples of two such dialogs 162 Discover Mobile User Guide DiscoverMobile e 3 19 lok DiscoverMobile en 4e3 22 ok Visible O Show empty ranges L Compact _ Use currency format Title Copper Hill Soils Aa Style Individual value Amax v Apply All attributes Color em Theme modification dialogs To remove themes de Choose GO gt Map gt Mo
33. 104 RONDOCAN LAE EET E 105 Monitor Satellite Status cecc ceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeas 105 Setup Connection c ce ceeeeeecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeesaaeseeeeeeseeaeeteeeeees 105 Table of Contents v Setup Data Capture Tables cc ccccceececeeeesteeeseneeeesneeseceeeseneees 106 Default Styl S vriest a ten aavein daa oee evi aana aia 106 Center Map on QPS ssesssssseessseesssesssiessrsssrrsstrnesrnsesnnatnnennnestnesnnnne 106 Orient Map Ahead 0 ccccceceecesecceneeeeeeeeeceaaeeeseeeeseaaeesseneeessaaeeeeneees 106 Waypoint Navigation 00 0 cceeeccieeeeeeeeneceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaeeeeeneea 106 Capture Point 2 2 ceg ctes neh ccehvens dae atin eased de cerned ete fees ede 107 Gapture Polyline niinen a eaten Meee eae 107 C pture Poly QO ess sccteserecss vats cusearevidecebeticd pa Aa aaan ots 107 Capture Structure SyMb0l cccccceceseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeesseaeeesaeees 107 Point LOG ister endede Wade e ieee ieee hina eee 107 Lin Logonun eect eld ivi Lane beta ee tees 107 ARF MONU seene aE AREE devas KULE EEPE LAPE RALAN EEE a V AAIR EA Ar SR 108 Stupin ani i ea i ee ai 108 CONNECT ai eiiemin aera aa aaea aaea deti vetted aa a aa aa aaaea aA 109 Open XRF Table isc ticle eileen aenn ai a a ie 109 Wiew MOMA eeraa eaen TARR RA AT ACAR cay sunatdne A R A RA ANARA ASEA 109 Layer Controlan toirear i man e eeii aN ae 110 ZOOM LOVE li aera dee ie i etd ee a ee ee 113 View E
34. 190 Discover Mobile User Guide 3 When Discover Mobile has found all the items which meet the selection criteria a prompt will appear asking you to either select the objects in the map or cancel the query If you choose to select the items Discover Mobile will extract the data from your base table and store the results in a temporary selection table The selection table contains only the rows and columns that meet your criteria The default name of the results table is Selection rE DiscoverMobile en 4c 4 55 X 585 2585 agora rs 2S SOSO SS 2292309 RN res 225 aces res 2S S gt a5 e 2S2 e525 5252528 ererererere 55252525 PLS ve revere SSS SES are 3 SES RLL KEEA Co at ASAA Items found by a query and highlighted in the display To save and re use a query To save the query tap the Save button and assign an appropriate name To re use a saved query tap the Load button and select the query Using Query Operators and Functions At the base of the Query dialog are drop down lists that can be used to build queries Quite complex queries can be created using the operators and functions in Discover Mobile A drop down list of operators is available to assist in creating the query expression 9 Working with Tables 191 Function a _ A selection of the operations available from the Query dialog Operators Comparison Operators Logical Operators
35. 30 seconds a continuous NMEA data stream should be displayed each line will start with GP indicating a successful connection with the receiver EF DiscoverMobile 4 q 3 33 fok GPGSA A 3 16 15 21 06 18 7rr 5 0 2 GPGSV 3 1 10 21 68 192 41 18 64 33 GPGSV 3 2 10 16 31 250 34 26 31 0 GPGSV 3 3 10 10 06 137 30 30 05 35 GPGGA 053230 465 3753 1020 S 145 GPGSA A 3 16 15 21 06 18 rrrrrr19 0 2 GPGSV 3 1 10 21 68 192 41 18 64 33 GPGSV 3 2 10 16 31 250 34 26 31 0 GPGSV 3 3 10 10 06 137 31 30 05 35 DATA GPS 145 002 37 885 too to fe Stari Stop ar Sean E Appendix C Working with Portable XRF Devices 329 If uncertain about the receiver s settings or the data stream fails to appear or a message Bad Data is displayed the settings are incorrect Try pressing the Scan button at the bottom of the dialog Discover Mobile will run through every permutation of settings attempting to establish a connection to your GPS receiver Once a valid data stream from the GPS is displayed press the Stop button Make a note of the settings for future reference and close the dialog These settings will be automatically retained unless Discover Mobile is reinstalled or the settings are changed for instance if a different GPS receiver is used Refer to Connecting to the GPS Receiver for more information and how to troubleshoot the GPS connection Select the GO gt GPS gt Connect menu option
36. 312 Discover Mobile User Guide Setting Up the Bluetooth Connection to an XRF Device Connecting a Niton XRF device with the PPC on Windows Mobile 5 or 6 Connecting an Olympus Innov X XRF device with the PPC on Windows Mobile 2003 Connecting a Niton XRF device with the PPC on Windows Mobile 5 or 6 1 On the PPC select the Menu gt Bluetooth Settings option and then enable the Turn on Bluetooth and Make this device visible to other devices options 2 Start the Niton XRF device and log in 3 On the PPC select the Menu gt Bluetooth Settings option again 4 If the Niton device is not visible in the Device tab select the Add New Device option and select the Niton device once the device list is populated Press Next 5 Leave the Passcode empty and press Next 6 The Niton device will now request connection with the PPC Press Yes enter the Niton Passcode 0000 and then press Done Q E Yy 4 1 26 Enter Passcode Enter a passcode to establish a secure connection with XL3t 34008 peal ijatstalsiel7isiofol l Tab af w ef ol ty vl ul if of el E cap als Sal E o hy id kl ul ut aeled dde nim hA Oo o aaa Cancel iii Next Entering the XRF password to open the Bluetooth connection Appendix C Working with Portable XRF Devices 313 7 Back in the Device tab select the Niton device and in the Partnership Seitings dialog enable the Serial Port option and press Save If the
37. 5 To change the symbol library between the Australian US or Canadian symbol set select the required Symbol Set from the Structure Symbol Library pull down list 6 To change the symbol style and size tap the Advanced Symbol Style button to display the Structure Symbol Styles options Here the structure symbol size colour and background and effects can be modified Any changes made to the Font or Symbol text boxes will be overridden by the Structure Type and Structure Symbol Library selected To add more structure measurements to the map repeat the above steps 10 Working with Objects 205 Note oe Creating GPS located Objects Use the GPS toolbar to Record a GPS Point Track Log Record a GPS Line Track Log Capture points polylines and polygons via the GPS See Working with the GPS for information on connecting the GPS and other GPS related tasks The first time you use Discover Mobile you will need to configure the GPS communication settings for your particular receiver You can do this from GO gt GPS gt Seiup Connection or GO gt Preferences command It is important that you set the correct port number communication format and speed for your GPS receiver If these settings are incorrect Discover Mobile will not be able to communicate with the receiver Refer to your GPS User Guide for details on the GPS communication settings and Working with the GPS in this guide The tools available from the GPS to
38. Change the Type to GeoTiff Files TIF using the pick list and select the GeoTiff to be opened After the GeoTiff has been selected Discover Mobile will automatically load the image into the map window and create a TAB file in the same directory If Discover Mobile cannot recognise the registration parameters then an error will be displayed In this situation you will need to manually register the image in MapInfo Professional and then copy the image file and TAB file over to the PPC Closing Tables Any open table can be closed using the Close Table command To close a table 1 Choose GO gt File gt Close Table 2 From the list of open tables tap on the required table to be closed 3 Tap OK and the table is then closed and removed from the display Alternatively ii Tap the Layer Control button or select GO gt View gt Layer Control 2 Select the layer you wish to close and then tap the Remove button The table will be removed from the layer control and the file closed To close all open tables Choose GO gt File gt Close Table When you close all tables the map display will show no data The Close All Tables command will disconnect the GPS connection 186 Discover Mobile User Guide Copying Tables A new table can be created from any open table providing it is not a raster table The original table remains unchanged and open for all further edits To save a copy of a table as a new file 1 Choos
39. File Zoom Tools Help DiscoverMobile e 2 16 lok Creation of new data fields for a new table 4 To add a user defined field tap the Add button A new entry titled NewField will be added to the field grid You can assign a name to the field by tapping NewField in the Name column and typing the required field name In the Type and Size columns select the field properties For more information about fields and their properties see Field Types To remove a field tap the field name and then tap the Delete button Removal of a field is permanent and a message confirming the deletion is displayed 5 To add an Auto field which automatically captures data from the GPS select a field from the pick list next to the Add button The name and properties of Auto fields are predefined For more information about Auto fields see Auto Fields 6 To select the map projection tap Set Projection If you do not set the projection the default map projection will be used For more information about map projection see Projection Important When creating new tables in Discover Mobile it is strongly recommended that you use the same map projection for all tables 170 Discover Mobile User Guide Important Note Note 7 To set the easting and northing table bounds tap the Set Bounds button For more information see Set Bounds Cloning Tables When creating new tables it is often convenient to use the structure and pr
40. GPS maga ai 10 Gps 10 ActiveSync Paired devices Business Card Exchange Personal Network Manager Appendix C Working with Portable XRF Devices 321 10 From the Bluetooth Paired devices screen tap the Add bution 2 Bluetooth Mana lt 2 20 fok Bluetooth Paired devices rano Garmin GPS 10 Ej 11 Tap the browse button to display registered Bluetooth devices 2 Bluetooth Mana q 2 21 tok Bluetooth Device Pairing ee a How to use this screen To add a device to the list of paired devices tap the lookup icon select a device enter the passkey and then tap OK The Bluetooth pairing procedure establishes a secret key that is used in all future connections to authenticate device identity and encrypt data Ej 322 Discover Mobile User Guide 12 Select the Olympus Innov X Bluetooth device and then tap OK to proceed A Bluetooth Mana e 2 23 CD Bluetooth Browser Select a Bluetooth device View 2 Ej 13 Using the PPC keyboard type the Olympus Innov X password in the Passkey box The factory default password is 1 A Bluetooth Mana q 2 24 fok Bluetooth Device Pairing Device Omega_61118 a raster F How to use this screen To add a device to the list of paired devices tap the lookup icon select a device enter the passkey and then tap OK The Bluetooth pairing procedure establi
41. Guide Note DiscoverMobile er lt 11 06 ok Choose layer to insert new objects into When using the various GPS Capture options with Named Styles ensure to first set the GO gt GPS gt Setup Data Capture Tables for each of the object types points polylines and polygons For instance create a General table with suitable generic fields particularly a large Comments field and set this as the default for all three object types Then if the Named Styles dialog is cancelled by the user during the GPS capture process for any object type i e no style is appropriate for the captured object the object will be nevertheless captured into this general table e g for unanticipated data types such as waterholes historic workings meteorite impact craters sites of cultural significance etc Using the example named styles dataset 1 To capture a soil sample location in the map window display the Drawing toolbar and tap the Capture Point button Tap on any location in the map window records where this soil sample was collected In the field the user would have a GPS receiver configured and connected to Discover Mobile and would use the Capture GPS Point button to capture their current location as the soil sample location However unless you are in the Mt Isa region of Australia a GPS location will not place the user within the example dataset 2 The Named Styles dialog will appear automatically
42. Libraries In order for Discover Mobile to store your structural measurements correctly the structure data table must contain a Struct_Code field This field will store the corresponding Discover Structure Code for the nominated structural measurement type In accordance with Discover Discover Mobile provides three structural symbol font files for Australian Canadian and US structural symbols e Australian Structural Symbols modified by AGSO e Canadian Structural Symbols modified by the GSC e USA Structural Symbols modified by USGS Structure symbols are based on those described in the Australian Geological Survey Organisation AGSO mapping style guide with the addition of extra symbols such as schistosity L1 L3 lineation and general trend lines A full table of symbols for the Australian US and Canadian symbol sets together with Discover structural codes and keyboard codes is given in Appendix A of this manual 182 Discover Mobile User Guide Note For a number of structure types such as bedding or cleavage Discover uses different symbols for horizontal and vertical dip Adding Structural Data Fields The structural data tables may be created in MapInfo Professional prior to being transferred to Discover Mobile or they may be created directly in Discover Mobile as required If you create the tables in MapInfo Professional you must ensure that the field names and data types conform to the standard convention
43. Long Longitude position in decimal degrees referenced to the WGS84 ellipsoid Altitude Altitude measured in metres above sea level GMT Time GPS fix was obtained in Universal Time UTC or Greenwich Mean Time GMT format Quality Quality of the GPS fix No Fix no GGA data available GPS Standard GPS fix DGPS Differential GPS fix Num Sats Number of satellites currently being tracked H Dilution Horizontal dilution of precision 118 Discover Mobile User Guide GPS GNSS DOP GSA Contains GPS information received from the GSA sentence of the NMEA data stream The GSA sentence provides details on the nature of the GPS fix the number of satellites being used to calculate the current position and the dilution of precision DOP The DOP is an indication of the effect of satellite geometry on the accuracy of the fix The DOP is a unit less number where the smaller the value the better For a 3D fix a value of 1 0 would be considered almost perfect An example of this data sentence in provided below GPGSA A 3 28 07 08 04 12 5 7 8 9 8 0B The information reported from the GSA sentence includes e Mode GPS selection mode Options are Auto 2D 3D or Forced 2D 3D Fix Type GPS fix type Values include No Fix 2D Fix or 3D Fix To obtain a 3D fix the GPS must be tracking 4 or more satellites P Dilution Dilution of Precision PDOP H Dilution Horizontal Dilution of P
44. Map Ahead 106 GPS gt Point Log 107 GPS gt Setup Connection 105 GPS gt Setup Data Capture Tables 106 GPS gt Waypoint Navigation 106 Graduated Symbol theme 102 158 H Halos around objects 222 Hotlink button 61 Individual Value theme 102 Individual value theme 159 Information button 61 219 Information Tool 93 Insert a node 63 Insertion Layer 116 Installation 3 Integer fields 129 Invisible 165 Italics of objects 222 K Keyboard use 58 382 Discover Mobile User Guide L Label tool 95 Landsat image 165 Layer Control 110 136 137 138 Layer Control button 57 110 Layer list controls 111 137 Layered display 51 Legend button of themes 103 Legends of thematic maps 159 Level of transparency 122 165 Licence 3 Licence file 5 Licence file security 8 License the software 5 Licensing procedure 5 Line button 63 202 Line colour 123 223 Line style 62 Line styles 223 Line thickness 123 223 Line Track Log 64 205 Location on screen 58 Logical fields 129 Logical operators of queries 192 Lost power 8 Main menu 55 Main toolbar 49 56 57 Maintain queries 96 Maintain tables 127 184 Make a layer editable 137 Map grid 114 146 149 Map menu 100 Map scale 60 Map session 126 Map window 55 Map X 116 Map Y 116 Map gt Add Cosmetic Layer 101 Map gt Create Theme 102 Map gt Map Projection 104 Map gt Modify Themes 103 Map gt Save Window As 101 Map gt Set Insertion Layer 101 MapInfo Prof
45. Mone HE Dienlaw A MME Preferences dialog A summary of all the settings available from this dialog is available at Preference Settings Connection GO gt Preferences gt GPS gt Connection The configuration and use of these parameters in discussed Working with the GPS and Working with Differential GPS DGPS Consult these topics before adjusting the various GPS Connection parameters e GPS Protocol Setup Update Interval Preferred Interval Stop After Error 72 Discover Mobile User Guide e SSF Logging Post Processing GPS Protocol The GPS Protocol option allows specification of NMEA US based National Marine Electronics Association protocol e Trimble protocol only for use with Trimble Post Process DGPS receivers A log file option available for troubleshooting NMEA connections e A Trimble simulation mode Typically this will be set to default NMEA option Setup The Setup dialog will vary depending on which GPS Protocol has been selected NMEA Protocol See Connecting to an NMEA GPS Receiver for a full description of the use of these options Port Port setting refers to the serial communication COM port on the Pocket PC device to which the GPS receiver is connected The COM port on which the GPS receiver is connected may change depending on the type of PPC device and the communication options it supports By default Discover Mobile will attempt to connect on CO
46. Name dropdown If no Mobile Styles are displayed navigate to the table using the Browse button and locate the folder containing Mobile Styles Edit the Picklist Name if required Type a Picklist Description if required Click OK to import the picklist 354 Discover Mobile User Guide Thematic Map Layer Import Thematic Map Layer Styles a Map Window lsa_Geology Map Themes Ind value with UNITNAME Picklist Name Ind value with UNITNAME Picklist Description Point Objects Line Objects Polygon Objects On the Import Thematic Map Layer Styles dialog select a Theme from the active Map Window from the Themes dropdown Edit the Picklist Name if required Type a Picklist Description if required Select the Picklist Type Point Objects Line Objects or Polygon Objects Click OK to import the picklist To export a picklist 1 Select Data Entry gt Picklist Manager to open the Picklist Manager 2 Under Picklists click the Configure button and select Export Picklist The Export Picklist dialog is displayed Appendix D Digitizing and Data Entry in Discover 355 Export picklist to external file File Types EB Legend LEG amp Mobile Picklist TXT Mobile Style TXT 3 Choose a File Type and click OK Legend Export as legend file for use in the Drillholes gt Legend Editor tool Mobile Picklist Export as Discover Mobile picklist Mobile Style Export as Di
47. PC Communication Requirements Getting Help The Discover Mobile User Guide PDF is installed on the desktop PC under C Program Files Encom Discover Mobil e Document ati on 82 bit or C Program Files x86 Encom Discover Mobile Documentation 64 bit Help for the Discover Mobile mobile tools on both the mobile device PPC and the desktop can be accessed from the DiscoverMobile gt Help menu Contacting PBS You can obtain product support for Discover by e mail or telephone or from your PBS reseller Contact details are E mail software support pb com Web www pbencom com Telephone 61 2 9437 6255 2 Best Practice with a Portable PC 11 Best Practice with a Portable PC In this section Running Programs and Memory Power and Battery Use Data Storage Running Programs and Memory Check the task manager on the Pocket PC PPC periodically to make sure that a large number of programs are not currently running For example if the close button the X at the top right of the screen is used to close Discover Mobile the program is only removed from the screen but remains in memory To exit properly the GO gt Exit menu should be selected If there are many programs running in the background the Pocket PC battery will be quickly used up Power and Battery Use Choose a topic Bluetooth Manager Charging External Batteries In Vehicle Recharging Bluetooth Manager If you are using a Blueto
48. Polyline Freehand 94 Tools gt Add Structure Symbol 93 Tools gt Center 92 Tools gt Cursor Position 93 Tools gt Info 93 Tools gt Pan 92 Tools gt Select 91 Index 385 Tools gt Zoom In 92 Tools gt Zoom Out 92 Total accumulated distance 61 Total number of characters in fields 130 Transferring data 8 Transparency controls 165 Travel Speed 151 True Type fonts 297 U Universal Serial Bus USB connections 8 Up button on Layer Control 111 137 US structural symbols 181 USB connections 8 User interface 49 55 V Vector display rotation 114 144 Vertex Edit tool 63 Vertex point 63 View Entire Layer 60 View menu 109 View gt Drawing Toolbar 115 View gt GPS Overlay 114 View gt GPS Toolbar 115 View gt Layer Control 110 View gt Main Toolbar 115 View gt Map Grid 114 View gt Map Rotation 114 View gt Scale Bar 114 View gt Select Toolbar 115 View gt Status Window 115 View gt Table Browser 119 View gt Table Structure 119 View gt View Entire Layer 114 View gt Zoom Level 113 Visibility 57 110 visibility 135 W Width mode 60 Windows CE 3 0 2 Windows Explorer 8 Windows HPC 2000 2 Windows compatible bitmap 101 Wireless LAN 8 X XRF 311 configure 333 connecting 332 334 project path 332 XRF data capture 337 XRF devices 311 XRF menu 108 XRF gt Connect 109 XRF gt Open XRF Table 109 XRF gt Setup 108 Z Zoom in and out 58 Zoom Level 60 Zoom level 60 Zoom In button 59 144 Zoom lIn tool 92
49. Rover file with the same name as the file into which data is being captured This rover file is required to allow post processing differential correction to be carried out on captured data This option is only designed for use with Trimble Post Process DGPS units For recommended settings for Postprocessed DGPS see Working with Differential GPS DGPS 6 Using the GO Menu 77 Note Post Processing This enables the Carrier phase signal of the Trimble output to be logged Utilizing this signal in tandem with the default Code phase signal will increase the accuracy of the post processing correction however it requires the user to be within 50 kilometres of the base station and to maintain continuous Carrier phase lock for 10 minutes Three logging modes are available None no carrier phase data is logged The data set will not be able to be post processed Continuous carrier phase data is logged at 1 second intervals Classic carrier phase data is logged at heat beat rate when not capturing an object location and at the object logging rate when logging an object This option is only designed for use with Trimble Post Process DGPS units See Carrier Phase Logging for further information Point Capture GO gt Preferences gt GPS gt Point Capture Tolerance Min Tolerance Max e Min Sample Points Precision Filter Tolerance Min Controls the minimum separation distance Discover Mobile
50. Setup or via GO gt GPS gt Setup Connection open the GPS setup screen 5 Set the required communication Port that the receiver is connected to e g Bluetooth or serial port Certain devices such as Trimble GeoExplorer units running Windows Mobile 5 have a GPS Connector or similar application under Start gt Settings gt Connections which clearly identify the COM ports for the GPS receiver and the various protocols 6 The various Masks available in this dialog allow poor satellite data to be filtered out e g satellites low on the horizon or those resulting in a high signal to noise ratio improving the precision on the position fix These are discussed fully under the Trimble Protocol section of the Preferences menu a These settings will be automatically retained unless Discover Mobile is reinstalled or the settings are changed for instance if a different GPS receiver is used 11 Working with the GPS 259 Note 8 Select the GO gt GPS gt Connect menu option to connect to the GPS receiver Once the receiver has found sufficient valid satellites use GO gt GPS gt Monitor Satellite Status to observe the current visible satellites a current position fix will be displayed A GPS Fix 2D or GPS Fix 3D message will be displayed at the top of the map window Discover Mobile is now ready for data capture After this initial GPS connection setup the user only has to enable the GO gt GPS gt Connect op
51. The display order visibility selection and editing properties of these layers are controlled by a Layer Control dialog For more information about creating and managing layers and other view control tasks see Controlling Layers and the View Map Window Projection Like MapInfo Professional the map display window in Discover Mobile has an associated map projection The default projection assigned to an empty Discover Mobile map window is Latitude Longitude WGS 84 Like MapInfo Professional Discover Mobile will automatically adopt the map projection of the first table TAB file which is added to the Map window All other data with the exception of Raster layers will be added to the map window in this map window projection If required the coordinates of objects in other projections will be transformed on the fly to match the coordinate system of the map window It is worth noting however that coordinate transformation is a processor intensive procedure and can significantly increase the time required to redraw the map window For best performance you are encouraged to convert all TAB files into the same base projection before using them with Discover Mobile The map window projection can be altered using the GO gt Preferences gt Map and User Projection menu options see Controlling the Map Projection An exception is when a raster image is open in this case the map window and all contained vector data will then take on the projection of the
52. Use the Vertex Edit tool select and edit vertices of polyline and polygon objects Each vertex can be moved relocated or deleted See Edit and Delete Nodes Use the Add Vertex button to insert nodes on a selected polyline or polygon To use first select the object and tap the Vertex Edit button The vertices of the selected object are displayed Tap the stylus at the required position on the polyline or polygon to add a node Hold the stylus on the screen to drag the new node to the desired position Add Nodes 64 Discover Mobile User Guide Note Use the Object Style button to modify the display properties of a selected object The style properties dialog will change depending on the type of object selected To alter the appearance of an object first select it using one of the select tools and then tap the Object Style button See Formatting Drawing Objects GPS Toolbar S lt t Ve e dle et de Bly The GPS toolbar is used to Connect to a GPS receiver e Record a GPS Point Track Log e Record a GPS Line Track Log Capture points polylines and polygons via the GPS Navigate to a known location Activate the North Up or Auto Rotate map function Modify the GPS information display properties for the Status Window readout See the Connecting to the GPS and Creating GPS located Objects for a detailed description of these tools To automatically prompt for a named style or to edit attributes or coordin
53. View Toolbar Draw Edit Toolbar GPS Toolbar All operations performed by the toolbar buttons plus a number of additional functions can be accessed from the GO menu For more information see Using the GO Menu system 50 Discover Mobile User Guide Interacting with the Software Interaction with the Discover Mobile software is similar to most PPC applications The user interacts with the software using a handheld stylus The stylus is the primary input method and is used throughout the software for pointing selecting and data or text entry The stylus is generally used to tap or tap and drag an item such as when making a selection editing text or objects manipulating a list or drawing a polyline or polygon A tap is simply the act of gently touching the display screen surface with the plastic stylus never use a conventional writing pen To tap and drag place the stylus gently on the screen and drag it across to the desired position while maintaining contact with the display surface Applying cancelling and closing application dialogs on a PPC can be slightly different to a desktop computer Usually screen interaction is performed by one of two methods Tapping on a displayed button labelled with text such as OK Apply or Cancel or Tapping on the OK button in the top right corner of the screen Most dialogs will have an OK button in the top right of the screen located in the Title bar Some windows may n
54. Zoom Out button 59 Zoom Out tool 92
55. all tables loaded or display hidden tables in Data Entry 6 Make the table you want to enter in to editable T Digitize a point object using the tools on the Maplnfo Drawing toolbar You cannot enter a new browser record using the Data Entry tool for a mappable table To create a new record you must digitize a new map object in the map window 8 Use the navigation bar or keyboard arrow keys to move up and down the table records and left and right between columns You can then Edit value Clear value Copy value Paste value OS Delete Record S7 Filter Use the TAB key and right left arrow keys to move between cells Use the navigation bar and up down arrow keys to move between records Click a cell to edit If a picklist is defined in the validation settings select from the valid picklist values Values are validated on entry Right click in the cell and select Clear Value or click in the cell and press DEL Click in the cell and press CTRL C Copies a single value to the clipboard Click in the cell and press CTRL V Pastes a single value from the clipboard Delete selected records In the left most column click CTRL click or SHIFT Cclick to select the required records Click once to display only records that fail the validation rules Click again to display all records Appendix D Digitizing and Data Entry in Discover 377 2 Validate Revalidate all records in the table Label Label struct
56. and line style and the preferred number of displayed grid lines can be modified using this dialog Although you can set a preferred value for the number of grid lines you want Discover Mobile to display the grid spacing is automatically calculated to provide the best grid spacing for the current map scale so you may find that the actual number of lines displayed on the map may vary from the number specified The display properties for the Map Grid are also applied to the Discover Mobile Scale Bar 6 Using the GO Menu 85 Note DiscoverMobile e 4c 4 04 ok Labels Size Color a Lines Width Color I Number of qrid lines Grid Style Dynamic map grid setup dialog The projection of the displayed map grid is controlled via the Map Projection section of the Preferences menu Waypoint Tolerance The waypoint tolerance control is used to set a minimum radial distance around a selected waypoint When you approach to within the specified distance of the selected waypoint Discover Mobile will prompt you with a message saying that the waypoint has been reached The default distance value is 10m which means Discover Mobile will report that you have arrived at your selected location when the distance between the GPS current position and the waypoint location is 10m or less See Navigating to a Known Point for further information System Settings GO gt Preferences gt System Settings Provides
57. as a Trimble Reference Station TRS or Community Base Station CBS will likely have an accurate reference position 282 Discover Mobile User Guide The Corrected Files group lets you specify the path and folder that the output files will be written to The current path and folder is displayed beside the Output Folder button Press OK to run the differential correction once completed a message similar to the following will appear Differential Correction Completed 1 file processed In this file 100 0 165 of 165 selected positions were code corrected by postprocessing 4 total of 165 positions were written 165 100 0 are postprocessed code File cor1910a txt contains a detailed log More Details Differential Correction Completed dialog Export Corrected Rover file The corrected Rover SSF file requires export as a MapInfo Professional MIF file to be usable by MapInfo Professional Run the Export utility by selecting the PostProcess gt Export Corrected Rover File By default the most recently used data files are selected as input files 11 Working with the GPS 283 Input Files Folder E Data DGPS Selected Files Cancel Outcrop_mapping cor Browse Help Output Folder ESD atas DGPS Browse Choose an Export Setup Sample Maplnfo MIF Setup z Format Maplnfo MIF Type of Export Features Positions and Attributes Output Option Combine and output to Export folder GIS Coo
58. as well as initial sample numbers for each data type Range Styles The symbol style of numeric point data can be permanently altered with a Range Style library This functionality is similar to the Point Classification tool in the Discover Geochem module A Range Style library consists of a series of user defined numeric ranges each with an assigned symbol style e Creating a Range Style Library Editing a Range Style Library Creating a Range Style Library on the Desktop For information on applying range styles seeApplying Range Styles and Applying a Range Style Library During XRF Data Capture Creating a Range Style Library 1 To create a Range Style library within Discover Mobile select the Go gt Edit gt Range Styles menu option 2 Select the New Style button top left 3 Enter a name for the library it will be saved into the Current Project directory as set under Preferences gt Directories 10 Working with Objects 241 DiscoverMobile en 10 41 Save As foder Type 4 Location Storage Card g 4 4 Press the Add button bottom right a new range will be added to the library Enter the desired lower gt and upper high lt values Also set an appropriate symbol style by pressing the adjacent symbol button 5 Repeat step 4 for each additional required range DiscoverMobile er 10 42 lok Copper styles v _ Percentile 6 Range values can treated as percentil
59. atmospheric conditions Once the GPS starts to acquire satellites choose GO gt GPS gt Monitor Satellite Status to view the position and status GPS Status 2 lt sss Date Date Time time Latitude Longitude long HDOP hdop VDOP vdop elite Strength Plot 9090099 Fx IDC_FIX Speed IDC_SPEED Alt IDC_ALT Course IDC_COURS The message Fix None displayed at the top of the Discover Mobile Screen indicates that there are insufficient satellites to triangulate a position When the GPS has obtained enough satellites to triangulate a position the message changes to Fix 3D If not enough satellite have been located for an accurate fix the message Fix 2D is displayed A 3D fix is required for accurate positioning 332 Discover Mobile User Guide Connecting and Configuring Discover Mobile and the XRF device Once a Bluetooth connection to the XRF device is established the following items need to be set to allow Discover Mobile to interact with the portable XRF device prior to data capture Specify the XRF Project Path Configure the XRF Connection Connect to the XRF device Enhance the Map Window Display Specify the XRF Project Path The Project Path controls the location of the output XRF data files To configure 1 Select the GO gt Preferences gt Directories option 2 Under the Project Root option select a root directory 3 Under the next Current Project opt
60. automatically populate the soil_sampling table maintaining the same sample number series However selecting an 80 mesh size from the Named Style dialog will automatically populate a size field in this table with the 80 string rather than requiring the user to select this from a Pick List 10 Working with Objects 229 e Creating a Named Style Library e Creating Named Styles on the Desktop e Sample Named Styles Dataset e File Management with Named Styles e Setting up Named Styles for Multiple Users For information on applying named styles see Applying Named Styles Creating a Named Style Library Prior to assigning a Named Style to an object a Named Style library needs to be created Select the GO gt Edit gt Named Styles menu option and in the following dialog press the New File button to name and create a new library This will be saved to the Named Styles directory as a text file The default library is named NamedStyles txt The named styles directory is set under the GO gt Preferences gt Directories gt Named Styles command it is recommended to set this to a location such a Storage Card rather than the default My Documents location In the Named Styles dialog press the Add button to add a new style For each Named Style the following can be defined Name the style name e g 80 mesh This name is used solely for user reference convenience and is not used as an attribute Object Type point p
61. be entered in existing TAB files the data entry tool does not create Maplnfo tables nor alter their structure To change the table structure use the Maplnfo Professional Table gt Maintenance gt Table Structure tool To enter non mappable data with the Data Entry tool 1 On the Discover menu point to Data Entry and select Setup Tables The Select Tables dialog is displayed All open tables are listed in the Select Tables dialog box Select a table To open another table Click the Open button and select the TAB file you want to open in Maplnfo Professional Click OK to load the selected table in the Data Entry tool The table names are displayed on the tab at the top of the data sheet The number of records and the current selected record are displayed on the navigation bar at the bottom of the dialog box 1 of 5152 gt Pi Use these tools to open another table or view table information Z Open another table for data entry 372 Discover Mobile User Guide 6 p Close selected table View information about the open table such as Name Path and Projection gt gt View all tables loaded or display hidden tables in Data Entry Use the navigation bar or keyboard arrow keys to move up and down the table records and left and right between columns You can then Edit value Clear value Copy value Paste value GP New Record J Delete Record Sy Filter Validate Use the TAB
62. contents are displayed at the selected scale Zoom In and Out The Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons on the Select toolbar increase and decrease the view scale To use select one of the tools and then tap inside the display The view magnifies by a factor of 2x or 0 5x centred at the point of the stylus tap Alternatively tap and drag the stylus to define a zoom rectangle View Extents Choose GO gt View gt View Entire Layer to display the full extents of a selected layer or all layers For large or complex datasets it may take a long time to draw the entire layer Pan and Center The Pan and Center tools share the same position on the Select toolbar Tap the arrow button next to the tool to select the other tool To pan the view tap the tool button and then tap and drag the stylus on the map in the direction you want the map to move To centre the view tap the tool button and then tap the display where you want the new centre of the display to be positioned Rotate Discover Mobile provides an option to interactively rotate the map view This option is only available for vector layers and cannot be used if a raster layer is present in a map window Choose GO gt View gt Map Rotation to display the rotation dialog Adjust the slider bar to set the map rotation angle or type a value into the rotation box To return the map view to default north up drag the slider back to zero degrees or type 0 zero in the rotation value box
63. current position symbol will also change from the default symbol to an orientated red triangle This will point in the direction of the waypoint as long as the waypoint navigation function is active The default waypoint symbol can be changed under the GO gt GPS gt Default Styles gt Way Point Navigation Style menu option By default Discover Mobile reports the waypoint bearing as an angular value clockwise from North The distance value will be reported in the distance units specified under the Preferences menu 11 Working with the GPS 265 E AJ cps Fix 3D 4 9 12 amp Bearing 129 0 Distance 127653 0 m r Ilil ot A kjo et ge 2 e Di Ol Oe gt When the user arrives within the tolerance distance of the selected waypoint Discover Mobile will display a message indicating arrival at the destination and will automatically turn off the waypoint navigation tool The default waypoint tolerance value is 10m this can be modified in the GO gt Preferences gt Waypoint Tolerance value option To navigate to a different waypoint turn the waypoint navigation tool off and then on again by tapping the Waypoint Navigation button Select the new destination point and Discover Mobile will re compute the distance and bearing from the current location to the new waypoint 266 Discover Mobile User Guide Tracking Your Path e GPS Point Log GPS Line Log GPS Point Log Choose GO gt GPS gt Poin
64. device Click OK and they will be updated to be compatible with the Table Merge tool Transferring Data Transferring data to and from the computer and mobile device is a matter of selecting the appropriate method of transfer 3 Data Preparation 29 Note To transfer data from the local or network disk click the Copy data from PC to device button To transfer data from the mobile device click the Copy data from device to PC button Updating with New Device Data When you transfer from device to the PC all the tables from the Device project directory will be placed inEncom DM Tables_ WM Other files picklists namedstyles images and hotlinks folders will all be placed in the same directory overwriting the existing copies updating them with any modification to these performed in Discover Mobile With the Tables directory however you will then need to update your original tables in the project root directory with the data either with the Table Merge tool or a manual update with a file copy and over write Make sure to update your original table once you have retrieved the device data Failure to do so may result in data loss as device and desktop data is overwritten during the transfer Connection Status The status of the connection from the PC to mobile device to displayed at the bottom of the dialog Data can only be transferred when the PC and mobile device are correctly connected Convert Hotlinks Di
65. en 4c 1 57 X ARP ORS BP tR ERJ Ol Ble ile x col B 2 B ct A successful GPS connection indicated by a red circle in the centre of the map display and all buttons on the GPS button bar are active To view your current position coordinates and determine the zoom scale of your map display tap the Status window button which is located next to the GPS button on the main toolbar The floating Status window will appear on the map displaying the current position fix and other information from the GPS It will also indicate the current zoom level of the map window To change the zoom level of the map window tap the small arrow next to the multi zoom button on the Select toolbar and choose the zoom scale menu Adjust the zoom scale to an appropriate level e g width 1000m If Discover Mobile cannot establish a valid connection to the GPS receiver or if it detects a large number of errors in the incoming data stream an error message will appear If this occurs check the following and try again e The GPS is turned on If the receiver is a Trimble unit ensure that is outputting the desired protocol NMEA or Trimble see the receivers documentation and configuration software such as GPS Controller The receiver is connected to the mobile device cables are correctly connected or Bluetooth connection established The appropriate protocol and communication settings have been set in Discover Mobile to match
66. file tick box can be used to save a log of the raw GPS data to a text file The text file is saved to the MY DOCUMENTS folder on the PPC and is called GPSLog txt 258 Discover Mobile User Guide Note Only use the log to file option to assist with debugging a GPS connection If difficulties are experienced maintaining a GPS connection or errors are encountered using the GPS encounter record a 1 minute log file under normal operation Email this text file as an attachment to pbb support pb com along with a description of the problem so Piney Bowes Business Insight can assist in resolving the issue Connecting to a Trimble Receiver Trimble s high precision receivers e g the GeoExplorer series of integrated mobile device and receivers and DGPS receivers e g the ProXT utilize Trimble s proprietary TSIP protocol To setup a connection with a receiver using this protocol T Under the GO gt Preferences menu option ensure that the GPS Protocol is set to Trimble 2 If necessary turn on the GPS and check that it is connected correctly to the PPC device via the appropriate cables or connections e g a Bluetooth or serial port connection See Connection Hardware for further information 3 Ensure that no other third party GPS software is running on the PPC most PPC devices will only allow one software application to access the GPS communication port at a time 4 Either via GO gt Preferences gt Connection gt
67. grid The table validation columns are initially blank Validation settings that are applicable to each field are shaded blue For example you can only select a look up table of text values for a text field type Char Similarly minimum and maximum numerical values can only be set for numerical fields type Integer Smalllnt Float and Decimal 4 Make the validation settings for each field or as required To clear a selection in the Setup Digitizing Table right click in the cell and select Clear Value For more information about individual validation columns see Table Validation Options 5 Click the Save button 368 Discover Mobile User Guide Ga Format Mapinfo Professional Table for valid data entry Table Options Table _Isa_Stream_Geochem Projection AMG Zone 54 AGD 84 Directory C Encom Training Mt Isa Geochemistry lsa_Stream_Geochem TAB Setup Digitizing Tables dialog showing validation settings for each table field Table Validation Options Validation options available from the Data Entry gt Setup Table tool depend on the field type Name Name of the MapInfo Professional field Type MapInfo Professional field type and width where appli
68. is much quicker and simplified tool de Bring up the table browser either by using the Information icon or the GO gt View gt Table Browser menu 2 Tap on the down arrow to the right of the field in the browser for which the pick list file is to be created The edit list dialog will then display 9 Working with Tables 175 DiscoverMobile e e 4 20 ok Granite Sandstone Limestone Dacite s Edit List Selecting the Edit List option from the table browser 3 Type in the attributes required for the field Note Quick Pick auto fields can also be added to the picklist see Auto Fields for more information DiscoverMobile e 4 18 lok Sandstone Limestone Dacite Add Quick Pick PSS iyi X Entering a custom quick pick list 176 Discover Mobile User Guide Note Note 4 When the Pick List of items is complete tap the OK button in the top right of the dialog to save the pick list file 5 The browser dialog will redisplay allowing the user to select any of the entries just created from the drop down menu Auto Fields GO gt Edit gt Quick Pick Options Discover Mobile provides a range of Quick Pick options These allow specified fields to be automatically incremented or decremented or to be populated with a constant value Quick Pick options can also be used to assign object statistics such as region area or line length as well as assigning GPS data to cust
69. level of transparency of a selected layer using the slider bar or by entering a specific percentage value into the central text box Note that no transparency will be applied to the image if the level is set to 0 zero A value of 100 will make the image completely invisible or transparent 166 Discover Mobile User Guide DiscoverMobile en 4E 2 05 lok ylvania_Scanned 100 invisible Raster Transparency controls 9 Working with Tables 167 Working with Tables In this section Adding Tables Maps and Fields Defining Field Properties Managing Tables Searching for Data Adding Tables Maps and Fields You can add a new table by either Using Maplnfo Tables and Raster Images Creating a New Table with Discover Mobile Cloning Tables Using Templates Using MapInfo Tables and Raster Images Discover Mobile supports standard MapInfo Professional table formats TAB files These include MapInfo Professional native TAB files as well as TAB files which reference raster files BMP TIFF GIF JPG PCX SPOT ECW Discover Mobile can also open GeoTIFF images directly even if they do not have an associated TAB file When the table is opened see Opening Tables itis placed at the top of the Layer Control list When a GeoTIFF is opened Discover Mobile loads the image and creates a TAB file in the same directory If Discover Mobile does not recognise the registration parameters
70. licence file from PBS with the filename extension of LIC 1 Introduction 7 7 Copy the licence file to the My Documents folder on the PPC and if you are using a storage card copy the same file to the storage card e g Disk Discover Mobile Storing a copy of the licence file on the storage card is recommended in case the main memory is wiped e g because of a flat battery 8 Start Discover Mobile by tapping Start gt Discover Mobile or by tapping the Start gt Programs gt Discover Mobile icon When Discover Mobile starts the licence dialog is displayed File Zoom Tools Help DiscoverMobile en 11 50 Licence Details 9 Tap the Load button and select the licence file e g Di scMobil eLic LIC Tap Validate to activate the software If the licence information is valid the software will be activated and Discover Mobile is now ready for use Before you begin to use the software backup the software and licence files to your storage card and PC Remember to backup your work frequently Discover Mobile User Guide Warning If your PPC device loses all power due to a flat battery all information stored in the main memory will be lost This includes all installed programs and data you have added to the device since receiving it from the factory You should also keep a copy of the installation CAB file on the storage card so that you can reinstall the software in the field see Reinstalling Discover Mo
71. minimises Discover Mobile to the system tray To exit or terminate Discover Mobile select the GO gt Exit menu The X button in the Title bar will only minimise the Discover Mobile application It does not exit or shutdown the software This means that the application will still be operational even though it may not be visible on the screen To close running programs see Exit Menu Map Window The Map window is used for a variety of purposes including Displaying all data text dialogs images and maps On screen editing object selection and editing e Displaying the GO Menu system Toolbars The toolbars are the primary method of operating Discover Mobile There are four toolbars The Main toolbar is always visible However you can hide and show the Select Drawing and GPS from the main toolbar at the bottom of the screen or from the GO menu Main Toolbar always visible Select View Toolbar Draw Edit Toolbar GPS Toolbar 5 Mobile Interface 57 ui Tapping the arrow next to a toolbar button such as the Select tool will display additional options in a pop up menu v Select Tool Radius Select Tool Rectangle Select Tool Polygon Select Tool RBS amp Ql Ole x oe IRL Bol Main Toolbar ath Bol Use the Main toolbar to Display the GO menu system Open close and maintain tables and views Control the selection visibility and editing properties of a layer Hide and
72. must first make the layer selectable Like layer editing more than one layer may be selectable at the same time However you can only select an object from one layer at a time If two objects overlap and you need to select one of those objects then you will need to turn off the table selection property for the object which is not required To make a layer selectable see Managing Layers 136 Discover Mobile User Guide Insertion Layer New drawing objects are added to the current insertion layer Discover Mobile operates slightly differently to MapInfo Professional in that it supports the editing of multiple layers so the user must specify which one of the editable layers to add the new objects to For information on setting the insertion layer for drawing objects see Setting the Insertion Layer GPS Capture Layers New GPS located objects are added to capture layers specific to each object type For information on setting GPS capture layers see Assigning GPS Capture Layers Cosmetic Layer The Cosmetic Layer is a temporary layer which can be used to hold graphic objects Unlike MapInfo Professional the Cosmetic Layer in Discover Mobile is an optional layer If a Cosmetic Layer has been added to the map then it will be automatically set as the Insertion Layer For more information see Adding a Cosmetic Layer Managing Layers Tap the Layer Control tool or choose GO gt View gt Layer Contro to display the Layer Control di
73. num Returns the larger of two numbers Minimum num num Returns the smaller of two numbers Round num1 num2 Returns a number num1 rounded off to the nearest value of num2 e g if num2 is ten then num1 is rounded to the nearest ten 194 Discover Mobile User Guide Math Functions Sin num Tan num Date Functions CurDate Day date Month date Weekday date Year date String Function Chr num DeformatNumber str Format num str FormatNumber num Instar num str1 str2 Laces str Description Continued Returns the sine of a number num is in radians Returns the tangent of a number num is in radians Description Returns the current date Returns the day of month 1 31 portion of the date Returns the month 1 12 portion of the date Returns the day of week 1 7 portion of the date 1 represents Sunday Returns the year portion e g 2001 of the date Description Returns a character that corresponds to a character code e g Chr 65 returns the string A Reverses the effect of the FormatNumber function returning a string that does not include thousands separators Returns a string representing a formatted number Example Format 12345 678 returns 12 345 68 Returns a string representing a formatted number This function is simpler to use than Format but it gives you less control over formatting
74. object X and Y centroid coordinate object area perimeter length or object rotation angle If you do not wish to assign an action to a field in the table select Quick Pick default action DiscoverMobile e 2 13 ok Table Copper_Hill_Soils v Incremer Quick Picl Quick Picl Object X Object Y Map_X Map_Y Quick Picl Quick Pick Table Setup Users can also create and use custom Quick Pick lists for streamlined entry of attribute information See Pick Lists 9 Working with Tables 173 Note Pick Lists Discover Mobile supports the use of fully customisable pick lists in the table browser window to simplify repetitive data entry tasks and to permit you to use standard look up codes Only use the following creation and editing procedures in Discover Mobile if you do not have access to the desktop Pick ist Editor tool which is much quicker andeasier to use Format The pick list files used in Discover Mobile are standard ASCII text files and can either be created on a Desktop computer using the desktop Picklist Editor tool or a text editor such as Notepad or exported from a database spreadsheet or MapInfo Professional as a text file and then loaded into Discover Mobile Alternatively pick lists can also be created and edited on the fly in Discover Mobile If intending to create a pick list file on a desktop computer it must conform to the format expected by Discover Mobile The pick list files must be ASC
75. or polygon Select the object and then select the Add Nodes menu option or toolbar button Tap with the stylus on a line segment between two existing nodes within the selected object to add a new node at this location See Edit Modes for more information This function also allows a new node to be added to the current polyline or polygon being captured via the GPS The Add Node tool is only used when a polyline or polygon is being captured and the Pause button is active To add new nodes walk to the required location and tap the button The new node will be added to the current polyline or polygon See Creating GPS located Objects Add Line GO gt Tools gt Add Line Draws a Straight line into the current Insertion Layer To use place the stylus at the line start point and drag the stylus across the screen to the endpoint When the stylus is removed a straight line will be drawn between the two points Add Polyline Freehand GO gt Tools gt Add Polyline Freehand This tool allows a Polyline to be drawn into the current Insertion Layer in freehand mode Place the stylus at the start of the line and then trace the line extent keeping the stylus in continuous contact with the screen Removing the stylus from the screen will complete the polyline Add Polygon Freehand GO gt Tools gt Add Polygon Freehand This tool allows a polygon to be drawn into the current insertion layer in freehand mode Place the stylus at the start of the region and
76. protocol allowing connectivity with Trimble DGPS devices such as the Pro XRS and XT with full support for Trimble Post Processing capabilities Trimble protocol supported up to Trimble Pathfinder SDK to version 2 41 For information on installing Discover Mobile see Hardware and Operating System Requirements Installing Discover Mobile Licensing Discover Mobile Transferring Data Between Devices Getting Help For a quick introduction to starting and using Discover Mobile see Getting Started Discover Mobile User Guide Hardware and Operating System Requirements The Discover Mobile application is designed to run on mobile devices which use the Microsoft Windows Mobile 5 and 6 including updates 6 1 and 6 5 edition operating systems For information on the recommended minimum hardware software system specification see Pocket PC Device Requirements e Desktop or Laptop PC Requirements Pocket PC to Desktop PC Communication Requirements Desktop Post processing Software Requirements Pocket PC Device Requirements Pocket PC device running Microsoft Windows Mobile 5 or Windows Mobile 6 Minimum 64 Mb of RAM with 28MB of free space on Main Memory Discover Mobile will not run on handheld devices which run Windows CE NET Windows CE 3 0 5 0 Windows HPC 2000 or handheld machines running earlier operating systems or processors Desktop or Laptop PC Requirements Supported operating syste
77. provide more redundancy that a single file for a month long field campaign For example create a series of field data collection template tables e g soil_template lag_template streams_template etc Ensure that the required Quick Pick Fields have been set for these templates e g incrementing sample numbers by 1 sample type field set to a constant soil geologist set to constant BJ etc Save these to a template directory on the storage card Then clone a new table from these templates e g soils 240507 lag_240507 etc as required and capture the field data into these cloned tables Defining Field Properties Field Types e Quick Pick Fields e Pick Lists Auto Fields Structural Data Fields Field Types The following field types are available when creating fields in a new table see Creating a New Table with Discover Mobile Character Decimal Date Integer Small Integer Float Logical For more information about each field type see New Table 172 Discover Mobile User Guide Note Quick Pick Fields Only use the following creation and editing procedures in Discover Mobile if you do not have access to the desktop Picklist Editor tool which is much quicker andeasier to use You can set actions for data entry fields prior to capturing or creating map objects These actions may include incrementing or decrementing each new object from a starting value updating fields with an
78. raster image 52 Discover Mobile User Guide Saving and Restoring Your Workspace Your Discover Mobile workspace can be saved to and restored from Geoset files Geosets save the state of all open tables plus the characteristics of displayed objects including style overrides zoom layering map projections and zoom details A Geoset is similar to a MapInfo Workspace however the two are not compatible MapInfo Professional is shipped with two utilities to help you create and read Geoset files within MapInfo Professional These utilities are called GEOSET MBX and SEND2MXM MBX which are located in the Map nfo Professional Tools folder To save your workspace i At least one table must be open in the map view 2 Choose GO gt File gt Save Geoset 3 Type the name without the file extension and folder for the Geoset DiscoverMobile en 10 54 Save Geoset Mt Isa Map Folder None x Type Geoeet Files gst v Specify the name and folder location of the required Geoset 4 Tap OK to save the Geoset To open a recently opened Geoset 1 Choose GO gt File gt Recent Files 4 Getting Started 53 2 Select the Geoset and tap OK or double tap the table name To open a Geoset file 1 Choose GOsFile gt Open Table 2 Change the Type to Geoset Files GST using the pick list and select the Geoset to be opened After the Geoset has been selected Discover Mobile will automatically load al
79. selected To add more structure measurements to the map repeat the above steps Field Data Entry and Editing Field data captured with the GPS or the Drawing tools generally need text and numeric information recorded during the capture process sample number regolith type date collected coordinates weight or size etc The type of information that you can record depends on the structure of the table selected as the insertion layer where objects are stored For information about defining tables and fields see the topics in Working with Tables The simplest way to add attributes to a new object is to display the Edit Attributes browser after object capture by setting the Edit Attributes option under GO gt Preferences gt Object Creation to Ask or Always You can then manually type values into the relevant attribute fields appropriate for the sample data type 214 Discover Mobile User Guide Note However much of this attribute information is repetitive incrementing sample or grid peg numbers constant sampler date or has a discrete number of possible values eg rock type code Discover Mobile has a number of tools to simplify object attributing allowing many fields to be automatically attributed For more information about automatically populated field values see Populating Fields You can also streamline the capture of object attributes with Named Styles Fields cannot be added to existing tables They must be defi
80. specify a new image name Click OK to create the new reprojected image Set Table Default View You can improve the speed at which Discover Mobile opens and displays your data by changing the default table view 1 2 Open a table into a map window in MapInfo Professional Set the required map centre and zoom level for the table in the map window Select Discover gt Map Window gt Set Default Table View Choose the table from the pull down list Set Default View Set default map view for table Sylvania_Geology v Click OK to save the default table view 3 Data Preparation 23 Note Save Data as Geoset File A Geoset file is similar to the MapInfo Professional Workspace WOR file Discover Mobile uses a Geoset GST to record information about the current map window zoom level the list of open layers whether zoom layering or style override has been set for a particular layer etc Discover Mobile cannot open a MapInfo Professional Workspace file 1 Open required tables into a map window in MapInfo Professional 2 Set the map window zoom level so that it is quite small and turn on zoom layering function via the Layer control dialog for any layers which contain a lot of data or for large raster images 3 Select Tools gt Tool Manager and load the MapX Geoset utility 4 Select Tools gt MapX Geoset Utility gt Save MapX Geoset As and type a name and location for the new Geoset 5 Copy the d
81. symbols in the insertion layer Used to place structure symbols in the insertion layer Used to draw straight lines in the insertion layer Used to draw polylines in the insertion layer Used to draw freehand polylines in the insertion layer Used to draw polygons in the insertion layer Used to draw freehand polygons in the insertion layer Labels selected objects in the annotation layer Used to place additional text in the annotation layer Select and control vertices of polylines and polygons Used to add additional vertices to polylines and polygons 292 Discover Mobile User Guide r GPS Object Style Modify display properties of selected objects GPS Toolbar GPS Connect Connect Disconnect the GPS port Point Track Log Turn point log tracking on off Line Track Log Turns line log tracking on off Point Capture Captures a single point from GPS to selected map layer Structure Symbol Captures a structural measurement from GPS to selected map layer Insert Node Used to add nodes to GPS polygons and lines while in pause mode GPS Polyline Create polylines from GPS coordinates Capture GPS Polygon Create polygons from GPS coordinates Capture GPS Pause Pause polyline or polygon capture without terminating object Waypoint Reports distance and bearing to a selected point from current Navigation position Auto Rotate Map Rotates the map so that the top of screen is the direction of travel GPS Display Configu
82. the image to a series of smaller work areas and then open and close these as appropriate within Discover Mobile therefore decreasing memory usage and increasing display redraw speeds 1 Open the registered source image into a MapInfo Professional map window 2 In the same mapper create a polygon region to clip the image This can be a polygon drawn into the cosmetic layer and selected Alternatively a table containing a single table could be used such as a tenement boundary if the table contains multiple polygons select the polygon e g tenement of interest 3 Open the Discover gt Images menu and select Clip Image Ensure that the correct image is selected in the pull down list at the top of the dialog Enable the Clip Outside Polygon option and set the Polygon Table to clip against as either Selection or the polygon table name 4 Press OK A new cropped image will be created named after the source image file with a _clipped suffix 3 Data Preparation 21 Convert Tables to Same Projection Like MapInfo Professional Discover Mobile can display multiple tables with different map projections in a single map window While this feature can be very useful it does come at some performance cost In order to display map objects with different projections in the same map window Discover Mobile must perform on the fly coordinate transformations This requires significant processor performance and can slow down a ma
83. to connect to the GPS receiver Once the receiver has found sufficient valid satellites see View Satellite Positions and Status a current position fix will be displayed A GPS Fix 2D or GPS Fix 3D message will be displayed at the top of the map window Discover Mobile is now ready for GPS data capture Connecting to a Trimble GPS receiver Trimble s high precision receivers e g the GeoExplorer series of integrated mobile device and receiver s and DGPS receivers e g the ProXT utilize Trimble s proprietary TSIP protocol To connect Discover Mobile to Trimble receiver it Choose GO gt Preferences menu option and ensure that the GPS Protocol is set to Trimble Turn on the GPS and check that it is connected correctly to the PPC device e g a Bluetooth connection or serial cable Ensure that no other third party GPS software is running on the PPC Most PPC devices will only allow one software application to access the GPS communication port at a time Choose GO gt Preferences gt Connection gt Setup or GO gt GPS gt Setup Connection to open the GPS setup screen Set the required communication port that the receiver is connected to e g Bluetooth or serial port Certain devices such as Trimble GeoExplorer units running Windows Mobile 5 have a GPS Connector or similar application under Start gt Settings gt Connections which clearly identify the COM ports for the GPS receiver and the various protocols
84. to export the picklist Appendix D Digitizing and Data Entry in Discover 357 Mobile Style Style Name METERME Folder C Discover Mobile Encom_DM_Namestyles On the Export Mobile Style dialog edit the Style Name if required Click the browse button to change the location where the named style is saved Click OK to export the picklist To append a picklist onto another picklist 1 Select Data Entry gt Picklist Manager to open the Picklist Manager 2 Under Picklists click the Configure button and select the EA Append Picklist option The Append Picklist dialog is displayed Append Picklist Australian Surface Geology v To Picklist 3 Select a picklist in the Append Picklist and To Picklist combo boxes Only picklists with the same object type can be appended to each other i e polygon to polygon point to point 4 Click OK to append 5 Use the other controls below the Styles box to Delete Rename Edit and order styles in the pickilist 6 Click the Save button 358 Discover Mobile User Guide To delete a picklist 1 2 Select Data Entry gt Picklist Manager to open the Picklist Manager Under Picklists click the Configure button and select the Delete existing picklist option A warning message will appears asking if you want to delete the selected picklist click OK button to delete the picklist To rename a picklist and description 1 2 3 Select D
85. to obtain information about a record in the table or compare one pie wedge in all of the pie charts to draw conclusions about a variable across all the records Pie chart diameters can also be compared to obtain information about the entire data set An example of a pie chart map is shown below relating various assay values 158 Discover Mobile User Guide DiscoverMobile r 3 12 Copper_Hill_Solls 11 000 KR a a ONE iP x mee Re o Example pie chart thematic map with expanded legend Graduated Symbol Thematic Maps Graduated symbol maps show data points with specific numerical values such that the size of the symbol for each record in your table is directly proportional to the data values It is useful for illustrating quantitative information such as high to low rankings The size of the symbols is proportional to the data values of the points Points that have larger data values appear larger and points that have smaller data values appear smaller Dot Density Thematic Maps Displays the data values as dots on your map where each dot is equal to a number and the total number of dots in a region is proportional to the data value for that region A dot density map allows you to examine raw counts of data e g gold assays or stream sediment samples Each dot represents a number of units That number multiplied by the total number of dots in the region equals the data value for that region 8 Working
86. using the Edit List menu in Discover Mobile If you set a pick list to be read only and you want to edit it in Discover Mobile you will have to directly open the pick list file using a text editor and remove the Read Only flag Structural Data Fields Discover Mobile has a structural data mapping utility which enables you to record structural measurements manually by tapping on the map in the appropriate location or by using your current GPS position When you capture a structure measurement Discover Mobile will automatically prompt you for the data type eg bedding cleavage etc and then allow you to enter in the appropriate orientation data and finally display the appropriate structure symbol for the measurement in the map window By using the structure mapping tool in Discover Mobile features such as fold axes bedding or cleavage orientations can all be displayed immediately on your map Capturing structural specific data using the GO gt GPS gt Capture Structure Symbol or GO gt Tools gt Add Structure Symbol tools requires the insertion table to have been created using the preset Structural fields as provided in the pull down list in the Setup Fields dialog of the GO gt File gt New Table option Struct_Strike or Struct_DipDir Struct_Dip amp Struct_Code See Creating a New Table with Discover Mobile for further information Before you can collect structure measurements in Discover Mobile you first need to create a structural data table t
87. vertex Data collected as points will preserve point elevation data and can be converted into polylines or polygons in Maplnfo Professional especially if a unique attribute has been specified for each group of points by using GO gt Edit gt Quick Pick Options and selecting Set Constant Value or Same As Previous If the ordering of the points is important to the object creation automatically increment a second attribute field in Discover Mobile with an integer Increment By For instance points representing two lines could be captured as Point ObjectID Order 345 TrackA 1 346 TrackA 2 347 TrackA 3 348 DrainH 1 349 DrainH 2 350 TrackA 4 351 DrainH 3 212 Discover Mobile User Guide Capturing Structure Objects 1 First ensure that you have created a table containing all the mandatory structure field columns to collect GPS and structural measurement attribute information Struct_Strike and or Struct_DipDir Struct_Dip and Struct_Code To add a structure measurement using coordinates from the GPS position either select the GO gt GPS gt Capture Structure Symbol menu option or tap the pop up menu arrow next to the GPS Point button on the GPS toolbar and select the Structure Symbol option When the Structure Symbol icon appears tap the button once to add the point to the table Select the appropriate Structure Type e g Bedding from the pull down list at the top of the dialog DiscoverMobile e7 4 2 59 lok
88. which is defined by GO gt Preferences gt Session x 134 336542 Y 23 431893 Select the Input Method for character and number entry The default method is a keyboard however additional options as described below are available Refer to the PPC user documentation for detailed descriptions of each of the data entry modes When installing Discover Mobile an additional input method will be added to the PPC device This input method is called Stop Map The Stop Map input method is used to terminate or stop a long screen redraw The Stop Map input method is a non standard input method and is not used by any other application Select View Toolbar ka a Rh O Ble ile x Use the Select View toolbar to Select item s in the map display area Zoom in and zoom out Restore a previous zoom level save or set a map scale Select pan or centre mode Obtain tabular information for a selected item 5 Mobile Interface 59 Py l Delete a selected item The Selection button has four modes for selecting object s in the display area To change mode select the arrow next to the currently selected mode button Point Select a single object or item This default mode is used for data entry object selection and editing Selection is done by positioning the stylus over the required object and tapping A selected object is highlighted Radius Selects objects within a circular area All selectable objects withi
89. with Maps 159 Individual Value Thematic Maps Individual value thematic maps allow you to shade records according to unique attribute values in the table Individual value templates can be multi variable Choose from shaded lines points or regions A thematic map that draws map objects according to individual values is useful when you want to emphasise categorical differences in the data rather than show quantitative information for example types of samples in a given area zoning classifications in a given area etc Thematic Legend The legend associated with thematic maps can be in either a compacted or normal presentation style which can be selected when either creating the theme or from the Themes dialog see GO gt Map gt Modify Themes Compacted Normal ty Unt Age 0 tA Oo zg P5 2 75 5 dd ii Tetay 1 Sampling Locations ty Cu 1390 ta 3 970 230 to 1390 an Sampling Locations 7m 6 5 Types of legends both Compacted and Normal The compact format shows only the minimal information of theme style and data range The normal sized legend shows the entire sampling and the various ranges used To reposition the legend Legends can be positioned on the screen by selecting and dragging the stylus to a new more convenient location Similarly by selecting a legend corner you can resize the area covered by the legend 160 Discover Mobile User Guide Note To edit the legend
90. would be created from the Lag_template and a Soil table form the Soil_template As illustrated previously the Named Styles library will have been configured to capture data into these standard names Lag and Soil If say date specific names were used then the Named Styles library would have to be reconfigured regularly to point to date specific table names which would be painful If multiple mobile devices are in use ensure that any quick pick options involving user name attributes has been edited to reflect the user s name For instance in the example dataset most of the tables have a Geologist field with a Set Constant Value of MJ This would need to be altered on Andrew Smith s device to AS Ensure the first sample number for each data type is set correctly on each device particularly when multiple field workers and therefore devices are involved For example sampler A may have an initial rock chip sample bag series starting at 38900 whilst sampler B may start their rock chip bag series at 39500 Capture field data using the relevant style types in the named style library At regular time periods e g daily or weekly make backups of the various field data files with date and user name suffixes into say a Backups folder on the storage card 238 Discover Mobile User Guide For example Mike Jones backs up his data files on 22 01 07 He uses the GO gt File gt Save Table Copy As option
91. 0 42 Exit About Licensing Preferences Tools Query Map GPS KRF Setup Connect Open XRF Table Coa RSE Bot he Setup Connect Open XRF Table Setup GO gt XRF gt Setup Setup a connection to either an Olympus Innov X or Niton portable XRF device For detailed instructions see Appendix C Configure the XRF Connection The Bluetooth COM port needs to be specified a higher number such as 7 8 or 9 is recommended This can also be setup via the Bluetooth Manager For detailed instructions see Appendix C Setting Up the Bluetooth Connection to an XRF Device A short list of summary elements can be selected these are the elements that will be listed on the second tab of the XRF output Summary tab All elements will still be listed in the following data tabs this Summary is an excellent way of quickly examining just the key indicator elements of interest as each sample is measured 6 Using the GO Menu 109 Connect GO gt XRF gt Connect After the Setup option has been configured use this option to connect to the portable XRF device For detailed instructions see Appendix C Connect to the XRF device Open XRF Table GO gt XRF gt Open XRF Table Open and view previously created XRF batch files Note that XRF batch files do not need to be open to be selectable in the XRF gt Connect dialog View Menu GO gt View The View menu provides controls to adjust the appearance displayed l
92. 228 Creating a Named Style Library cccceceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 229 Creating Named Styles on the DeSktop ccscscccssssseeessesneees 230 Sample Named Styles Dataset c cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeeees 230 File Management with Named Styles cccccccesceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 237 Setting up Named Styles for Multiple Users cccescsceeseeereees 238 Range Styl s rinore iini At ad bce ee ete 240 Creating a Range Style Library ccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 240 Editing a Range Style Library c cccsceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeenes 242 Creating a Range Style Library on the Desktop ccceeeseeeees 242 Labels and Annotation airesin a ia i aN 242 Table of Contents ix 11 Adding Labels and Annotation cccceceeeeeeneeeeeeeteieeeeeeenaeeeeneeea 242 Removing Labels and Annotations ccecceeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeneeeeeees 243 Hotlinking Files to Map Objects ccccececeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeneaes 243 Adding Hotlink Field to Table eeecceeeeeesseeeeeeeeenaeeeeseeenaeeeeeeeeaas 243 Creating amp Hotlink iiia a aie ai 244 Editing a Hotlink File sesse enee e a 246 Using the Hotlink Files in Maplnfo sseeeeseeseesserreserrrsssrennnns 246 Hotlink Images from the PPC Camera cccccccccceseeeeeereeestteeneeees 247 Working with the GPS sccsseeesseeseeeeeeeseneeenseeeeeseaeseseeee
93. 3 on the sync cable so that both devices can communicate again There is no easy way of telling if a PPC serial cable is a sync cable however in general if the PPC serial cable has a 9 pin DB9 female connector on one end it is probably a sync cable and will therefore require a null modem adapter to communicate with a GPS serial cable Null modem adapters can be purchased from most electronics stores Displaying the Current Position To display the current position on a map 1 Make sure the GPS receiver is turned on and that it has been configured to connect to Discover Mobile see the sections above for establishing a connection to either a NMEA or Trimble receiver 2 Activate the GPS toolbar by tapping the GPS icon on the main toolbar You should then see the GPS toolbar appear All buttons on the GPS toolbar should be inactive grey except for the Connect button the Rotate North and Setup buttons 3 Connect to the GPS by tapping the Connect button on the far left of the GPS tool bar Alternatively use the GO gt GPS gt Connect menu item E n Ae e ude at de Ble 4 Discover Mobile will attempt to open the appropriate COM port using the previously configured settings and establish a connection with the GPS If this step is successful all the buttons on the GPS toolbar will become active and you will see a red hollow circle appear in the centre of the map display 11 Working with the GPS 261 GPS Fix GPS
94. 49 50 51 ASCII Code 107 149 150 68 163 164 165 70 69 116 117 65 67 66 146 50 53 54 55 52 Australia b Canada v A NN USA gt wa N b Appendix B Structural Symbols 307 Name Lineation Vertical Mineral Alignment Mineral Alignment Horizontal Minor Anticline Minor Anticline And Plunge Minor Fold M Vergence Minor Fold S Vergence Minor Fold With Dip Minor Fold With Plunge Minor Fold Z Vergence Minor Syncline Minor Syncline And Plunge Monocline Mylonitic Foliation Mylonitic Foliation Vertical Normal Fault Normal Fault High Angle Normal Fault Low Angle Oriented Drill Collar 1 Oriented Drill Collar 2 Discover Code 8 14 14 59 60 74 72 63 64 73 61 62 58 77 77 28 30 29 39 40 ASCII Code 51 60 61 140 141 155 153 144 145 154 142 143 79 158 159 101 103 102 121 122 Australia gt N gt Canada gt N gt USA gt N gt 308 Discover Mobile User Guide Name Discover ASCII Australia Canada USA Code Code Oriented Drill Collar 3 41 123 Parallel Lines 36 109 Plunge Bedding Cleavage S2 Intersection 22 G cre eal S3 56 76 Plunge Bedding Vein Intersection 57 77 Recumbent Fold Verge Left 70 151 G A G Recumb
95. 8 Greate PICKlISts xctccccdcsccdaseerecagicevact whedon av sedaststnadivn eavaete daceavbohaccees 39 Picklist Formal asrni ie eatin einen ce i eee aia 41 Rename Picklist and Table eeeecceceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaaas 41 Saving Table and Picklists cccccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeeteeaees 42 Table Morgo anre arae Saad ees EA AARE PA EA hs AARET ALARA 42 Save Registered Raster cccccceeeeeececeeeeseneeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeene 44 Getting Started e ces eae a arerp ea aHa Kepa rA raapi aa aA eaS Sanr ariaa 47 Starting Discover MObil cc ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeneeess 47 The User Miena coneco ionar ee ia ela ie 49 Interacting with the Software cccccssceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeestaeetees 50 Data FOrmats ennen e n hl E A R EE 51 Map WNION eaa rr a I TEE NE TEO NTN 51 Map Window Projectors senro R eas E AE AR Na 51 Saving and Restoring Your WorkSpace sssesssseeeseeesieesrrnesrnsssrnrsne 52 Mobile Interiace ccna aA a 55 PEA ALE TE TEE EE O NE EATE E A E 56 Map WIndOW iinoa iai E NOA EA AE NEA ESE eee acess 56 TODISTE T O AO ETR 56 Main T OOID alive n ea a rana aaa EEANN Soe ah ORNINA 57 Table of Contents iii Select View Toolbar rnise i i dana 58 Draw Edit Toolbar cccccccccececessseeececeneeseceeeceeaseceseeaseaseeeeeseanaesees 62 GPS Toolbar fna aa a aa RA 64 COM SU a A E aa iey 66 Customizing the Hardware ButtOns
96. ASTA ATE TA TEETE 92 E A E E ATE EA EA A ANA A E T A E EA E 92 WO E A A A E AE tens 93 Cursor POSON asine a e TO A ted 93 AC oT p i ERA TEPEE EE E T TEET O 93 Add Structure Symbolin aA 93 Add NOG anria enetan anadir ae raaa e i a aa aeaea Aa eee oat 94 Add Lingao n aai ee eile 94 Add Polyline Freehand aasssssesssiessesrrressrrnssssirnnesrnnnnnnsrnnnnnennnnnennnna 94 Add Polygon Freehand sederii ii ai 94 AOC Polygoon a a a a e 95 Add Polylin noinein E 95 Add A notatiom eee arara aanere ardat eoa arata adeudeandats etteset dAn iai 95 Add Cabelas a i ee ee 95 Query Men ereta ir a nanieens e a a a 96 Sele hn a a a nein tit ane eae 97 Select A deretan ratarea RE cece thoes cceabteats A TA 98 Clear Selecto sa te ce citar cit neva nee i a N Ea R aA 98 UNG sei AE EAE EE TEE E A A A E T 98 Fiha Seleci neiaa er a N danatintinies 99 Browse SelettiOm ieren iara aeae NAARAAN eA ARAPA A EAA EREA SARAR E KAA 99 Map Menu aaia ata Atira eE A EEA VOEE TEE EOS 100 Save Window AS iceri kia aaaea AE EAE Erana Eei 101 Add Cosmetic Layer c cccccccccesesceceeeeeesesaeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeseeeeesnaeesneneees 101 Set Insertion Layer cceecceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeteeeeeseaaeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeee 101 Create Thente iatha te NL AO eed aaa Miandad 102 Modify THEMES ccceceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseneeenees 103 Map Projectioniic d nccaisieuntanienehit eai A E leds 104 GPS MSI artes aa daaties rE E AAA AAEE A ARRS
97. C start Discover Mobile by tapping Start and then Discover Mobile or select Start gt Programs and tap the Discover Mobile icon The Discover Mobile licence screen is displayed File Zoom Tools Help sE DiscoverMobile er 10 30 lok Licence Details Name User Company PBS Licence The system date must be set correctly for the licence to validate Licence Information Version 3 7 0 UnitID 00700CB420132 Current Licence Number Licence screen showing user and licence information Discover Mobile User Guide 3 Complete the Name and Company fields and then tap the Save button The user information is saved to Di scMobil eLiclnfo txt filein the My Documents folder on the PPC File Zoom Tools Help DiscoverMobile en 10 32 Save As Name DiscMobileLicInfo File Zoom Tools Help w e 95 Decree at 4c 30 37 Licence Details Te ee ee De ok Location Main memory DiscoverMobile Licence infomation has been saved to My Documents DiscMobileLicInf o TXT Please email this file to Encom Technology to receive your licence file Save the DiscMobileLicInfo TXT file 4 From Windows Explorer on your PC navigate to the My Documents folder on the PPC and copy the Di scMobileLicilnfo txt file from the PPC to the PC 5 Attach the Disc Mobil eLiclnfo txt file to an e mail and send to natural resources pb com 6 By return email you will receive a
98. C 044912 280 A 3753 0880 S 14500 0965 E 0 19 210503 05 The information reported from the RMC sentence includes Lat Latitude position in decimal degrees referenced to the WGS84 ellipsoid Long Longitude position in decimal degrees referenced to the WGS84 ellipsoid Date Date taken from the GPS and converted into the current date format on the PPC Time Time taken from the GPS and converted into the current time zone format on the PPC Full Time Date and Time taken from the GPS and converted into the current data and time format on the PPC Speed Speed over the ground and reported in kilometres per hour Course Course over the ground measured in degrees clockwise from north 6 Using the GO Menu 117 Warning Current status of RMC data from the GPS Possible values include True No RMC data available False Valid RMC data available Mag Variation magnetic variation between true north and magnetic north reported from the GPS GPS Fix Information GGA Contains GPS information received from the GGA sentence of the NMEA data stream The GGA sentence provides 3D position location data and accuracy information An example of this data sentence in provided below GPGGA 044913 280 3753 0882 S 14500 0964 E 1 04 7 8 19 5 M M 0000 63 The information reported from the GGA sentence includes Lat Latitude position in decimal degrees referenced to the WGS84 ellipsoid
99. Dip Deformed Bedding Dip Foliation D1 Foliation D2 Foliation D3 Bedding Cleavage S1 Parallel Bedding Cleavage S2 Parallel Bedding Cleavage S3 Parallel Plunge Bedding Cleavage S2 Intersection Discover Code 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 ASCII Code 113 121 122 123 115 99 100 71 130 131 133 134 163 164 165 72 73 74 75 Australia Canada USA 302 Discover Mobile User Guide Name Discover ASCII Australia Canada USA Code Code ta aa S3 56 76 Plunge Bedding Vein Intersection 57 77 Monocline 58 79 ai T All Minor Anticline 59 140 Minor Anticline And Plunge 60 141 Minor Syncline 61 142 Minor Syncline And Plunge 62 143 Minor Fold With Dip 63 144 Minor Fold With Plunge 64 145 Kink Fold With Plunge 65 146 A Asymmetric Fold Verge Left 66 147 th th ih Asymmetric Fold Verge Right 67 148 Ay Ay Fold Verge Left 68 149 6 G A Fold Verge Right 69 150 X X N Recumbent Fold Verge Left 70 151 A A G Recumbent Fold Verge Right 71 152 X N N Minor Fold S Vergence 72 153 t i Minor Fold Z Vergence 73 154 Minor Fold M Vergence 74 155 f i f B gt B gt B gt Boudin Plunge 75 156 Appendix B Structural Symbols 303 Name Chert Contortion Plunge Mylonitic Foliation Mylonitic Foliation Vertical Eutaxitic Foliation Eutax
100. Discover Mobile are set to the My Documents directory in the Main Memory of the Pocket PC device not the storage card These paths should be altered before going out to the field To modify a directory path 1 Select GO gt Preferences menu and scroll to Directories 2 Enter the appropriate root project directory location on the storage card for saving each of the project s tables GPS track log files pick list files named styles files hotlink files new tables and image files See Directories for further information Backup Your Installation of Discover Mobile It is also recommended to keep a copy of the Discover Mobile installation file on the storage card 14 Discover Mobile User Guide e Copy the Discover Mobile Setup CAB file from the PC Discover Mobile installation directory onto the storage card Use this file to re install the software see Reinstalling Discover Mobile on the PPC Additionally keeping the Discover Mobile licence file on the storage card will ensure that the application can be activated if re installation is required 3 Data Preparation 15 Note Note Data Preparation When preparing your data for field use with Discover Mobile it is important that you give careful consideration to optimising the structure and size and coverage of the data tables so that you obtain maximum performance on the PPC device Although PPCs are extremely well featured and perform exceptionally well on
101. GPS toolbar or choose GO gt GPS gt Capture Polygon Discover Mobile will then commence capturing the polygon node by node using the current GPS interval and minimum maximum tolerance values An audible beep from the PPC will be heard each time a new node is captured The beep sound cannot be disabled however the sound on the PPC can be turned down To control the node separation review the Tolerance Min and Tolerance Max values under the GO gt Preferences gt Point Capture option The minimum tolerance value should be set to a value that matches the mapping requirements and the accuracy of the GPS receiver If you are walking out a boundary with a conventional GPS receiver then a minimum tolerance of 10m should be adequate If you using DGPS you can reduce the minimum tolerance to 1 m If mapping in a vehicle then setting a minimum tolerance of 20 m to 100 m would be more appropriate When capturing a polyline be careful not to set the maximum tolerance to a small value Ideal values are 500 m to 1000 m If the Maximum Tolerance value is set too small say 100 m the polyline may terminate between points If this occurs tap the GPS Polygon button once to turn it off and then tap it again to commence a new polygon The GPS settings and the quality of the satellite signal will influence the time taken to capture a point For accurate point capture wait until the Please wait message disappears before moving to the next point
102. II text files with each attribute on a separate line The pick list file name must also conform to one of the following formats TableName_FieldName txt this naming convention means that the pick list file will only be available for the field name in the specified table name For example if your table is called Geology and the field you want to use the pick list with is called Lithology then you would give the pick list the name Geology_Lithology txt This is the default convention for pick list files which are automatically created in Discover Mobile FieldName txt this naming convention means that the pick list file will be available for ALL tables which contain the specified field name For example if you call your pick list Comments txt then that pick list will be available for all tables which contain a field called Comments Picklists are stored in the Picklist Directory specified under the GO gt Preferences menu option default My Documents It is recommended to set this location to a location such as a storage card Use To use a Picklist to add attribute data to an object open the object browser window accessed for a new object via the Edit Attributes option or via the Info tool or View Browser options for existing objects Select the pull down arrow adjacent to the relevant field the contents of the appropriate pick list will be displayed Selecting an entry will auto populate the field 174 Discover Mob
103. In theory Discover Mobile can display as much data as there is available memory on the PPC However this is not realistic in practice For the best map redraw performance you are encouraged to keep your datasets as small as practical for your intended Discover Mobile session It is recommended to use subsets of data for each project area There are three main methods that may be used to subset data Use the Discover Clip to Polygon Tool tool to subset selected vector data layers to a defined region Use the Discover Mobile Save to Registered Raster Tool tool to capture a map window view including gridded surfaces to display as a backdrop Use the Discover Clip Image tool to crop an image registered in Maplnfo Professional to a defined region Clip to Polygon Tool The Clip to Polygon tool enables any number of vector points lines or region layers to be clipped to a defined region The data layers may be clipped to a tenement boundary a map sheet boundary or simply a freehand region created over a project area or area of interest Clip to Polygon does not clip objects contained in the Cosmetic layer You cannot undo a Clip to Polygon operation and for this reason we recommend that you operate on a copy of the original data The Clip to Polygon tool does not work with raster images or thematic map layers 1 Open data tables to clip into map window in Maplnfo Professional 2 Select a map object polygon region to use as
104. Insertion Layer Save window Add Modify Theme Map Projection GPS Menu connect to a GPS monitor check a GPS connection capture data and define preferred styles XRF Menu connect to the Olympus Innov X and Niton portable XRF devices View Menu Layer control Map zoom level Map Rotation Table structure Edit Menu accesses layer editing labelling annotation and styles File Menu New Table Open Table Save Geoset Save Table Copy As Recent files Edit Table Structure and Pack Tables 68 Discover Mobile User Guide Note Exit Menu GO gt Exit Use the Exit command to terminate the Discover Mobile application and remove it from the PPC memory If you intend to restore your data and map display to the same state as when you closed the application you must save the state toa Geoset file before you exit Discover Mobile see Saving and Restoring Your Workspace The GO gt Exit command is not the same as the X button on the Title bar of Discover Mobile Tapping the X button on the Title bar will only minimise Discover Mobile to the system tray of the device It does not exit from the application or remove it from main memory This means that the application is still operational even though it may not be visible on the screen If you power off the PPC by pressing the power button Discover Mobile will remain in main memory and be ready for use when you next turn the device on However the running applicati
105. M 4 however if this should be unsuccessful you may need to try different COM ports Generally CF Compact Flash type receivers will connect on COM 4 or COM 6 and Bluetooth GPS receivers on COM 5 or COM 8 To determine which COM port your GPS is connected to start the GPS and make sure it is set to output NMEA data Connect the GPS and use the Scan function in the Discover Mobile GO gt GPS gt Setup Connection dialog to scan the available COM ports for valid GPS data 6 Using the GO Menu 73 Speed The speed setting allows you to adjust the communication speed for the serial COM port to match the communication speed of the GPS receiver It is important that you set the appropriate communication speed so Discover Mobile can communicate properly with your GPS receiver Most GPS units which output NMEA data will communicate between 4800 9600 baud rate The default setting is 4800 baud Consult your GPS user guide to determine the correct communication speed for your GPS device Some example speeds are listed below Garmin 12XL 4800 baud Socket Bluetooth GPS 38600 baud Navman GPS Sleeve 57500 baud Parity Parity is a form of error checking used in serial communication Most modern devices use more advanced forms of software error checking and no longer use hardware parity Set this value to match your GPS receiver Consult your GPS user guide to determine the appropriate parity setting for your GPS receiver Most modern GPS de
106. Mobile User Guide Note e 45 3 33 ok DiscoverMobile Only highlighted options will be checked during auto detection scan for a valid GPS connection Port Speed TA os a Een e 5 gt o liar daa Enable RTS L Use XOn XOFF Example of the Scan configuration dialog showing a subset of the available options selected for scanning by Discover Mobile The Scan function in Discover Mobile should be capable of detecting which COM port the GPS receiver is attached to However if the correct settings are already known for the GPS unit e g from GPS user manual it is recommended that the Speed Parity Data and Stop Bits parameters are manually set If raw GPS information is displayed in the output screen some extra status information will also appear along the bottom of the screen between the output display window and the buttons This information describes the status of the GPS connection The DATA indicator on the right indicates the quality of the data stream The quality is measured as the number of GPS sentences Discover Mobile can process without error Possible values are Data no valid data Data many errors very poor data Data some errors data connection OK Data occasional error data good Data No errors data excellent 11 Working with the GPS 257 Note Most GPS units will output valid NMEA data regardless of w
107. PDOP 11 720 HDOP 8 347 VDOP 8 347 Fix DGPS Speed 0 2 km h Alt 26 28 m Course 259 4 Ej Monitor Satellite Status screen Once a position fix is calculated the Waiting for GPS Time message will disappear and the GPS Overlay will be positioned accordingly 276 Discover Mobile User Guide Carrier Phase Logging Once a position fix is calculated the position quality status indicator bottom left of the map screen will be followed by a Disabled message if Carrier phase data logging is enabled see the GPS gt Connection gt Log Carrier option under Trimble DGPS Configuration This indicates that Carrier phase logging is yet to be initialized Capturing a point see below Point Capture will initialize Carrier phase logging changing this status message to Locked followed by the time in seconds bracketed since this locked status was acquired a ate a eae aa ra a Ql i x co e Slots el Status message at the bottom left of screen indicates Carrier Lock is Disabled awaiting initialization by point capture 11 Working with the GPS 277 a lt lt 5805200 a ae a i Please Wait i bint aes e aE _ prema a tis Se EEE Leet DE s op TTT TTTT TTT TTo ee a Mei ht amp re KAA ALON i co w amp a L Alc h j Carrier Lock Initialization by point capture the status message now displays Locked followed by the time in secon
108. Removes all custom labels or annotations from the Annotation Layer Individual labels and annotations cannot be removed Delete GO gt Edit gt Delete Removes all selected objects from editable layers Raster Transparency GO gt Edit gt Raster Transparency Controls the level of transparency of a selected layer Use the slider bar or type a percentage value into the box between 0 opaque and 100 transparent DiscoverMobile e 4c 2 05 ok 100 invisible 6 Using the GO Menu 123 Note Selected Point Location GO gt Edit gt Selected Point Location Edit the coordinates of a selected object Selected Object Style GO gt Edit gt Selected Object Style Modify the appearance of a symbol line or polygon object The dialog displayed depends on the type of object selected For more information about using the style dialogs see Formatting Drawing Objects Symbol Style Modify symbol style size and colour and symbol rotation Line Style Modify line style line thickness in either pixels or points 32 points equals 2 54 cm or 1 inch and colour A preview sample of the line style is displayed Fill Style Modify fill patterns colour and outline style of polygon objects Quick Pick Options GO gt Edit gt Quick Pick Options The Quick Pick menu option allows users to set actions for data entry fields prior to capturing or creating map objects These actions may include incrementing or decrementing values from a
109. See Opening Tables containing fields for recording the GPS point data and custom fields see Assigning GPS Capture Layers If a GPS capture table has not been assigned when data is captured a dialog will appear allowing selection of the capture layer To capture a point at the current GPS position tap the GPS Point Capture button on the GPS toolbar or choose GO gt GPS gt Capture Point Depending on the options selected under GO gt Preferences gt Object Creation a number of dialogs may appear which will allow you to select and enter symbol style field values and coordinates For more information about object creation options see Setting Object Creation Preferences and Field Data Entry and Editing The GPS settings and the quality of the satellite signal will influence the time taken to capture a point For accurate point capture wait until the Please wait message disappears before moving to the next point 10 Working with Objects 209 a Capturing Lines Open the line capture table see Opening Tables containing fields for recording the GPS line data and custom fields see Assigning GPS Capture Layers If a GPS capture table has not been assigned when data is captured a dialog will appear allowing selection of the capture layer To capture points along a path tap the GPS Polyline Capture button on the GPS toolbar or choose GO gt GPS gt Capture Polyline Discover Mobile will then commence capturing the polyli
110. Serial Port option is not displayed in the Services list press Refresh FS Settings a Yy d 1 16 Partnership Settings 8 Display Name XL3t 34008 Select services to use from this device Cancel a Save Enabling the Serial Port service In the COM Ports tab select New Outgoing Port then select the Niton Device and press Next Set the Port to COM8 and press Finish Settings Q E Yu d 1 17 Bluetooth 1 Port coms iy Secure Connection Finish Configuring the Outgoing Port Gently select the Niton entry but don t proceed to the next dialog Then select and hold down on the New Outgoing Port option and choose Edit Set Port 7 and press Finish A new Incoming Port COM 7 will be created Press OK 314 Discover Mobile User Guide Settings x 4 1 17 ok Bluetooth After pairing with a device to set up a COM port tap New Outgoing Port For other options tap and hold an existing port XL3t 34008 COM8 Nae Qutanine Dort Edit Creating and configuring a New Incoming Port 1 Hold down and press on the New Outgoing Port option and select the Edit option from the pop up menu Settings Q E d 1 18 Bluetooth Port OM7 Secure Connection Back e Finish Creating and configuring a New Incoming Port 2 Set COM port 7 Appendix C Working with Portable XRF Devices 315 7 Settings a Yy d 1 18 ok Bluetooth After pairin
111. Status The Monitor Satellite Status dialog shows the number and position of satellites currently in view If a satellite is red it is not used in the GPS fix Each available satellite is numbered and the corresponding signal strength is displayed as a bar in the Satellite Strength Plot Setup Connection GO gt GPS gt Setup Connection Configure the GPS connection For instructions on setting up and connecting the GPS see Connecting to the GPS 106 Discover Mobile User Guide Setup Data Capture Tables GO gt GPS gt Setup Data Capture Tables This option is similar to the Map gt Set Insertion Layer function but is specific to GPS data capture It allows a default capture table to be specified for each GPS object type point polyline and polygon See Assigning GPS Capture Layers Default Styles GO gt GPS gt Default Styles Define default styles for different types of GPS located objects For more information see Setting Default Styles for GPS Located Objects Center Map on GPS GO gt GPS gt Center Map on GPS lf GO gt Preferences gt Re Center GPS is set to Never this command will redraw the view with the current GPS location at the center Orient Map Ahead GO gt GPS gt Orient Map Ahead The Orient Map Ahead menu option or GPS toolbar button will turn On Off the Auto Map Rotate function The Auto Map Rotate function will automatically rotate the map view so that the top of the map is oriented towards the direction of tr
112. USA ASCII The ASCII character code Discover Code Used when entering data into a spreadsheet for display with the Discover Structural Data Map Window Structural Symbols Ordered by Discover Code Name Discover ASCII Australia Canada USA Code Code Bedding 1 33 a o Ais Bedding Horizontal 1 34 EB a Bedding Vertical 1 35 Bedding Overturned 2 36 e Bedding Overturned Horizontal 2 37 amp p p Bedding Facing 3 38 a s a 298 Discover Mobile User Guide Name Bedding Facing Vertical Cleavage S1 Cleavage S1 Vertical Cleavage S1 Horizontal Cleavage S2 Cleavage S2 Vertical Cleavage S2 Horizontal Cleavage S3 Cleavage S3 Vertical Cleavage S3 Horizontal Younging Lineation Lineation Vertical Lineation Horizontal Lineation L1 Lineation L2 Lineation L3 Bedding Cleavage Bedding Cleavage Horizontal Crenulation Discover Code 3 4 ASCII Code 39 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 132 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 Australia I E E I Canada USA I E E I Appendix B Structural Symbols 299 Name Crenulation Horizontal Mineral Alignment Mineral Alignment Horizontal Banding Platy Alignment Banding Platy Alignment Vertical Banding Platy Alignment Horizontal Joint Joint Vertical Joint Horizontal Foliation Foliation Vertical Foliation Horizontal
113. Using the GO Menu 93 Info GOsTools gt Info The Information tool operates similarly to the Arrow tool but instead of selecting an item this tool displays any available attribute information about the object An item must have associated attribute information for it to be displayed in a browser view Cursor Position GOsTools gt Cursor Position The Cursor Position tool displays the easting X and northing Y location of the stylus when it is placed within the map display area The location is shown in a moveable text display dialog The coordinate display units are shown in the Session Coordinate Projection which can be defined from GO gt Preferences gt Session X 134 336542 Y 23 431893 Add Point GO gt Tools gt Add Point Add a located symbol to the current Insertion Layer To add symbols tap the stylus at the required location on the screen Add Structure Symbol GO gt Tools gt Add Structure Symbol The Add Structure Symbol tool will activate the Structure symbol dialog and place the appropriate symbol in the current Insertion Layer Tap the stylus at the required location on the screen the structure symbol dialog will then appear allowing the user to select the appropriate symbol and enter in the structure measurements See Creating Structure Objects 94 Discover Mobile User Guide Add Node GOs gt Tools gt Add Node The Add Insert Node tool allows extra nodes to be added to completed editable polyline
114. View information about the open table such as Name Path and Projection gt gt View all tables loaded or display hidden tables in Data Entry 5 Make the table you want to enter in to editable 6 Digitize an object using the tools on the MapInfo Drawing toolbar You cannot enter a new browser record using the Data Entry tool for a mappable table To create a new record you must digitize a new map object in the map window 7 Use the navigation bar or keyboard arrow keys to move up and down the table records and left and right between columns You can then Edit value Clear value Copy value Paste value OS Delete Record S7 Filter Validate A Editable Use the TAB key and right left arrow keys to move between cells Use the navigation bar and up down arrow keys to move between records Click a cell to edit If a picklist is defined in the validation settings select from the valid picklist values Values are validated on entry Right click in the cell and select Clear Value or click in the cell and press DEL Click in the cell and press CTRL C Copies a single value to the clipboard Click in the cell and press CTRL V Pastes a single value from the clipboard Delete selected records In the left most column click CTRL click or SHIFT Cclick to select the required records Click once to display only records that fail the validation rules Click again to display all records Revalidate all record
115. You can use any combination of letters numbers or an underscore Any spaces in a field name will be automatically replaced with underscore character _ Field names cannot start with a number and cannot contain any reserved characters eg amp lt gt etc You can use upper and lowercase for legibility but Discover Mobile ignores case when referring to column names Type The field type is displayed The following types are available from the drop down list Character Stores up to 254 alphanumeric characters You cannot perform arithmetic operations on character fields Decimal Stores numbers in decimal form Do not use commas when entering numeric values Date These fields can contain a calendar date in the format MM DD YYYY The year can be specified by two or four digits and is optional Use slashes or hyphens to separate components of a date The following are valid dates 01 23 91 5 6 1989 10 07 Integer Stores integers or whole numbers numbers without a decimal The range is from approximately 2 billion to 2 billion Small Integer Integers between 32 767 and 32 767 Float Stores numbers in floating point decimal form Logical These fields contain only True False or yes no information A True Yes value is stored as T and a False No value as F 130 Discover Mobile User Guide Size Type the number of characters in the field string and decima
116. a A AEA 82 EATA DU E e aa a ied a a a A E AEEA D 82 Named Styles aaien aaae eaaa eaa aaa aaa raae iat 82 Pont AY Edig aa A A AAA 82 S SSIOM MANE S AEE E E EAA A EE A AEE E EA EE 83 AUTOIOAGHAST REEE E TEE ETEA ET 83 MapiProjections asasi r a e nl lane a aa E NTS 83 Usor Projection e reari ne eE ET EEE EAT 84 DISTANCE a a a r a a E RAS 84 TARET O E E AE A E E E ene 84 Grid Overlay yria matone ial E eaten ae 84 Discover Mobile User Guide Waypoint Tolerance ccececccceeeseccceeeeeeeeceeeeseseeceeeesseeeeeeeeneneaees 85 System Settings ccecccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeseseneeeeeaeeeseaaeeseeeeeeeaeeene 85 Busy CUFSOR niigi na ea epics ee eee et ds eee eels 86 FONE SIZE oaa gareck categahiide cd A A AA R RARS 86 Goni Deltom oaan a A N AER 86 Hardware Buttons cccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseenieeeeees 87 Alert Configurations ccccceccceseeceeeeeeeeeeneeeceeeeeesaeeseeneeesaaeeeeaees 88 DIFE CLONES 220 cde cccvivecacaucesesace daupascbdiadoaheded cbecysanadesnes atid caciseadepesdvussdaaat 88 Project ROOt c sic wii gain Qe oad on Mee 88 Current Project 0 ccceeceeceeeneceeeeeeeceaaeeeeeneeceaeeseaaeeeseeeeteaeessenes 88 Set Individually advanced users only cccceeeeeeeseeetetteeeeeeeees 88 TOONS Men e ida e eaaa ei adt or atana reidai 90 E e AA E O S ad O EEN AEA E A EE EEA 91 ZOOM AM EE A E E EAE A 92 ZOOM OU ie cl aie AR N nth a eee 92 PAM EETL TEE
117. a Picklist cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 364 Configure Table for Data Entry cc ccccseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 366 Table Validation Options 0 ccececeecececeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeaes 368 Enter or Digitize Table Data and Map Objects ccceeseeee 370 1 Introduction 1 Note Introduction Discover Mobile is a portable companion to Discover for Maplnfo Professional It is a powerful Geographic Information System GIS and mapping application designed specifically to run on mobile Pocket PC Pocket Personal Computer or PPC devices and is compatible with selected Microsoft Windows Mobile operating systems Discover Mobile is built on Pitney Bowes Software s MapX Mobile platform and provides support for native Maplnfo Professional data Such data can be transferred to and from the mobile device when linked to an external PC through the use of the Microsoft ActiveSync data exchange system or through Windows Mobile Device Center Discover Mobile provides inbuilt support for GPS devices capable of supporting NMEA 0183 National Marine Electronics Association standard data transfer protocol This enables you to perform data capture operations sample logging mapping and in field navigation with real time GPS information using virtually any connected GPS device With Discover Mobile your data goes wherever you do Discover Mobile also supports Trimble TSIP Trimble Standard Interface Protocol
118. a is available on the specified communication port and settings If the communication parameters are unknown or no NMEA data is found with the specified setting use the Scan button Scan can be used when first attempting to connect a GPS receiver to Discover Mobile Discover Mobile will scan all selected COM ports and communication settings on the PPC looking for a valid NMEA GPS signal If a valid connection port and signal is found the scan will stop and the raw GPS data will be output to the display window The communication settings will then be saved to the Connection preferences when the dialog is exited e Before commencing a scan the list of COM ports Speed Data Parity and Stop bit combinations checked by Discover Mobile may need to be modified This can be done by tapping on the Browse button in the top right of the Setup Connection dialog All settings that are highlighted in the configuration dialog will be scanned by Discover Mobile If it is known that the particular GPS does not communicate at speeds less than 4800 baud or greater than 19200 baud then remove deselect those speed settings from the list Discover Mobile will skip those options during the scan Certain COM ports can also be deselected to prevent Discover Mobile from scanning these This can be particularly useful if the GPS is connected via a Serial Cable and the Bluetooth Port generally COM port 8 is to be bypassed during the scan 256 Discover
119. ad only files such as Excel spreadsheets cannot be used with this tool To change the table structure use the MapInfo Professional Table gt Maintenance gt Table Structure tool To configure rules for validating table data 1 On the Discover menu point to Data Entry and select Setup Table The Select Tables dialog is displayed a Select daia entry tables Not Mappable Collars_NT AMG Zone 52 AGD 84 lsa_Structure_Data AMG Zone 54 AGD 66 Surface_Geology AMG Zone 52 AGD 84 2 All open vector and non mappable tables are listed in the Select Tables dialog box Select a table Only one table can be configured at a time To open a different table Click the Open button and select the TAB file you want to open in MapInfo Professional The table type and validation status is indicated by the following icons Mappable vector table with validation os vap Appendix D Digitizing and Data Entry in Discover 367 ven Mappable vector table without validation A Mappable vector read only table Non mappable table with validation Non mappable table without validation ji tit til i Non mappable read only table 3 Click OK to load the selected table in the Setup Digitizing Table dialog box The table name projection and location are displayed under Table Options The Table Fields box is populated with the table fields as rows and field properties as columns in a spreadsheet like
120. aeeeeeeeeaceeeneneeeaeeeeeeeees 12 Data Stora gesiess e hea niet Ale leaned 12 Keep Data on External Storage Card cc ccceccccseeeeeeeeeeseteeeeneeeee 12 Set Storage Card Directory Paths ccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseteeeeeeeees 13 Backup Your Installation of Discover Mobile ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 3 Data Prepatatlonis i 2cccciscc icc sect eed sctds tees cecet edeedecte teed anaa anana 15 Supported File Types and Table Size Limits ccccscccecesesseeeeeeeees 15 Raster IMages n i ai EELT aides a AE aa AEA 15 BOA ETTE E S AT 16 Things You Can Do to Improve Performance cc ceeceeeeseeeeeteeeees 16 Subsetting Datasets to the Project Area ccccceeeeeeeeeetteeeeneeees 17 Clip to Polygon TOO cccceeececeeseeeeeeneeeseeeeeceeeeeesaaeeseeeeesiaaeeesaees 17 Save to Registered Raster TOO cceccseseceesseeeeseeeeeseteeteeeees 19 Glip IMAGE eni Pe een ee eee 20 Convert Tables to Same Projection cccceeeceeeseeeeeseeeeeteeeeeneeeees 21 Set Table Default View 0 ccccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeseeeeeeeaeeee 22 Save Data as Geoset File o oo cece ccc ceeeeceeeseeseeeeceseeseaeeeeeeeeeaees 23 Discover Mobile User Guide Set Zoom Layering for Large Raster ImMages cccceseeeseeeees 23 PACK TADES meiro aa aaa pak Siesta Whe a Ta Aa deers 24 Create Data Entry Pick Lists 0 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeeaeeneaes 24 C
121. age shows a Line Track Log black line of path the travelled with Current position Red circle and a line segment selected point Right image shows the GPS attributes associated with the selected line segment Working with Differential GPS DGPS Differential GPS allows very accurate sub meter positioning by calculating the current GPS error at a base station and then applying this as a correction to the field data Differential GPS therefore requires two receivers to operate simultaneously field data is collected with a rover unit whilst the other receiver is placed at a base station for which the position is accurately known The base station GPS position data is compared to it s known surveyed position and a position error is calculated Using this known error a correction can then be applied to the field unit data to provide a more accurate field position This correction can be applied either in real time Real time DGPS RTK via radio signal or after field work data collection has been completed Post processed DGPS Post processed DPGS only requires the user to have direct access to one receiver the field rover unit eg a Trimble Pro XRS or XT The base station data is generally provided via a continuously operating commercial reference station This data is normally accessed via the internet based on the timeframe and location of the field data collection Discover Mobile supports Postprocess DGPS work using the Trimble Pr
122. alled programs check to make sure the software is properly installed See nsia ing Discover Mobile for further information To ensure that Discover Mobile always appears on the Start Menu browse to Start gt Settings gt Menus and in the following list tick enable Discover Mobile Tap OK Note that any applications visible under the Start Menu will not be listed in the Programs display When Discover Mobile starts the main screen and main toolbar are displayed 4 Getting Started 49 rE DiscoverMobile er 10 49 X HS 8 a OF a iF x we BRIE Bot Discover Mobile main screen and main toolbar The User Interface The Discover Mobile user interface provides a simple and intuitive method for interacting and working with your mapping data Most commonly used tasks can be directly accessed via the shortcut button toolbars located along the bottom of the screen There is a complete menu system accessible via the GO menu in the lower left corner of the screen This menu provides access to all shortcut button functions as well as a number of additional functions The Discover Mobile interface includes three user controllable toolbars plus the Main Toolbar The three controllable toolbars are accessed via the main toolbar and can be turned on or off by tapping the toggle buttons The main toolbar is located at the bottom of the Discover Mobile display and is always visible The user controllable toolbars include Select
123. alog from where you can control the display properties of selected tables 7 Controlling Layers and the View 137 DiscoverMobile er 10 53 ok Isa Geoloay ia Visible O Automatic labels Selectable _ Editable cor 2 SA ee Layer Control dialog The display list shows the drawing order of the current layers Layers are drawn from bottom to top Image layers should be placed at the bottom of the list to prevent them from obscuring vectors drawing objects and text To change the display order In the display list select a layer and then tap the Up and Down buttons To add new layers Tap the Add button Adding a layer from the Layer Control dialog is the same as opening a table with the GO gt File gt Open command see Opening Tables To remove a layer from the display In the display list select a layer and then tap the Remove button Removing a layer from the Layer Control dialog is the same as closing a table with the GO gt File gt Close Table command see Closing Tables To make a layer editable 1 Tap the Layer Control tool or choose GO gt View gt Layer Control to display the Layer Control dialog 138 Discover Mobile User Guide 2 In the display list select a layer and then tap the Editable check box When you close the Layer Control dialog the layer will be editable and the appropriate tools on the Draw Edit toolbar are available To make a layer selectable 1 Tap t
124. alues of an object in the table browser 1 Tap the Information tool 2 Tap the object you want to edit The table browser is displayed If the object does not have any associated attribute information blank data fields will be displayed If more than one table has an object at the selected point use the drop down list to select the table of interest 3 Edit the field values as required 4 Close the browser dialog when you have finished You can also choose Go gt View gt Table Browser to browse a selected table row by row i e object by object 220 Discover Mobile User Guide Warning Edit Coordinates Select the object and then choose GO gt Edit gt Selected Point Location to display the Point XY dialog where you can edit the coordinates of a selected object Edit Object Style To change the appearance of an object first select it using one of the select tools and then tap the Object Style button or choose GO gt Edit gt Selected Object Style The style properties dialog will change depending on the type of object selected For more information see Formatting Objects Delete Objects To delete an object select the object or objects and tap the Delete button on the Select View toolbar You can also delete selected objects by choosing GO gt Edit gt Delete Deleted objects cannot be restored Formatting Objects Setting Default Styles for New Drawing Objects Formatting Drawing Objects
125. and colour of the grid lines on the Grid Overlay properties dialog The actual number of grid lines which are displayed on the map may vary at different zoom levels from the preferred number entered on the setup dialog to maintain an even grid spacing interval for the current zoom level and map window extents To change the display properties of the grid 1 Choose GO gt Preferences 2 Under Session select Grid Overlay and open the setup dialog 3 Set the number of lines label size label colour and line style width and colour For more information see Grid Overlay 148 Discover Mobile User Guide Important Grid Projection You can override the default grid projection so that it is displayed in a different coordinate system to the map window The user projection will override the native map window projection so that the map grid will always be displayed in the user coordinate system rather than the native map projection To change the map grid projection 1 Choose GO gt Preferences 2 Under Session select User Projection and open the setup dialog Take care when overriding the Default Map Projection with a User Projection This may reduce map redraw performance and it will also override the default map projection when creating or capturing new objects to a table For more information see User Projection Rotated Grids The dynamic map grid can be used when the Map Rotation function is active see Rota
126. and right left arrow keys to move between cells Use the navigation bar and up down arrow keys to move between records Click a cell to edit If a picklist is defined in the validation settings select from the valid picklist values Values are validated on entry Right click in the cell and select Clear Value or click in the cell and press DEL Click in the cell and press CTRL C Copies a single value to the clipboard Click in the cell and press CTRL V Pastes a single value from the clipboard Add a new record to the end of the table If validation settings have been set up for this table some columns will be populated by the increments or defaults defined for that field Use the TAB and arrow keys to move between cells Type values in fields as required If a picklist is defined in the validation settings click the cell and select from the valid picklist values New and edited values are validated on entry Delete selected records Click CTRL click or SHIFT Click to select the required records Click once to display only records that fail the validation rules Click again to display all records Revalidate all records in an existing table Click the Save button to save your changes to the current table Appendix D Digitizing and Data Entry in Discover 373 Note All validation errors must be resolved before the table can be saved or the Data Entry tool can be closed
127. area network connection When a mobile device is connected to your desktop computer it will be automatically listed in the file system tree in Windows Explorer as a Mobile Device Windows XP or as a named computer Windows 7 or 8 You can copy paste drag and drop files to and from your local computer to the mobile device just as you would with any folder using Windows Explorer It is good practice to store data files on a removable storage card such as a Compact Flash CF or Secure Digital SD card instead of the main RAM memory of the PPC This will ensure that you do not loose any data in the event of a power failure It also frees up on board memory for the PPC operating system 1 Introduction 9 PC Synchronisation Microsoft ActiveSync Windows XP and Windows Mobile Device Center Windows 7 or 8 are synchronisation applications supplied by Microsoft for Microsoft Windows powered Pocket PCs allowing file transfer between PCs and mobile devices ActiveSync and Windows Mobile Device Center software provide all file services to synchronise or backup data and install software on the PPC Please refer to your PPC user guide for information on how to establish a connection between your mobile device and desktop computer See also Pocket PC to Desktop PC Communication Requirements Microsoft ActiveSync ActiveSync is used for transferring data between your PC and mobile device if your PC is running Windows XP ActiveSyn
128. as an associated Pick List tap on the pull down arrow to the far right of this field to select from a list of available rock types DiscoverMobile er 11 19 ok Lithology res Joos andesite banded iron form basalt conglomerate dacite diorite dolerite felsic volcanic gabbro gneiss Experiment with the other object styles Fault polyline and Granite and Basalt Region Note that the Outcrop table regions has both Lithology and Occurrence pick lists 10 Working with Objects 237 File Management with Named Styles Intelligent table naming and handling will allow a Named Styles library to be preserved without file name changes over multiple days months of use Additionally it can allow the library to be utilised on multiple mobile devices i e multiple field workers Ts Create the source tables as templates from which field tables are cloned For example have a Soil_template and Lag_template stored under a separate templates directory on the storage card In this way the source table structures are preserved the user never captures data into these template tables At the start of the field collection campaign each user clones the necessary data tables from the templates using the Clone From table option under the GO gt File gt New Table menu option These could be saved into for example a Field Data directory on the storage card Thus a Lag table
129. at you want to copy File The name of the new layer and where the table is stored Tap the browse button to edit Fields The fields to be copied to the new table are displayed To add or remove fields tap the Setup Fields button 6 Using the GO Menu 133 Important Note Note Setup Fields Make sure that you fully define the table structure when it is first created or copied because it cannot be changed later For information about fields and their properties see Fields Set Bounds Use this button to change the coordinate bounds of the new table Set Projection Use this option to change the map projection of the new table The Save Table Copy As function will copy both the source tables structure and data into the new table Save Geoset GO gt File gt Save Geoset A Geoset is a table where a workspace is saved A Geoset saves the state of all open tables plus the characteristics of displayed objects including style overrides zoom layering map projections and zoom details For more information see Saving and Restoring Your Workspace Edit Table Structure GO gt File gt Edit Table Structure An pre existing MapInfo Professional vector table structure can be edited Fields can be either added deleted renamed field size changed When modifying large tables this process make take sometime to complete so you will need to be patient or perform on a subset of the table 134 Dis
130. ata Entry gt Picklist Manager to open the Picklist Manager Under Picklists click the Configure button and select the al Rename picklist and description option The Rename Picklist dialog is displayed ai Rename picklist and description Picklist Name Australian Surface Geology Unitnames Picklist Description Surface Geology of Australia Unitnames 1 1 000 000 scale 2010 edition Geoscience Australia Alphabetically sorted OK Cancel Modify the Picklist Name and Picklist Description text boxes as required click OK to commit the change To save picklist modifications 1 2 Select Data Entry gt Picklist Manager to open the Picklist Manager Under Picklists click the Configure button and select the tal Save picklist modifications option Alternatively click the Save button on the Picklist Manager dialog Appendix D Digitizing and Data Entry in Discover 359 To modify an existing picklist 1 Select Data Entry gt Picklist Manager to open the Picklist Manager 2 Click the Picklists box and select the picklist you want to edit 3 The picklist styles are displayed in the Styles box Use the tools under the Styles box to perform the following To add a new style click 2 The MapInfo style dialog is displayed from which you can define a new style Click OK and type in a description for the new style e g Shale Click OK To delete a style select the style in the Styles box and click 3
131. ata tables and geoset file to Discover Mobile A geoset saves information about a single map window only not a multi window environment like a workspace All the tables referenced in a geoset must be located in the same directory as the geoset file in Discover Mobile Map labels are not saved as part of a geoset Save Geoset in Discover Mobile Saving the current work session within Discover Mobile as a Geoset allows a rapid restoration of the session the next time the application is opened See Saving and Restoring Your Workspace for further information Set Zoom Layering for Large Raster Images Turning off the display of complex or detailed map layers when you zoom out and move around the map window will significantly improve map redraw speed and remove unnecessary detail from the map display at larger zoom levels This can be applied using the zoom layering function within Discover Mobile See Layer and Object Visibility for more information on this topic 24 Discover Mobile User Guide Pack Tables Although map objects or records appear as though they have been removed from a MapInfo Professional table when they have been deleted the storage space they occupied is not removed until a table is packed This tool is especially useful for tables created from external databases and must be done prior to copying tables to the Pocket PC device 1 Select Discover gt Table Utilities gt Multi Pack 2 Choose the tables to pac
132. ate Systems 1983 fed OK Z Projection Selection dialog showing Projection Category and then the Category Member To set the map projection for capturing GPS objects 1 Choose GO gt Preferences 2 On the Preferences dialog navigate to the Session entry and change the Map Projection entry to User Defined 3 Tap the button next to the User Projection entry and change the projection category by selecting the required projection from the drop down list 4 Tap OK on the dialog and then OK in the Title bar to return to the main window The Map Grid and Status Window display units should then be displayed in your user defined projection rather than the map window projection Raster Transparency Choose GO gt Edit gt Raster Transparency to adjust the transparency of raster images 8 Working with Maps 165 Raster images displayed by Discover Mobile can have their degree of opacity or transparency altered This is useful when you have multiple images displayed such as a scanned geological map overlain by a Landsat image In these circumstances you can adjust the transparency of the overlying image so that information from the underlying raster can be seen An example of this is shown below where a partially transparent scanned geology map overlays a Landsat image DiscoverMobile e lt 4 03 X aes PRAJ Rp Of Ble il x oo a RE Bh hy Transparent geology map overlying a Landsat image You can control the
133. ate a new file tap the New button and enter the desired information into Pocket Excel 246 Discover Mobile User Guide 7 When data entry is complete save the file in the Discover Mobile Hotlink directory set under GO gt Preferences menu with a preferred name and then click OK A dialog with the new Discover Mobile link filename and pathway will be displayed Tap OK to exit this dialog and check that the new file name and path are stored in the hotlink column Editing a Hotlink File To return to a hotlink file for editing bring up the browser window and tap on the hotlink field A menu will appear with an Open and Expand entry Select the Open menu to open the file DiscoverMobile en 2 02 lok Expand Reset Width Using the Hotlink Files in MapInfo In order to use the hotlink files created in Discover Mobile back in MapInfo Professional on the desktop you need to copy both the TAB file and the hotlink files to the desktop computer If you store all your hotlink files in the Discover mobile hotlinks directory configured under the GO gt Preferences menu then you can simply copy the entire contents of this directory back to your desktop computer To make this process as simple as possible it is recommended that you store the TAB file containing the hotlink attribute and the linked files in the same directory Once the files are copied back to your desktop computer you can use the DiscoverMobile gt Con
134. ates see Object Creation Discover Mobile provides inbuilt support for a wide selection of standard GPS devices Discover Mobile can connect to any GPS receiver which outputs data in the NMEA 0183 version 2 0 protocol format and has a serial COM port connection The first time you use Discover Mobile you will need to configure the GPS communication settings for your particular receiver You can do this from GO gt GPS gt Setup Connection or GO gt Preferences menu It is important that you set the correct port number communication format and speed for your GPS receiver If these settings are incorrect Discover Mobile will not be able to communicate with the receiver Refer to your GPS User Guide for details on the GPS communication settings and Working with the GPS in this guide 5 Mobile Interface 65 GPS xi GPS Connect button is used to connect disconnect the GPS port Tap the connect button to open the GPS connection You will need to make sure that your GPS has been properly configured is turned on and that appropriate communication settings have been made under the Discover Mobile GO gt Preferences gt GPS gt Connection menu before opening the connection GPS Point Track Log button turns on off the Point Track Log function Discover Mobile can record a continuous Track Log showing your path as a series of points See GPS Point Log GPS Line Track Log button turns on off the Line Track Log function The Line Track Log i
135. avel The sensitivity of the auto map rotation can be configured using the GO gt Preferences gt GPS gt Map Rotation options Waypoint Navigation GO gt GPS gt Waypoint Navigation The waypoint navigation tool allows the selection of an existing map object eg point polygon as a destination waypoint it will then report the distance and bearing between the current GPS location and the selected waypoint feature in a waypoint message window For more information see Navigating to a Known Point 6 Using the GO Menu 107 Capture Point GO gt GPS gt Capture Point Capture a GPS located point For more information see Creating GPS located Objects Capture Polyline GO gt GPS gt Capture Polyline Capture a GPS located polyline For more information see Creating GPS located Objects Capture Polygon GO gt GPS gt Capture Polygon Capture a GPS located polygon For more information see Creating GPS located Objects Capture Structure Symbol GO gt GPS gt Capture Structure Symbol Capture a GPS located structure symbolt For more information see Creating GPS located Objects Point Log GO gt GPS gt Point Log Record a log of the travelled path as a series of points For more information see GPS Point Log Line Log GO gt GPS gt Line Log Record a log of the travelled path as a series of line segments For more information see GPS Line Log Discover Mobile User Guide XRF Menu GO gt XRF GPS Fix GPS ray A 1
136. avigation and switch to smaller high resolution images for each project area Grid image formats such as DEM or Topographic data are not supported and must be converted to a raster image Discover Mobile User Guide Note ECW Files Discover Mobile supports raster images in the ER Mapper ECW format provided they have already been associated with a MapInfo Professional TAB file The MapInfo Professional TAB file must point directly to the ECW image file as Discover Mobile cannot open ECW files directly To import an ECW into MapInfo Professional navigate to Discover gt Import and Export gt ALG ECW JP2000 Import Raster images in ECW format will give the best performance in Discover Mobile due to the lossless compression algorithms used ECW images typically have a compression of at least 10 of the file size It is recommend to use only ECW files up to 20MB in file size Things You Can Do to Improve Performance The following suggestions will improve the performance of Discover Mobile and assist with management of your data Supported File Types and Table Size Limits Subsetting Datasets to the Project Area Convert Tables to Same Projection Set Table Default View Save Data as Geoset File Set Zoom Layering for Large Raster Images Pack Tables Create Data Entry Pick Lists Create Named Styles 3 Data Preparation i7 Note Subsetting Datasets to the Project Area
137. ayers and zoom level of the map display GPS Fix GPS er 10 46 X Layer Control Zoom Level View Entire Layer Map Rotation Map Grid GPS Overlay Scale Bar Select Toolbar Drawing Toolbar GPS Toolhar Status Window Table Browser Table Structure View menu Layer Control Zoom Level 110 Discover Mobile User Guide View Entire Layer Map Rotation Map Grid e GPS Overlay Scale Bar Show Toolbars Status Window d Table Browser Table Structure Layer Control GO gt View gt Layer Control The Layer Control command also available from the Main toolbar displays the Layer control dialog from where you can control the display properties of a layer TAB file From the Layer control dialog you can add tables change the display order control visibility turn on editing and display labels For information on adding and removing layers and changing the properties of layers in the display list see Managing Layers 6 Using the GO Menu 111 DiscoverMobile er 10 53 ok Isa Geoloay Visible O Automatic labels Selectable _ Editable Cancel ae RIE Bohl Dialog of the Layer Control Display List The Layer list controls the drawing order of the layers within it The layers are drawn in order from bottom to top The layer order can be modified using the Up or Down buttons You can add and remove layers from the list with the Add and Remove
138. bile on the PPC Reactivating the Licence If the software is erased from the PPC you must reinstall the Discover Mobile software and then reactivate the software licence You can reuse your original licence file to activate Discover Mobile at any time providing you use the licence file on the same PPC device Keep a copy of the licence file on your PC or another form of storage media e g CF Flash card or Secure Digital card Transferring Data Between Devices Transferring data between your mobile device and your desktop computer is as simple as dragging and dropping files from one device to the other using Windows Explorer All that is required to activate this functionality is to establish a connection between the two devices using Microsoft ActiveSync or Windows Mobile Device Center see PC Synchronisation These synchronisation applications can provide communication between the mobile device and a desktop or laptop computer via a serial universal serial bus USB or ethernet connection USB connections are the most common and are significantly faster than serial connections for data transfer It is possible to use ethernet or a wireless LAN connection to transfer files between your mobile device and a host computer However you cannot use an ethernet or wireless LAN connection to remotely install software or to perform file synchronisation Please refer to your mobile device documentation for details on how to establish a local
139. ble dialog specify a projection for the new table and click OK This will create a table with two fields called ID Integer and Modified Logical coenen I Table Name Geology Clone from None a5 Projection MGA Zone 51 GDA 94 Cancel Le OK If desired the structure of another MapInfo Professional table can be duplicated by selecting the table from the Clone from dropdown If a table contains unsupported fields types for Discover Mobile such as Time and Date Time a warning message will appear and omit these fields in the DiscoverMobile Table directory copy Modify Table Structure Numerous controls are provided to modify the structure of a MapInfo Professional Table reordering adding fields changing field types field widths and field name To reorder the current table field highlight the designated field and use either the Move Up or Move Down button To add another field into the table structure click the Add button and specify the field name type and width if required If GPS derived data needs to be recorded the Special Fields button allows the addition of fields which will be automatically populated which the respective data type Examples of this include Map_X Map_yY Fix_Quality and FixNumSat To delete a table field highlight the designated field and click the Delete button 38 Discover Mobile User Guide ANE Picklist Field Types New indicates n
140. ble different tables to be selected to store captured data 7 Controlling Layers and the View 141 Note To setup capture tables 1 Choose GO gt GPS gt Setup Data Capture Tables 2 Under Points Lines and Regions select the default capture layer for new GPS located objects DiscoverMobile e 4 3 17 ok Select default layers for new objects Points Prompt for Layer Name Copper_Hill Soils Isa_Geology Australia Regions Prompt for Layer Name Copper_Hill_Soils Isa_Geolog Australia eee SSeS Setting default tables for each object type can simplify field data collection To automatically use multiple insertion tables for a single object type such as point data into various soil lag and rock chip tables utilise the auto table assignment functionality within Named Styles Adding a Cosmetic Layer To add a cosmetic layer to the map window use GO gt Map gt Add Cosmetic Layer When a cosmetic layer is created it is placed at the top of the display list i e it is drawn last You can alter the position of the cosmetic layer like any other layer see Managing Layers When a cosmetic layer is added to the map window it is automatically set to be the insertion layer even if another layer has been previously been set as the insertion layer The cosmetic layer is a temporary layer and all inserted objects are held in memory If Discover Mobile is shutdown then the contents of the cosmetic layer a
141. bles and Setting Auto fields Optionally a specific table can be selected for each style to link to The table you wish to link to has to be currently opened in MapInfo Professional to appear in the selectable list Setting this allows styles to be applied to the specified table when using a Named Style for a new object within DiscoverMobile In addition Auto fields can be set for the table by clicking the adjacent button next to the linked table name This allows GPS derived fields to be set which are also available within a picklist This is a powerful method to apply auto field picklists to populate a table attribute based on the Named Style selected for the object For example you could use the Set Constant Value to assign one attribute field with the same name as the Named Styles such that one you select Granite named style for the table the Rock_Type field would be automatically populated with Granite You also could do other conditional auto fields such as set a field to Object Area for Region Styles but not set this for Point Styles Not setting the Optional columns Capture Table and Auto Field options means that the set styles are non table specific they will simply be captured to the current insertion layer in Discover Mobile regardless of object type The only Auto Field options that will be applied are those that have been set to the table itself using the Picklist Editor Saving Named Style Wh
142. bol The default symbol is a hollow red circle The symbol style can be adjusted for the Current Position to any symbol style supported by Discover Mobile a Track Log Point Style Sets a preferred display style for the Point Track Log The default style is a gray circle The symbol style can be adjusted for the Point Track Log to any symbol style supported by Discover Mobile 10 Working with Objects 225 Note Track Log Line Style Sets a preferred display style for the Line Track Log The default style is a single point black line The line style can be adjusted for the Line Track Log to any line style supported by Discover Mobile Capture Point Style Sets a preferred display style for the Capture Point The default style is a black flag The symbol style can be adjusted for the Capture Point tool to any symbol style supported by Discover Mobile Capture Line Style Sets a preferred display style for the Capture Line The default style is a single point black line The line style can be adjusted for the Capture Line tool to any line style supported by Discover Mobile Capture Polygon Style Sets a preferred display style for the Capture Polygon The default style is a filled white polygon with a single point black outline The polygon style can be adjusted for the Capture Polygon tool to any line and fill pattern style supported by Discover Mobile A Named Style can also be assigned to any object captured via the GPS Thi
143. buttons Visible Hide and show the layer selected in the display list Selectable Make objects on the layer selected in the display list selectable with tools like Select Label and Info Editable Make objects on the layer selected in the display list editable Automate labels Annotate objects on the selected layer using the settings controlled from the Label button 112 Discover Mobile User Guide Display Change the display settings of the layer selected in the display list With this option you can override the style properties of objects on the layer hide objects when you zoom out from the map and control line direction node display and centroid display of polygons For more information see Layer and Object Visibility Labels Change the automatic label settings on the selected layer To apply these changes the Automate labels option must be selected DiscoverMobile er 10 55 lok Label with Label lines Dataset Isa Geology None Beld Ure Sloe x amp rrow O Display within range J se Aa e0340 Orientation J Ld O Allow overlapped AB Allow duplicates O Label partial objects IACI Hh _ Maximum labels Rotate label with line Label offset nee pe 01 Label dialog for controlling automatic labelling Dataset and Field The layer table and field column to be used when labelling Label lines The format of callout lines drawn between the obj
144. by order of magnitude representing specified threshold values Dot Density A type of thematic map which displays data as a series of tiny dots where each dot represents some specific quantity For example in a dot density map of rock age each dot might represent 10 000 years Individual Value A type of thematic map that shades records according to individual values For more information see Theme Type 6 Using the GO Menu 103 Theme Fields Select the fields that the selected theme is applied to Theme types that involve comparison of field values allow multiple data field selection for example pie and bar charts Compact Legend The normal sized legend shows the entire sampling and the ranges used The compact format shows less detail of theme style and data range For more information see Thematic Legend Modify Themes GO gt Map gt Modify Themes Opens the Themes dialog from where you can modify and remove existing themes Modify Tap the Modify button to change the data specification symbols annotation and appearance The displayed dialog and associated controls vary depending on the thematic Type being used For more information see Modifying Themes Legend Tap the Legend button to modify the title subtitle text appearance and to select compact or normal format For more information see Thematic Legend Remove Removes the selected theme Remove All Removes all themes 104 Di
145. c may be pre installed on the mobile device but you will need to install the application software on your PC computer If you do not have an ActiveSync installation CD ROM you can download the software for free from a Microsoft Download website Refer to the Microsoft ActiveSync User Guide for instructions on installing ActiveSync software Microsoft ActiveSync comes pre installed in ROM on all mobile devices but needs to be installed on the host computer using the accompanying software installation CD shipped with the mobile device If you do not have an installation CD you can download or update to the latest version of ActiveSync freely from the Microsoft download centre web page Windows Mobile Device Center should be pre installed with the Windows 7 or 8 operating system if not it can be downloaded from a Microsoft Download website See also PC Synchronisation Pocket PC to Desktop PC Communication Requirements Windows Mobile Device Center Windows Mobile Device Center is used for transferring data between your PC and mobile device if your PC is running Windows 7 or 8 operating system Windows Mobile Device Center should be pre installed with Windows 7 or 8 operating system if not it can be downloaded from a Microsoft Download website Refer to the Windows Mobile Device Center documentation for instructions on installing the software Discover Mobile User Guide See also PC Synchronisation Pocket PC to Desktop
146. cable Appendix D Digitizing and Data Entry in Discover 369 Parameter Lookup Table Exclusive Automatically inserts the object centroid value into a numeric field type with the table projection The options are available MapX table projection centroid X Easting Longitude value MapY table projection centroid Y Northing Latitude value RepeatValue repeats previous record cell value in new record CurrentDate inserts the current date CurrentTime inserts the current time CurrentDateTime inserts the current date and time Dip used for structure symbols the field that contains the dip DipDirection used for structure symbols the field that contains the dip direction DiscoverCode used for structure symbols the field that contains the Discover Code Select a picklist to use as the validation list from that field The picklists are located in Windows 7 and 8 C Users Current User AppDat a Roami ng Encom Discover Picklist Windows XP C Documents and Settings Current User Application Data Encom Discover Picklists If selected restricts selections from only the picklist If not selected custom values can be entered or selected from the picklist 370 Discover Mobile User Guide Note Default value Map Style Increment Min Numeric Max Numeric Min Date Max Date Min Date Time Max Date Time Min Time Max Time Default value of field in ne
147. ce per view Tap the arrow button to display other functions available from this tool Save View Saves the current view properties with a unique name Multiple views can be defined and restored directly from the pop up menu Note that only the display area properties are saved not the view contents Restoring a view will return the map display to the same scale and map centre at the time it was saved It will not reopen layers that were in use when the view was originally saved If you wish to save a view which includes all associated map layers and display properties you need to save a Geoset see Saving and Restoring Your Workspace Delete View Deletes a saved view from the display list Zoom Level You can specify a precise zoom level by selecting a screen width value in metres or map scale from the pop up menu The zoom level tool can be used in either the Width mode or Scale mode When you switch between modes the corresponding scale or width value will be shown in the list If you need to set the screen width or map scale to a value which is not available in the list you can type the value using the keyboard or one of the other input methods DiscoverMobile lt 11 34 X ME DiscoverMobile gx 2 11 36 X 1 10000 Width 6400 0 tm Apply Close B 1 View Entire Layer Redraws the map to show the full data extents for a selected layer Choose a layer or All Layers from the Zoom to selection dialog
148. ceccceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeenaeeeeeene 161 Controlling the Map Projection c cccccsceeceeeeeeeeeeeseceeeeeneeeeseaeeeeneees 162 Raster Transparency eeceeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeaeeeeseeaaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeseeaas 164 Table of Contents vii 9 Working with Tables ccccceseeeeeeeseseeeeeeseeseeeeeesesseeeeeesessneeeeeeeesnenes 167 Adding Tables Maps and Fields cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeees 167 Using MapInfo Tables and Raster Images eseseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 167 Creating a New Table with Discover Mobile 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeees 168 Gloning Tables aiiin reana aia aa aea ai aaisa 170 Using Template Ssnan iiri ar Ti 171 Defining Field Properties ssaeasssseessssrrreessrrnsesrnnnenerrnnnenstnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnna 171 Field TYPES eaa oit i e A eee etd eee Yeu ein et ae ia 171 Q iek Pick FieldSirioniieeta bien dtieteiele ter oa A mlaiees 172 Pick LISTE rennuna ae a wae Me eed ee 173 EOE E E EE E A PEI EEE E E T 173 US6 A E E ea ae PEE eae ees 173 Example Pick Lists naaa ang aa EEA TE AR 174 Create a Pick List in Discover Mobile csseeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeees 174 AUtOiFields 2 3 Ae A ainda cine ke 176 Structural Data Fields cccecceeeeeeeceeee cesses eeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseaeeesenees 179 Azimuth Measurement ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaeeeeenees 180 Structure Dip and Plunge Angles ccccceceeesseeeseeeeee
149. ceceeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeseeeeseeeeeesnaeeeeeas 215 Viewing Graphical Selections ccccccceseeeeeeseeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeees 216 Selecting Objects Within a Buffer ceceecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 216 Editing ObjeCts ieni satiate eee inate 218 Movevan ObjeCtisfccdice aide aah aii adi danke hives 219 Edit and Delete NOdeS eeeeceeeeeeeenneeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeaas 219 Add NGd6S t c nisin a teenie aint tended tas 219 Edit Attributes iunii e iei E aun Schelde ies 219 Edit Coordinates si ihai dasaery ideea aeeiiaii ra donadi ad ra Praia iN 220 Edit Object Styles imen i ie lee 220 Delete Obj CtS isa inieniieun ou iiiaio naia an iaaiaee aane dae 220 Formatting Objects issii anai a aaia iaa 220 Setting Default Styles for New Drawing Objects ccceeeeeee 221 Formatting Drawing Objects cccccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeesetaeeeenaeeeeaes 221 Symbol Style aenur a aeae eaaa n aaaea aai na aeaea 222 Line Styles ssi icant Aid ea ieee nt eee ees 223 PUlll Sty lO A cae catane vis aeaea do ea araa aa anaien aei e eaea 224 Setting Default Styles for GPS Located Objects eeeeeees 224 Applying Named Styles ccccccccesceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeseaeeeseaees 225 Applying Range Styles ccccccccssceccseeeeseseeeseeeeeeseaeeseeneeesteaeenennees 227 Applying a Range Style Library During XRF Data Capture 227 Named StyleSni v0 22 Ls La aa ee hes
150. cian Intrusi Undifferentiated f Ordivician Intrusi Golden Cross Re Ocok Cabonne Group Oakdale Formation Krich volcaniclas Ordivician 250K Bathurst G 3 Ocok Cabonne Group Oakdale Formation Kich volcaniclas Ordivician 250K Bathurst G M 4 159 of159 New Record Delete Record SP Filter Validate lt Label Editable s _ Enter Data dialog showing entry of data in a mappable table To digitize mappable structure objects with the Data Entry tool 1 On the Discover menu point to Data Entry and select Setup Table The Select Tables dialog is displayed All open tables are listed in the Select Tables dialog box Select a table To open another table Click the Open button and select the TAB file you want to open in MapInfo Professional Click OK to load the selected table in the Data Entry tool The table names are displayed on the tab at the top of the data sheet The number of records and the current selected record are displayed on the navigation bar at the bottom of the dialog box 1 of 5152 gt Pil Use these tools to open another table or view table information 376 Discover Mobile User Guide Note 5 Use these tools to open another table or view table information Open another table for data entry ps Close selected table View information about the open table such as Name Path and Projection gt gt View
151. cked rows also reduce the efficiency of a table To pack a table 1 Choose GO gt File gt Pack Table 2 On the Pack Table dialog select the table to pack and tap OK Due to the limited computing power of PPC devices it is recommended to only pack tables no more than couple of Mega Bytes MB If a large table is packed it may complete within a couple of minutes so you will need to be patient 9 Working with Tables 189 Searching for Data In this section e Searching Tables by Query e Searching Tables by Keyword For information about individual commands used to search tables see Query Menu Searching Tables by Query The general procedure for using queries is to specify a query statement that is then applied to nominated layers Where the items within the nominated layers meet the selection criteria of the query the results are temporarily stored and highlighted in the display To create a query 1 Choose GO gt Query gt Select and select the table you wish to query This table is referred to as the base table Layers Isa_Geology X Type expression or choose element below UNITNAME Ballara Quartzite DiscoverMobile Columns Choose to Insert v Operations Choose to Insert v Functions Choose to Insert v Load The Query dialog with layer and query specified 2 Construct the query using the available columns and operators and then tap the Run button to initiate the query
152. clone structure of this table and use it for the new table Any Quick Pick options setup for the source table will be copied across for the cloned table No data will be transferred to the new table from the old table only the table structure will be copied Open Table GO gt File gt Open Table Use this command to open TAB tables created with Discover Mobile MapInfo Professional or Discover TAB files with referenced raster files BMP TIFF GIF JPG PCX SPOT ECW GeoTIFF images without an associated TAB file and Geoset files Close Table GO gt File gt Close Table Use this command to close any open table Close All Tables GO gt File gt Close All Tables Use this command to close all open tables Note that when closing all tables the map display will show no data 132 Discover Mobile User Guide Note Using Close All Tables will also disconnect a GPS connection Save Table Copy As GO gt File gt Save Table Copy As A new table can be created from any open table providing it is not a raster table The original table remains unchanged and open for all further edits DiscoverMobile e7 4c 2 26 ok Save Layer Copy As Layer IERE i v File My Documents LayerCopy t A Fields MAP_SYMBOL UNITNAME GROUP STRATNO C ee Setup Fields Projection Transverse Mercator Set Bounds Set Projection Save a copy of a table dialog Layer The layer th
153. cover Mobile User Guide Pack Table GO gt File gt Pack Table When map objects are deleted from the Map Window the record in the Browser Window remains as an undeleted row and therefore the row and map object counts can be different It is also a good idea to pack a table to make it perform more efficiently 7 Controlling Layers and the View 135 Controlling Layers and the View In this section About Layers Managing Layers Layer and Object Visibility Managing Objects in Layers View Controls Display View Settings About Layers A layer is a table TAB which contains data objects points lines and polygons with attributes fields For information on creating and managing tables see Managing Tables You can add tables to the display change the order of display control visibility make the layer editable and display labels For information on controlling layers see Managing Layers Editable Layers Editing of objects can be done on any layer specified as editable Discover Mobile operates differently from Maplnfo Professional in that it allows simultaneously editing of multiple layers You can move reposition resize format and delete objects on any editable layer To make a layer editable see Managing Layers Selectable Layers Many Discover Mobile functions require that map objects be selected before performing a particular operation To use the Select tool Label tool or Info tool you
154. cover Mobile stores the picklist of Structure Symbols in the designated Pick List directory as anEncom_StructureCodes txt file this file is installed to the default example data on the desktop Example Data Picklists This contains every structure symbol in the Discover library see Appendix B Structural Symbols for a complete listing listed alphabetically This list can be customized to a user specific order an or to display only those structure types commonly used in the field area thus the drop down list may be setup to display only 15 structure types rather than the entire 79 saving the user having to scroll up and down a long list every time a structural measurement is made Open the file into a text editor such as Notepad or WordPad and reorder or delete entries as required For each structure type the entire row entry must be deleted or preserved including the integer value at the end of each row When completed the original file name must also be preserved Encom StructureCodes txt for the Structural Symbols tool to recognize the file Copy this customized file into your project s picklist folder and ensure this file is copied to the Discover Mobile picklist directory on the device 184 Discover Mobile User Guide i Managing Tables Tables are used to store the attributes of all types of objects including data captured from the GPS Tables used in Discover Mobile are TAB files identical to the tables used i
155. cting to the GPS RECEIVED cececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeestaeetenes 327 Connecting to an NMEA GPS receiver eessen 328 Connecting to a Trimble GPS receiver cecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 329 View Satellite Positions and Status cccecccceseeeeeeeeeessteeeeeneees 331 Connecting and Configuring Discover Mobile and the XRF device 332 Specify the XRF Project Path 0 ccccccceeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseteeeeeneeees 332 Configure the XRF Connection cccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 333 Connect to the XRF deVICC cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeeeees 334 Enhance the Map Window Display ccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaaes 337 Gapturing XRF Data ain aree ea oda tian eae 337 Run an Analysis on the XRF device eeeeeecceeeeeneeeeeeeeeennaeeeeeeenaas 338 Record the GPS Location c cccsssceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeeeeaaeesenes 338 Review XRF Data and Record Comments and Observations 339 Save Reading in Discover Mobile ceccccceeeceeeeeeeeesetteeeeneeees 342 Digitizing and Data Entry in DiSCOVEL eccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 343 Creating and Managing Picklists c cccscceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 345 Applying a Single Style from a Picklist 0 ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 359 Applying Multiple Styles from a Picklist 0 c cccseeeeeeeeesteeeeeees 361 Applying Structural Styles from
156. d NewField will be added to the field grid You can assign a name to the field by tapping on the NewField entry and typing in the required field name Delete If a field is added by mistake or is not required you can remove it by first selecting it with the stylus and then tapping the Delete button Removal of a field is permanent and a message confirming the deletion is displayed Auto Fields You can also choose to add Auto fields from the drop down list next to the Add button Auto fields are predefined fields which automatically capture information from the attached GPS receiver To add an auto field select the required field name from the list and the entry will be added to the field grid The data type and size will then be set for that field type Any Auto Fields which exist in a table will be automatically updated when capturing objects via the GPS 6 Using the GO Menu 129 Note The Map_X amp Map_Y auto fields will automatically capture object coordinates in the user defined projection set with GO gt Preferences gt Session the default is Longitude Latitude WGS84 The Pos_Lat and Pos_Long fields will always automatically capture object coordinates in Longitude Latitude WGS84 These GPS fields can be assigned automatically to custom fields of the appropriate type using the Auto Fields options Name The default name for a new field is NewField A field name can be up to 31 alphanumeric characters in length
157. d leave for 5 minutes While connected to the power source perform a soft reset and hold down power key to turn the device back on In Vehicle Recharging Invest in an auto adapter to use the Pocket PC while travelling or to charge in between field usage Do the same for Bluetooth GPS units Data Storage Choose a topic Keep Data on External Storage Card Set Storage Card Directory Paths Backup Your Installation of Discover Mobile Keep Data on External Storage Card Apart from expanding the storage capacity on the Pocket PC any data stored on a storage card does not depend on power from the device Therefore any data recorded on the storage card will not be lost if the battery becomes completely flat Copying some programs to the storage card can free up memory space on the Pocket PC The types of data you should keep on the storage card include 2 Best Practice with a Portable PC 13 Note All map data e g topographical geological data images etc Discover Mobile licence file e GPS point and line logs Named styles files e Pick list files Hotlink files Track logs e New tables e Image files A backup copy of the Discover Mobile installation file DiscoverMobile Setup CAB The directory structure on a storage card is limited to one level only and file names cannot be longer than 21 characters in length Set Storage Card Directory Paths By default the file paths in
158. de xi v GPS Polyline Polygon Pause button is used to pause the capturing of a polygon or polyline without actually terminating the current line capture To use this function either the GPS polyline or Polygon capture tool must be active To pause the capture of a polyline or polygon tap the Pause button once to activate it depressed Discover Mobile will then temporarily stop adding new nodes to the object With the pause button depressed you can then walk around and examine where the next node should be placed without actually capturing any data When you are ready to capture the next node tap the pause button again to restart the GPS polyline or polygon capture By toggling the pause button on and off after you capture each node you can build up a polyline or polygon one node at a time When you want to finish capturing a polyline or polygon simply turn the pause button off and then tap the appropriate polyline or polygon capture button to end the line capture and save the object to a table You can record point objects such as structural measurements while the pause button is active To do so simply walk to the desired location and tap the button for the appropriate point capture tool You will then be asked for a table in which to save the new object You can also add a new node to a polyline or polygon while the pause button is active the Insert Node tool on the GPS toolbar Capturing Points Open the point capture table
159. dify Themes to display the modify themes dialog 2 Select a theme from the list and tap Remove To remove all themes not just the selected theme tap Remove All Note Once the themes have been removed they cannot be restored Note The display style of point objects can also be permanently changed by applying Range Styles Controlling the Map Projection The Discover Mobile map window has a native map projection which determines how all objects in the window are displayed By default an empty map window i e one with no tables loaded is initially assigned a projection of Latitude Longitude WGS84 If you connect and start a GPS with a blank map window then the current position symbol will be displayed in the native Latitude Longitude WGS84 projection the default projection of the window and GPS coordinate system 8 Working with Maps 163 Note The first time you open a data table into an empty map window Discover Mobile will check the native projection of the table and compare it with the projection of the map window If the native projection of the table is different to projection of the map window then Discover Mobile will automatically change the map window projection to match the native projection of the first opened table This only occurs for the first table that is opened All subsequently data tables which are loaded into the map window will be added in the map window projection regardless of their nativ
160. draw the map window quickly enough to keep up with the GPS In this situation Discover Mobile will automatically adjust the rate at which it polls the GPS for position information to match the re draw speed of the map window The Preferred Update Interval setting allows you to set a preferred update interval for the current GPS position and where possible Discover Mobile will attempt to honour this value If you find the map redraw speed is too slow for your current needs try zooming in on the working area in the map window as this may improve re draw time and restore the GPS update interval to the preferred value Whenever Discover Mobile decreases or increases the update interval of the GPS to match the map redraw speed it alerts you with a warning sound These warning sounds can be configured via the GO gt Preferences gt Alert Configuration control Stop After Error This item controls the number of consecutive errors or poor data that Discover Mobile will accept before terminating the GPS connection If you are working in areas with poor GPS signal e g heavily forested terrain in valleys or near cliffs it is recommended you increase the stop error to a high value e g 30 or 50 If you still experience connection difficulties you can further increase this value by typing an alternative value in the box SSF Logging This option is only available with the Trimble GPS Protocol enabled Set this option to On to create a Trimble SSF format
161. ds since lock acquisition Use of the Carrier phase signal for post processing requires the base station and rover unit to be within 50 kilometres of each other Carrier wave data must also be continuously logged for a minimum of 10 minutes 600 seconds for sufficient data to be acquired to allow high precision post processing During this time data must be logged from the minimum number of satellites set in the Min Satellites option of the Setup dialog 4 or 5 If the number of satellites falls below this parameter the Carrier Lock is broken the Locked message will change to No Lock with the timer reset to 0 seconds Once the minimum time 10 minutes has elapsed all data captured within this period of Carrier Lock can be more precisely post processed If Carrier Lock is broken and the timer reset within 10 minutes of initialization the carrier phase data captured may not be sufficient to ensure high precision post processing for this block of data 278 Discover Mobile User Guide oO BE SE ioe r rae eo SAPP SR amp KA EIQ del i x os e eoa ZI No Lock Carrier status message indicates Carrier Lock has been lost timer has been reset to 0 Efficient logging of Carrier phase data therefore requires an uninterrupted view of the sky no buildings or overhead cover to ensure that Carrier Lock is maintained It is recommended to not move to the next data capture location before the minimum
162. e Buffer option allows you to quickly identify objects of interest within a given distance of other objects For example you may wish to identify all mineral occurrences which fall within 2 km of a mapped fault To create a buffer 1 Open the table and set as the insertion layer 2 Select the object or objects you want to create a buffer around 3 Choose GO gt Edit gt Buffer The Buffer Objects dialog is displayed 10 Working with Objects 217 6 7 DiscoverMobile en 11 28 ok Buffer Each abject separately O Buffer All abjects into one per layer une Specify a buffer distance around the selected object s Choose to either Buffer each object separately or Buffer all objects into one per layer In the Distance box type the buffer distance In the Unit box choose the unit of measurement for the buffer distance Tap OK The object buffers are created and displayed in the Insertion layer All objects located within the buffers are selected 218 Discover Mobile User Guide DiscoverMobile Pinal Farcts ba 4 gt a EA Qe Me dele il x col R Z ct An example display of a set of faults being buffered using a 500 metre buffer Editing Objects Discover Mobile allows simultaneous editing of multiple objects in multiple layers Objects in any selectable and editable layer can be moved repositioned resized formatted or deleted see Managing Layers Most editin
163. e GO gt File gt Save Table Copy As DiscoverMobile en 2 26 lok Save Layer Copy As Layer EMES v File My Documents LayerCopy t ie Fields MAP_SYMBOL UNITNAME GROUP STRATNO 6 hClti COC C zS Setup Fields Projection Transverse Mercator Set Bounds Cancel Save a copy of a table dialog 2 In the Layer box select the layer to use as the source table 3 Tap the browse button next to the File box and then type a new layer name and select the folder where the new table is to be saved 4 If you want to change the table structure tap the Setup Fields button and modify and delete fields as required Important Make sure that you fully define the table structure when it is copied because it cannot be changed later 5 If a different projection is to be used for the copy tap the Set Projection button 6 Tap OK 9 Working with Tables 187 Note Tip The new table is added to the Layer Control and is immediately displayed The Save Table Copy As function will copy both the source tables structure and data into the new table To copy just the structure without the data see Cloning Tables The operation of saving a copy of a specified layer can be especially useful when used with the Cosmetic Layer All objects in the Cosmetic Layer can be permanently saved using the Save Table Copy As option Viewing Tables Use GO gt View gt Table Browser to view th
164. e been pre configured to receive all elements from Sodium Na through to Uranium U depending on the element suite and individual XRF Analyzer configuration The XRF Data 3 tab also contains instrument specific information such as the manufacturer serial number and model gt en TS GPS FixGP Yx M 1 42 ok XRF Data Explore Ca Vv Mn Co Cu As Sr Nb Ag Sn Cs Hf WwW Pb Th 376 54809 271 11984Ti 495 13357 93 574074 Cr 17 969536 77 345360 Fe 4 589768 31 558783 Ni 0 000000 52 972961 Zn 0 000000 10 946304 Rb 33 494576 6 288470 Zr 12 784919 9 104922 Mo 7 218576 10 089030 Cd 0 000000 39 782398 Sb 0 0 Ba 0 000000 1 000000 Ta 24 160702 72 592690 Hg 0 000000 14 540175 Bi 1 621070 7 765596 U 751 380554111 34959 151 79461A9 624378 11 665154 64 113762 26 154295 79 937302 100 99999225 758781 0 000000 1 032417 4 561193 7 567289 5 980903 8 002458 867 84161458 819977 0 000000 31 292498 706 03393 124 59050 0 000000 1 000000 0 192862 14 001245 4 833124 13 147990 4 103362 12 610439 Information summary XRF Data 1 xRAL gt XRF Data Form 1 Geography Tab In addition to the XRF Data tabs there is a Geography tab which contains the X Y and Z coordinate positions obtained from the GPS 342 Discover Mobile User Guide 7 amp GPS FixGP g Yy d 1 43 ok XRF Data Explore X 144 971814 Y 37 812304 Z 99 769272 XRF Data 2 XRF Data 3 Geography 4 XRF data shee
165. e by positioning the stylus over the required object and tapping A selected object is identified by a change of colour pattern change or highlighting 92 Discover Mobile User Guide Annotation Select allows existing annotation to be selected and edited Zoom In GO gt Tools gt Zoom In The Zoom In tool increases the view of the display area The tool is operated by simply tapping once in the Display Area This magnifies the view by a factor of 2x and uses the point of the stylus tap as the centre of magnification Alternatively place the stylus on the screen and drag out a dotted rectangle When the stylus is removed the Display Area will zoom to fill the extents of the rectangle area Zoom Out GO gt Tools gt Zoom Out The Zoom Out tool operates identically to the Zoom In function but in a reverse sense such that the display area shrinks instead of magnifies A single tap of the stylus decreases the view by a factor of 2x with the view centred on the located point Pan GO gt Tools gt Pan The Pan tool is used to move the view around the Display Area To operate position and hold the stylus on the screen As you move the stylus on the screen the map view display moves with the stylus movement Center GO gt Tools gt Center The Center tool is another useful tool for navigating around the map view This tool operates by re centering the map display to show the tapped location at the centre of the view 6
166. e data records within a table You can enter new data or modify existing data in this browser view Use GO gt View gt Table Structure to display the fields columns within a layer and their associated data types You can view the structure of different tables but you cannot modify the table structure T NomadET0Aco1112 baba File Zoom Tools Help DiscoverMobile a 4c 3 44 lok Dataset Geology Dataset_Dataset v x Structure of a table 188 Discover Mobile User Guide Note Note Modifying Table Structure An existing table structure can be modified which includes adding fields deleting fields changing field type changing field size and renaming fields To modify the structure of a table A Choose GO gt File gt Edit Table Structure 2 In the Layer box select the layer to modify 3 If you want to change the table structure tap the Setup Fields button and modify and delete fields as required 4 Tap OK to save the modifications Due to the limited computing power of PPC devices it is recommended to only modify tables no more than couple of Mega Bytes MB If a large table is modified it may complete within a couple of minutes so you will need to be patient Packing Tables When records or objects are deleted from a MapInfo Professional Table the deleted records remain as unpacked or deleted records This will cause an apparent mismatch between the map objects and browser records Unpa
167. e g you always get thousands separators Searches the string str1 starting at character position num and looks for an occurrence of the string str2 Returns the position where str2 was found or zero if not found To start search at beginning use a num value of one 1 Returns a lowercase version of the string str 9 Working with Tables 195 String Function Left str num Len str Trim str Mid str num1 num2 Proper str Right str num Trim str Str expert Ukase str Val str Geographical Functions Area obj str CentroidX obj Centroid Y obj Distance num_x num_y num_x2 num_y2 str Description Continued Returns the first num characters of the string str Returns the number of characters in a string Trims any spaces from the start of str and returns result Returns a portion of the string str starting at character position num1 and extending for num2 characters Returns a string with proper capitalisation first letter of each word capitalised Returns the last num characters of the string str Trims any spaces from the end of str and returns result Returns a string approximation of an expression Returns an uppercase all capitalised version of str Returns the numeric value of the string for example Val 18 returns the number 18 Description Returns the area of the object The str parameter specifies an area unit name such as s
168. e projection If the native projection of any of these tables is different to the map window projection then Discover Mobile will dynamically convert the map objects on the fly so they are displayed in their correct relative position on the map The only exception to this behaviour occurs with raster tables If a raster table is opened in Discover Mobile the map window projection will automatically change to the native projection of the raster table even it there are already vector tables open in the window Any open vector tables which have a different native projection to the raster table will be dynamically reprojected on the fly so that the map objects are displayed in the correct position relative to the raster image Although dynamic re projection can be a very powerful feature it can also have adverse effects on map redraw performance on PPC devices Dynamic map re projection requires considerable system resources to perform the necessary projection calculations for each map object and can therefore slow down the redraw performance of the map window by as much as 70 If you experience slow map redraw performance then check your data to make sure that the native projection of all your data tables are the same Refer to Chapter 3 Desktop Data Preparation for Discover Mobile for more information on improving map redraw performance Dynamic re projection of map objects from one projection to another requires considerable system resource
169. e set value This setting is useful to prevent the map view from rotating when you are standing still or travelling slowly The default value is 2 km hour Auto Centre View Set the GO gt Preferences gt Re Center GPS setting to Always to keep the current location centred in the map window If this option is set to Never you can also manually recentre the view by choosing GO gt GPS gt Center Map on GPS If you wish to quickly re center the map on the GPS navigate to the Auto Rotate Map button and select the option Center Map on GPS Map Grid You can display a dynamic map grid over the contents of the map window The map grid is displayed in the native projection of the current map window and is always positioned as the top most layer in the map The grid interval is determined automatically by Discover Mobile to provide best grid spacing for the current zoom level and will be dynamically updated as you zoom in out or pan around the map 7 Controlling Layers and the View 147 DiscoverMobile e 4e 4 05 X ay K te preva a4 aeni Fico re aaeh Ol fale ae X co RIL Oo Discover Mobile map window showing the dynamic map grid displayed over a geology map To show and hide the map grid 1 Choose GO gt View gt Vap Grid and turn on or off the map grid display Grid Format You can set preferences for the number of grid lines which are displayed on the map the size and colour of the grid labels and the style width
170. e the search Column 4 In the Find box type in a keyword to search for in the selected column The keyword needs to match exactly in case and spelling with the word in the search column 5 Tap the Find button to start the search When items are found and the search is successfully completed the number of found items is displayed in a message box The items are also shown in a preview window with the found objects highlighted 6 Pan and zoom the sub window to view the found objects 7 Tap the Info button and tap on an object to display attribute information for the selected records sE DiscoverMobile en 4c 2 54 lok The attribute items of a layer displayed in the Info tool 10 Working with Objects 199 10 Note Working with Objects In this section Creating Objects Field Data Entry and Editing Selecting Objects Editing Objects Formatting Objects Named Styles Range Styles Labels and Annotation Hotlinking Files to Map Objects Creating Objects Before creating objects open and select the layer in which you want the object stored see Controlling Layers and the View The attributes of the object are determined by the structure of the layer table in which it is created see Adding Tables Maps and Fields Setting Object Creation Preferences Creating Drawing Objects Creating GPS located Objects Fields cannot be added to existing tables and hence objects
171. ect Data Entry gt Picklist Manager to open the Picklist Manager Under Picklists click the Configure button and select the Import picklist option The Import Picklist dialog is displayed 348 Discover Mobile User Guide Import picklist style from external file File Types Colour Map TAB GeoStyles TAB Legend LEG MapInfo Professional TAB Mobile Picklist TXT Mobile Style TXT Thematic Map Layer ice Ei i 3 Choose a File Type and click OK Colour Map Imports a colourmap created in ColourMap tool which the Apply Picklist tool has superseded GeoStyles Imports files from the Styles Library tool which the Picklist Manager has superseded Legend Import legend files from the Drillholes gt Legend Editor tool MapInfo Professional Import patterns and textural information from a MapInfo Professional TAB file Mobile Picklist Import Discover Mobile picklist Mobile Style Import Discover Mobile named style Thematic Map Layer Import patterns and textural information from a MapInfo Professional Thematic Map layer 4 Select the details for each file type as appropriate See instructions for each file type below Appendix D Digitizing and Data Entry in Discover 349 5 The imported file is displayed as a standard picklist in the Picklist Manager dialog 6 Use the other controls in the Picklist Manager dialog box below the Styles box to delete r
172. ect and the label no line simple or arrowed Display within range Show labels only within a specified zoom range 6 Using the GO Menu 113 Style Label text style font size boldness italic colour etc Allow overlapped Allow labels to overlap Allow duplicates Allow duplicated labels Label partial objects Label objects that are only partially displayed Orientation The orientation of the label around the object Maximum labels Restrict the number of labels to be drawn Rotate label with line Rotate the label with the call out line Label offset Offset the position of the label in pts Zoom Level GO gt View gt Zoom Level Set a precise zoom level or map scale for the map window Width Set the display distance measured in metres for the screen width Select from the preset values or type a value in the box Scale Set map window scale Select from the preset values or type a value in the box 114 Discover Mobile User Guide Note View Entire Layer GO gt View gt View Entire Layer Show the full extents of a selected layer or all layers Map Rotation GO gt View gt Map Rotation Rotate the map view Adjust the slider bar or type a value into the rotation box To return the map view to default north up drag the slider back to zero degrees or type 0 zero in the rotation value box Map rotation is not available if there are any raster image layers in the display list even wh
173. ect another table To change the insertion layer 1 Choose GO gt Map gt Set Insertion Layer The current insertion layer is highlighted 140 Discover Mobile User Guide Note 2 From the list of displayed layers select the required layer 3 If you want to store all data types on the same layer e g the geology table select the Set as Default Layer option Otherwise the selected table will only remain as the insertion layer for as long as the current drawing object type is selected 4 Press OK DiscoverMobile en 45 3 15 ok Choose layer to insert new objects into Copper_Hill_Soils Insertion dialog used to specify a layer for editing To add objects to a different layer reopen the Insertion Layer dialog and select a different layer from the list When a layer is selected as the insertion layer it is automatically made editable and the Draw Edit tools are made available Assigning GPS Capture Layers A default capture table needs to be specified for each GPS object type point polyline and polygon This can simplify field data capture removing the need to respecify the capture table for each new data type For example all polygonal objects captured by the GPS can be assigned to a geological mapping polygon table whilst point data can be assigned to a soil sample table If a number of tables are being used to enter objects into choose the Prompt for Layer Name option to ena
174. ed in the field for example enabling the user to conduct real time infill or verification sampling in response to anomalous results or trends To apply a range style first select the target numeric XRF element field in the Style by Field drop down list Then select the desired Range Style library from the Style drop down list and press OK Range Styles created as Percentile ranges cannot be auto applied to XRF data Percentile based range styles will not be displayed in the list Appendix C Working with Portable XRF Devices 335 7 DiscoverMobile Yy 4 3 06 ok Select a Layer chall_soils_june10 v Style by Field icu_ppm Style Challenger XRF Style styles v Cancel Custom Fields XRF batch files contain an extensive range of preset XRF element and error fields as well as various ancillary fields all of which are auto populated by the XRF data stream when a measurement is taken The user can additionally add Custom Fields to these batch tables for attribution with information like geology regolith soil type colour etc 5 Select Yes in the next dialog to add Custom fields selecting No will complete the batch file creation 336 Discover Mobile User Guide VS DiscoverMobile Yy 11 06 Select or Enter Sample Batch 567 v DiscoverMobile Do you want to add custom VY fields 6 Use the Add button to add a custom field See Defining Field Properties
175. ed on a copy of a MapInfo Professional table on a single Discover Mobile device to be updated into the un changed original copy residing on a local disk The advantage of this tool over a file overwrite is it allows a user to select only certain modifications and preview any changes before the original table is updated with the changes The most useful application of this tool is for when a table is modified on a Discover Mobile device in a number of periods After each period the user can retrieve and analyse a summary of the updates performed on the table and select which one to accept For example a user can prevent any records that had been deleted from being lost in the original table It is important that the assumptions of the tool are followed including Original Output Table had a field called Modified of Boolean type Original Output Table had a field called ID of Integer type e The ID field was populated sequentially with the row number with no gaps Original Output table has been unchanged during the period it was used on the device Only a single copy of the table has been modified The copy of the table has not been packed e g Do not Save a second copy of the mobile copy The copy of the table has only been modified within Discover Mobile The structure of either table has not changed 3 Data Preparation 43 Input Table Select the table from the mobile device downloaded prev
176. eed Fix Dilution Number of Satellites etc DiscoverMobile en 45 2 40 K RH amp 8 Qe Of AP ik x a w e OG Floating Status Window displayed The display and contents of the Status window can be customized To hide and show the Status window Tap the Status Window tool on the Main toolbar or choose GO gt View gt Status Window To change the window size and font You can adjust the size of the Status window by dragging the red box in the lower right corner Discover Mobile will remember the size and position of the window when you next activate the Status Window You can also adjust the display size of the text in the Status Window with the Font Size setting under the GO gt Preferences gt System Settings command 152 Discover Mobile User Guide To change the information displayed in the Status window 1 Hold the stylus over the Status window until the the Setup dialog is displayed 2 Check or clear a check box to add or remove that item from the Status Window DiscoverMobile er 11 12 ok Screen Width 0 0 m O Insertion Layer M GPS Map Coordinates Map X 0 Map Y 0 H GPS Recommended Min Data RM Lat 0 0 Long 0 0 Date 30 12 1899 M Time 0 0 0 am C Full Time 12 00 00 AM Speed 0 0 km h O course 0 0 deg M warning True C Maa Variation 0 0E Some of the Setup options displayed from the Status Window 2 You can also tap GPS Display Settings button on the GPS to
177. eeeeeaee cece eeeeaeeseceeeeeeeaeesseaeeeseaeeeeeas 144 VIOW EXt6NtS oneri rE E EE 144 Pan and Center cccccccccceceeeeceeeeeeeceaeeseeeeeesaaeeeceeeeseaeeseeeeeessaeeeeaes 144 ROO d viet vistors A S 144 Auto Rotate and Auto Centre cccecccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseeaees 145 Map Grid i un raa raa aa na aana a aa EEan eaa 146 GPS OQVEMAY a ra e a raaa aaa aa a EERS 149 o Bal EA E EEN 149 Save and Restore VieW cccccccseeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaeeesenaeeeseneees 150 Display View SettingS ccccesssceseseeeeeeeeeeesceeeeeeeeeseaaaeseeaseeeaaaeseeeeaeees 150 Working with Maps ccccceseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseeseeeneeseseeseeeeseeneseeenenes 153 Thematic Mapping ecesanta a ies 153 Creating a TNEMGC cccccceescceeseeeeeeeneeeeeaaeeeeaeeeesaeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeees 154 Theme Type civics nisen aie ANETE biedly 155 Ranged Thematic Maps sseeesessesessseesrrssrsrrnnsrrrrrsnsrrrnsssreenns 155 Bar Chart Thematic Maps ccecccececeeeeeeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeeseeeeseneees 156 Pie Thematic Maps enori eae ieena aAA ie 157 Graduated Symbol Thematic Maps cccccceeeeeseeeeesteeeeeees 158 Dot Density Thematic MapsS cccceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenteeeeeeteas 158 Individual Value Thematic Maps ccccscceeeeetteeeeeeenteeeeeeees 159 Thematic Legend eeecccceeeesccceceteeeecceeeseseeceeeeeesseeeeeeeeneeaeeeneneneaees 159 Modifying Themes ec
178. een a AAEE E AAEE EE ATARAR PAEA EASRA EAO TEAS 127 Open Table nnii a iil anti a a ea A 131 Glose Fablenn tise eerteiss tee tedden ated bea a aaa e daade 131 Close All Tables 2eiscesevcciicst ented Roses acetone ih havea ele caen 131 vi Discover Mobile User Guide Save Table Copy AS v ci cs 0 8 cece iiviee deen civeee ai id 132 CEREO EE E E E E E EE 133 Edit Table Structure cccccccccseeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeneeeseaeeeeaeeenaas 133 Pack TADE as e E OEA AA TEAR E cae 134 Controlling Layers and the View cccssccsseeessseeeseeeeeeeeeessseeeeneees 135 About Layers i Aaien a a E a leutieeenbil eae 135 Managing Layers seguir arame a A a EEA 136 Layer and Object Visibility c ccecceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeseaaeeneeees 138 Managing Objects in Layers ccccccseeeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseeeeseeeeeeeneees 139 Setting the Insertion Layer ccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeee 139 Assigning GPS Capture LayerS c ccccecceeeeeeeseceeteeeeeseeaeeneneees 140 Adding a Cosmetic Layer c ccccsccecececeseeeeeceeeeeeseeesneeeeeseeeeeeaees 141 Labelling Objects ceceeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeeeneeseeaeeeenaeeeeeas 142 View CONOS enheten a annaa aa ae araea Taa eaae Anaan enS 143 ZOOM ANC Scale irnia e a aaa A a A Ea aTa 143 Set Zoom Width and Scale ccccceccceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessaeeesees 143 Zoom IN and OUt eee eeeeceeceee
179. ees cate besa ghieaeteneata tas 200 Named Styles iiiaae aana in dea alten ee 200 Pont AY EMI oa eaaa EET EEE ATS 200 Creating Drawing Objects cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeneeeseaeeeteneees 200 Creating Points and SyMbols ccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeetees 201 Creating Lines and Polygons ccccccessceceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseneeeeees 202 viii Discover Mobile User Guide Creating Structure Objects c cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceeeenaeeeeaas 203 Creating GPS located Objects ccccceeececeeeceeseeeeeeeeneeeseteeeeneeeens 205 Capturing POIN Saers ainurin aiaa ein aieiai aiaa 208 Gapturing LINES ieies enai daoiae daadaa A inaia aaa 209 Capturing R QiIONS is aii iniiai ii iiaia 210 Capturing Elevation Data ccccccccseceeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeas 211 Capturing Structure Objects cccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeees 212 Field Data Entry and Editing soararn painei eii 213 Populating Fields sveisarar a a a a 214 Select Value from Pick LiSt ccceccsesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeenaeeeeaes 214 Automatically Populate with User Defined Data 06 214 Automatically Populate with GPS Datta ccsscceesssseeeeeeees 214 Auto prompt for Structural Data c cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 215 Ad HOC Vallas sci attached atic niceties 215 Selecting Objects niiina aiaa eae tide aa 215 Using the Selection Tools c cccsc
180. en all the correct Named Styles have been defined browse to the correct Output Style Library directory and click Save Range Style Editor The Range Style Editor allows the creation and editing of Range Styles for Discover Mobile from the desktop interface This functionality is similar to the Point Classification tool in Discover s Geochem module Range Styles allows the user to auto classify the XRF data points in real time or apply the point style permanently to any point data table opened in Discover Mobile For example you could collect a series of data point measurements and as an alternative to thematically mapping them you could apply a pre created Range Style for custom From To ranges of the data This is applied and saved in the table 34 Discover Mobile User Guide LPRs0 100 Create new or modify existing Ranged Styles for Discover Mobile Input File Click to add new entry e Ranged Style C Discover Mobile Encom_DM_Namestyles NewRangeStyle style ial Range Style Editor Create Range Style Range Styles can be created from one of two methods from an existing range style library or from a blank template To create a series of range styles type the lower bound into the gt column and the upper bound for the range into the lt column The values can either be absolute numbers Alternatively select the Value ranges in percentile option and the
181. en the raster image is not visible in the map window Map Grid GO gt View gt Map Grid Show and hide the map grid The map grid is displayed in the native projection of the current map window and is always positioned as the top most layer in the map The grid interval is determined automatically by Discover Mobile to provide best grid spacing for the current zoom level and will be dynamically updated as you zoom in out or pan around the map GPS Overlay GO gt View gt GPS Overlay Show and hide the Satellite Strength Plot information in the bottom left hand corner of the map window Scale Bar GO gt View gt Scale Bar Show and hide a dynamic scale bar on the map window Like the map grid the scale bar is automatically updated to the most appropriate distance interval as you zoom in and out of the map window 6 Using the GO Menu 115 The scale bar is always displayed as the top most layer in the map window and its position is fixed in the lower right corner of the screen Show Toolbars GO gt View gt Select Toolbar GO gt View gt Drawing Toolbar GO gt View gt GPS Toolbar Use these commands to hide and show the Discover Mobile toolbars You can also hide and show toolbars from the Main toolbar see Main Toolbar Status Window GO gt View gt Status Window Displays a floating Status window which displays information about the view and GPS data You can customize the Status window from the Setup dialog To open the Setup
182. ename edit and order styles in the picklist 7 Click the Save button Colour Map Picklist Name Colourmap Picklist Description Point Objects Line Objects Polygon Objects 350 Discover Mobile User Guide On the Import ColourMap Styles dialog select a ColourMap from the Table dropdown If the ColourMap table isn t open in MapInfo Professional navigate to the table using the Open Table button Select a field from the ColourMap which contains the style description from the Field dropdown The fields include MapCode Desc1 Desc2 and Desc3 Edit the Picklist Name if required Type a Picklist Description if required Select the Picklist Type Point Objects Line Objects or Polygon Objects Click OK to import the picklist GeoStyles On the Open dialog navigate to the location of the GeoStyles table and click Open Legend Picklist Name Australian Surface Geology Codes Picklist Description Australian Surface Geology Code 15 11 2013 Lithology_NT_GeolCode leg 23 10 2013 Sample Au Legend leg 7 10 2013 Sample Geology Legend leg 20 06 2013 m gt On the Import Legend File dialog select the Legend File to import Edit the Picklist Name if required Type a Picklist Description if required Click OK to import the picklist Appendix D Digitizing and Data Entry in Discover 351 MapInfo Professional Insc vagino Tanie sye sali Available Tables Table lsa_Geol
183. eneeeseeseeeenes 251 Connecting tothe GPS esiet ainan aiaee ea aeae aar aana Taa 251 Connecting to an NMEA GPS ReC6iVel ccceeceeeeeseeeteeteeeeeeeees 252 Troubleshooting an NMEA GPS Connection ccceccsseeeeeeeenees 253 Connecting to a Trimble ReC IVET ccccceceeeececeeeeeeeeeteteeeteneees 258 Connection Hardware sis frisismen ranana aeaiee ateek ta taraia ainiai 259 Displaying the Current POSitiOn ccccseeececeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeseeeseneees 260 Monitoring Satellite Status ececceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeseeeeeeaees 262 Navigating to a KNOWN POINK eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 263 Tracking vour Rath morrei ienr N PETE T AER ETA 266 GPS Point LOG kipenen ia paaa aa apai iEn 266 GPS Line Loga tie Baden tte tied 268 Working with Differential GPS DGPS eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 269 Configuring Discover Mobile for DGPS Wotk ccecceeesteeeeteeeeees 270 Field Data Collection ccecccecceceeceeeeeececeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeeee 273 Data Storage ivi etiaiis tibiae snide abe atie nite aed 273 GPS COnme ction r eee ceeeeeceeeseeeceeceeeeaeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeesneaeeeeeeaeeees 273 Carrier Phase LOgQing isei eisieu niasa tiria enai aak anias 276 POStPlOCSSSING Senier na aE e A E AR 278 Correct Rover SSF Fil cccccsceceeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeneeesaas 279 Export Corrected Rover fil
184. ent Fold Verge Right 71 152 N N N Shear Zone 32 105 Shear Zone Wide 33 106 S S Sinistral Fault Wrench 43 99 Jr J Jr Syncline F1 23 90 gt k Syncline F1 Horizontal 23 91 ate ok ale Syncline F2 24 92 he whe oh Syncline F2 Horizontal 24 93 woke ake abe Syncline F3 25 94 ote ote ote Syncline F3 Horizontal 25 95 whe ol ol Syncline Overturned 26 96 oF Ess Syncline Recumbent 27 97 gt eng Thrust Fault 31 104 aaa aoe ass Appendix B Structural Symbols 309 Name Trend Line Undulating Bedding Dip Vein Dyke No Dip Vein Dyke With Dip Vein Sill No Dip Vein Sill With Dip Younging Discover Code 35 47 37 37 38 38 ASCII Australia Code 108 133 110 7 112 ane 111 113 i 132 4h Canada USA Appendix C Working with Portable XRF Devices 311 Working with Portable XRF Devices Discover Mobile provides the ability to link directly to both Olympus Innov X and Niton field portable XRF X Ray Fluorescence devices allowing real time field geochemical analysis to be captured displayed and analyzed directly in your mobile GIS environment This section details the steps required to enable Discover Mobile to connect to and capture portable XRF data Setting Up the Bluetooth Connection to an XRF Device Connecting to the GPS Receiver Connecting and Configuring Discover Mobile and the XRF device Capturing XRF Data Photo courtesy of Olympus Innov X
185. er Window will never re centre even when the Current GPS Position moves outside the map display n Border Window will re centre when the Current GPS Position is within a n border of the map window The default setting is 5 Altitude in This option allows you to specify the preferred units of measure for displaying GPS altitude in the Status window The available options are metres or feet Speed in This option allows you to specify the preferred units of measure for displaying GPS altitude in the Status window The available options are metres per second m s kilometres per hour km h miles per hour mph and knots kt Default Scale 1 A default scale for the map view can be assigned for when a GPS connection is established and no data tables are open between 1 1000 and 1 10000 If data is open in the map window when a GPS connection is established the current view scale will be preserved and the default scale will be ignored GPS Position Style A default symbol style for the current GPS location point can be defined This is the same as defining it under GO gt GPS gt Default Styles gt Current Position Style 6 Using the GO Menu 81 Map Rotation GO gt Preferences gt GPS gt Map Rotation Discover Mobile provides a display option to automatically rotate the map window contents so that the top of the screen is always in the direction of travel as defined by the GPS The Auto Rotate function only works wit
186. er Mobile User Guide peta l amp we E14 AR Y l Select View Toolbar Point Selection Select a single object or item Radius selection Selects objects within a controllable radius Rectangular Selects objects within a rectangular area selection Polygonal Select objects within an polygonal area selection Zoom In Zooms in on current view by a factor of 2x Zoom Out Zooms out on current view by a factor of 1 2x Previous Zoom Restores previous view history Other functions available via the Previous Zoom tool Save View Saves the current view properties Delete Deletes a saved view from the display list View Zoom Level Adjust map zoom level by Screen Width or Map Scale View Entire Layer Redraws the map to show full extents for a layer Pan Move the view around the map display area Center Centers the view where the stylus is tapped Distance Measures the distance along a freehand polyline Measurement Appendix A Discover Mobile Quick Reference Guide 291 cB fale Ble Polyline Measurement Information Hotlink Delete Measures the straight line distance between points in a polyline Displays attribute information for an object Open hotlinked image from target map object Deletes all selected objects Draw Edit Toolbar Symbol Structure Symbol Line Polyline Freehand Polyline Polygon Freehand Polygon Add Label Add Annotation Vertex Edit Add Vertex Used to place
187. er Mobile can also record the required attribute information for the point Alternatively you can add the structure symbol to an existing layer however attribute information will only be recorded if the appropriate fields exist in the table When you are ready to capture a structural object tap the GPS Structure Symbol button once You will then be presented with the structure symbol dialog enabling you to assign the appropriate symbol type and orientation measurements When complete the appropriate symbol will be placed on the map at the current GPS location The preferred method for recording structural symbols can be modified by tapping on the Setup button on the dialog For more information see Capturing Structure Objects 10 Working with Objects 207 gt GPS Insert Node button is used to add a new node to the current GPS polyline or polygon while the pause button is active To use tap the Insert Node button when you wish to add a node to your line You can return to continuous node logging mode at any time by turning off the Pause button GPS Polyline Capture button will capture a continuous polyline to a chosen table using the GPS position coordinates To use this function first create a layer containing default columns for all GPS attribute information you which to capture as well as any additional custom fields you wish to populate Alternatively you can add the new polyline to an existing layer When you are read
188. ern Hemisphere WGS 84 UTM Zone 58 Northern Hemisphere WGS 84 Select the projection Category and then the Category Member When creating new tables in Discover Mobile it is strongly recommended to use the same map projection for all tables Although Discover Mobile can dynamically transform map objects from one projection to another on the fly this process is very resource intensive and can significantly increase the time taken to redraw the map window If you wish to capture data from a GPS it is recommended that you set the native map projection for the table to be Latitude Longitude WGS84 You will then be able to capture new objects in their native projection raw GPS position information references the WGS 84 ellipsoid These objects can then be converted into any other map projection using MapInfo s File gt Save Copy As command 6 Using the GO Menu 131 Note Note Set Bounds The Set Bounds button is used primarily when a non earth projection is selected The Easting and Northing table bounds can be set using this option Clone From When creating new tables it is often convenient to use the structure and projection of an existing table as a template particularly if you wish to add several new fields to an existing table To use an existing table as a template tap the Clone File button Discover Mobile will then prompt you to choose any one of the open tables as a template for the new table Discover Mobile will then
189. es in the table browser If the selected item does not have any associated attribute information blank data fields will be displayed If more than one table has an object at the selected point use the drop down list to select the table of interest Use the Hotlink button to open a hotlink image from the target map object If a Maplnfo table contains multiple hotlink fields only the first one will be displayed The Hotlink button streamlines the display of images taken from your in built PPC camera Delete button deletes any selected object s from an editable layer see Managing Layers 62 Discover Mobile User Guide Draw Edit Toolbar ale OF a Oe gt B Use the Draw Edit toolbar to Place a symbol Draw a straight line Draw a polyline or freehand polyline Draw a polygon or a freehand polygon Add labels or annotations to selected objects Edit or add object vertices Modify object styles including symbol style line style or fill patterns of selected objects Objects can be modified on any layer which is set as Editable see Managing Layers Unlike MapInfo Professional Discover Mobile allows simultaneous editing of multiple layers If a layer is open and editable then any objects in that layer can be moved repositioned resized or deleted Different line styles or polygon fills can also be applied New objects can only be added to one layer i e table at a time You can seta layer t
190. es by enabling the Percentile option at the bottom of the dialog 242 Discover Mobile User Guide Note gl Ranged Styles created as Percentile ranges cannot be auto applied to XRF data Percentile based ranged styles will not be displayed in the list of available styles displayed in GO gt XRF gt Connect 7 Tap OK to finish creating the library Editing a Range Style Library 1 Select the Go gt Edit gt Range Styles menu option 2 From the pull down list at the top right select the library to edit 3 Add or Delete ranges as necessary or edit existing range values and styles 4 Press OK to finish editing the library Creating a Range Style Library on the Desktop The Range Style Editor installed with Discover Mobile s desktop tools is an easier way of creating Range Style libraries See the Range Style Editor for more information Labels and Annotation Adding Labels and Annotation Removing Labels and Annotations Adding Labels and Annotation The Add Label button places automatic labels from a selected column in the browser for selected objects The labels are placed in a special layer called the Annotation Layer The source of the labels and their display properties can be modified using the Layer Control dialog The labels are placed in the Annotation Layer and cannot be permanently saved To remove annotations labels from the map use the Clear Custom Labels popup menu on the Add Label button
191. es directory in the current project directory Range Styles will also be stored and loaded in this directory Hotlink Files You can specify a preferred directory in which to save your Hotlink files By default Discover Mobile will store the Hotlink files inthe Encom DM Hotlinks directory in the current project directory Keeping all the hotlink files together in a hotlink directory will also help maintain the links when the files are copied back to the desktop computer New Tables The File gt New Table or Save Copy As commands will automatically create new tables in the location specified by this option By default this is in the current project directory Image Files You can specify a preferred directory where the in built PPC camera saves images This directory is used by Discover Mobile when linking PPC camera images to a map object 90 Discover Mobile User Guide Tools Menu GO gt Tools Select Zoom In Zoom Out Center Info View Image Cursor Pos Add Point Add Structure Symbol Add Node Add Line Add Polyline freehand Add Polygon freehand Add Polygon Add Polyline Add Label Tools menu The Tools menu item is divided into two groups The upper group controls the tools that are available on the Main and View toolbars Items in the second group relate to tools on the Draw Edit toolbar These menu options all replicate buttons available on the relevant toolbars e Select Zoom In e Zoo
192. eseeeeeeeeeeteteeteneees 2 Pocket PC to Desktop PC Communication Requirements 2 Desktop Post processing Software Requirement cc cceeeeee 3 Installing Discover MODiIC ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeenaeeeeeneeaaes 3 Software Installation ccccceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeesaaeeseeeeesenaeetees 3 Reinstalling Discover Mobile on the PPC c cccceeeeeeeeeeessteeeeeeeees 4 Licensing Discover MODiIle cceeeeeseceeeeenneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaes 5 Reactivating the LICENCE eee ceeceeeeennneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneaaees 8 Transferring Data Between DeVICES eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeneenaeees 8 PC Synchronisation cic s cctv g candi ine aedini ii 9 Microsoft ActiveSynC eesseeessseeseeesirsesrrrsrrsrtnternntrrnesrnessrnssrnnsn 9 Windows Mobile Device Center ssesssseesseeeseeeriessirnesrrrserrserne 9 Getting Hep aeaa a ieai ran raadden doae d aaaea raia eaeh a ia Aa Eai i andaian 10 2 Best Practice with a Portable PC ccssccesscsssesseesseeeseeesseenseesenneees 11 Running Programs and Memory sssesesssssesesrrnesssrrnesrnnnnnesnnnnnnsnnnnnennnnnnne 11 Power and Battery USe ecnin ia E AENT 11 Bluetooth Managot ra rara EAT s eea RAELA TERASSA EEEN 11 Sariga Tae A E E E E A A carer ere rece 11 Extomal Batoras iris irt raa EN A EAEEREN 12 In Vehicle RECNArQING ccccceeeecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
193. essful connection to the GPS receiver in Discover Mobile you do not need to setup the connection again Choose the GO gt GPS gt Connect menu option to reconnect to the GPS receiver and proceed to the next section Connecting and Configuring Discover Mobile and the XRF device Otherwise you will need to setup the connection to an internal or external GPS receiver and select the appropriate GPS Protocol Connecting to an NMEA GPS receiver Connecting to a Trimble GPS receiver 328 Discover Mobile User Guide Connecting to an NMEA GPS receiver To connect Discover Mobile to an NMEA GPS receiver 1 Choose the GO gt Preferences menu option and ensure that the GPS Protocol is set to NMEA Turn on the GPS and check that it is connected correctly to the PPC device e g a Bluetooth connection or serial cable Ensure that no other third party GPS software is running on the PPC Most PPC devices will only allow one software application to access the GPS communication port at a time Choose GO gt Preferences gt Connection gt Setup or GO gt GPS gt Setup Connection to open the GPS setup screen The connection Port for the GPS receiver needs to be set manually as do its various settings Speed Parity Data and Stop The settings are typically provided by the GPS receiver manufacturer in its accompanying documentation Once these settings are set press Start to test the connection After a short period of time up to about
194. essional 1 50 MapX Mobile platform 1 Maximum field width 130 Maximum separation distance 78 Menu system 49 66 67 Microsoft 9 Minimise Discover Mobile 56 Minimum separation distance 77 Mobile Device in Explorer 8 Mobile device 8 Modify object styles 62 Move vertex 63 N National Marine Electronics Association 251 NewField entry 128 169 Niton XRF 311 connecting 312 NMEA 0183 251 protocol 1 Node Edit tool 219 North Up Function 64 Null parity 73 Number entry 58 Number of Satellites 151 Numeric fields 129 O Object Style button 63 64 Olympus Innov X XRF 311 connecting 315 Opacity of rasters 165 Open files button 57 Open tables 125 Operating systems 2 Operator precedence 192 Outline line style 123 224 Index 383 P Q Pan button 144 Queries described 189 Pan mode 58 Query 189 Pan tool 92 columns 97 Pan Center button 60 math functions 193 Parity of connections 73 Query columns 97 Paste files 8 Query functions 98 190 Picking of object 59 215 Query Load button 97 Pie Chart Map 157 Query logical operators 192 Pie Chart theme 102 Query menu 96 Place a symbol 62 200 Query operators 98 190 Pocket PC 1 Query results 97 190 Point selection 59 215 Query gt Clear Selection 98 Point Track Log 64 205 Query gt Find 98 Pointing at objects 50 Query gt Find Selection 99 PolyClip Query gt Select 97 clipping objects at a polygon boundary 17 Query gt Select All 98 Polygon 95 Querying Polygon button 63 203 based on pr
195. expected by Discover Mobile Because Discover Mobile uses a standard set of field names to internally match the data columns in the structure data table with the appropriate information entered in the structure dialog you need to make sure the field names in the structure table are consistent with the default field names listed above If you intend to create a structure table directly in Discover Mobile perform the following steps 4 Tap the GO gt FILE gt New Table menu 2 Type a file name in the name box and select a location for the new table DiscoverMobile e 4c 4 37 lok Create Layer File iscover Mobile Structural tab E Fields Setting a name for a new structural table 3 Tap the Setup Fields button to bring up the setup fields dialog From the Custom Field pull down list select the mandatory structural data fields Map_X Map_y Struct_Strike Struct_Dip Struct_Code You can then add any other additional attribute fields you wish to populate to the table 9 Working with Tables 183 DiscoverMobile en 4c 4 44 ok Name Map_X Float Map_Y Float Struct_Strike Float DiscoverMobile en 4c 4 38 ok Struct_Dip Float Struct_Code Intege 7 E N Struct_DipDir Float fx E k Setting up the fields for a structural table 4 Tap the Projection button to assign an appropriate projection for the table and then tap OK to create the table Customizing the Structure Symbol Picklist Dis
196. ff application any new data points added to the target table will not be modified by the Range Style library until this process is repeated Applying a Range Style Library During XRF Data Capture Range Style libraries can be automatically applied to data points as they are captured using Discover Mobiles XRF connection functionality 1 Connect to the GPS 228 Discover Mobile User Guide 2 Ensure your XRF connection is Setup Go gt XRF gt Setup 3 Connect to the portable XRF Go gt XRF gt Connect and after entering a batch number or selecting an exisitng one specify the Element and Range Style library to apply to it under the XRF Style pull down Tap OK 4 Each XRF data point will now be automatically styled as it s captured ne DiscoverMobile 7 lt 10 39 X KR A QOH if x mee Re o A Range Style library applied to XRF data automatically as field measurements are carried out For more information see Appendix C Connect to the XRF device Named Styles Named styles allows you to create a library of graphical styles which can then be applied when creating objects Additionally Quick Pick options and tables can be assigned to each object style rather than relying on table specific Quick Pick options For example four soil mesh sizes are to be collected into a soil_sampling table Each soil mesh size would be assigned a unique symbol e g different coloured circles and these would all
197. filtered to only display the object type selected in this case points 10 Working with Objects 235 DiscoverMobile er 11 09 ok Regional_sampling tikd DSL into CRC Lag into Soil Rockchip into Lag Soil 20 into Soil Soil 40 into Soil Soil 80 3 Our soil sample has been sampled to the 20 mesh fraction so choose the Soil 20 option and press OK or double tap on the style 4 The Edit Attributes browser will open for the Soil table with all the Quick pick attributes auto filled including the current date Note that an initial SamplelD needs to be entered otherwise the Increment by 1 option set for this filed will begin at 0 To continue an existing number series type 2560 Also the Comments field is a free text field for any additional comments the sampler may wish to make Discover Mobile en 11 17 ok 236 Discover Mobile User Guide Press OK when finished A yellow circle representing the soil sample will have been placed at the position tapped Try capturing a few more soil samples of different mesh sizes and note that they share the same sample number series but that the Mesh attribute changes depending on the initial style selected Now record a rock chip sample the Edit Attributes dialog will now open the CRC browser Note that in addition to the various Quick Pick options assigned and again needing an initial SamplelD the Lithology field h
198. following dialog will be displayed Discover Mobile e 4c 2 59 lok Type L Compact Legend The dialog to specify a theme The dataset specifies the layer to be used for the theme The various fields columns of the dataset are shown in the list box The type of theme is defined by the Theme Type pick list The Theme Type determines the method of distributing the values within the nominated data field 8 Working with Maps 155 DiscoverMobile e 23 00 ok Dataset Copper_Hill_Regional_Geo Theme Field eane Mapcode Pie Chart Group Graduated Symbol Name Dot Density Individual Value Available theme Types Depending on the theme Type selected one or more layers may be selectable from the available list Theme types that involve comparison of data field values allow multiple data field selection eg pie and bar charts Theme Type Ranged Thematic Maps Bar Chart Thematic Maps Pie Thematic Maps Graduated Symbol Thematic Maps Dot Density Thematic Maps Individual Value Thematic Maps Ranged Thematic Maps A Ranged Thematic Map displays table data according to ranges you specify The ranges are shaded with colours and or patterns Ranged thematic maps allow you to illustrate data values across points lines and regions They are used to show a relationship between the data values and geographical area e g assay figures geochemical sampling results or to present rati
199. form an XRF analysis Refer to the XRF device User Guide for detailed information including safety aspects 3 When the XRF has finished running the analysis the final result will be displayed on the XRF device screen and a Bluetooth Stream will be sent to Discover Mobile a few seconds later Record the GPS Location A message is displayed by Discover Mobile when the Bluetooth streamed result is received from the XRF device Hold the PPC or DGPS antenna over the sample location to accurately record the location of the sample and then tap OK Dialog E Yy 4E 1 41 Dialog Test data received from Niton Confirm location for GPS position 0 m 1000 2000 m mee E oc An alert sound can be enabled to indicate when the XRF Data is Received under Go gt Preferences gt System Settings gt Alert Configurations Appendix C Working with Portable XRF Devices 339 7 Alert Option a Yy d 1 44 ok Setup alert sounds or warning messages using the following options Alert Name Action Wav GPS Outside Tolerance Max Sound fel GPS Outside Tolerance Min None v eal GPS Bad Position Fix Both A GPS Interval Reduced Sound Eel GPS Interval Increased Sound v fel No New Position Messag 7 m Trimble Not Ready Sound E M Enough Points to Save Feature None XRF Data Received Sound KI E Review XRF Data and Record Comments and Observations The streamed XRF data popu
200. fter any characters e g if the initial string value is CHRC following entires will be CHRC1 CHRC2 etc If the string value already incorporates a numeric suffix this suffix will be incremented e g FAN345 FAN346 etc Decrement by decrements the current numeric value by any user specified value The decrement value must be entered in the Value column default of 1 This function will work for both numeric and character string data fields see the Increment by option above for further information Object Area updates the attribute field with the Area value of the current object if it can be computed The Object Area function can only be used with closed polygon objects Object Perimeter updates the attribute field with the Perimeter of the current object if the perimeter value can be computed The Perimeter function can only be used with closed polygon objects Object Length updates the attribute field with the Length value of the current object if it can be computed The Length function can only be used with line or polyline objects e Object X updates the attribute field with the Centroid X value of the current object The Object X function can be computed for all object types e Object Y updates the attribute field with the Centroid Y value of the current object The Object Y function can be computed for all object types Object Rotation updates the attribute field with the Rotat
201. ftware Data Formats Map Window Saving and Restoring Your Workspace Starting Discover Mobile Start your Pocket PC device and check that you have sufficient battery power for your intended session It is important that the battery has sufficient charge as most devices which connect to the PPC such as GPS receivers can significantly reduce the operating time of the onboard battery If you intend to use your PPC with an integrated GPS receiver you are strongly advised to carry or use an external or backup battery This will help extend the effective operating time of the device and minimise the possibility of any data loss To start Discover Mobile Tap the Start menu and then the Discover Mobile menu item If the Discover Mobile menu is not shown on the Start menu then J e Tap the Programs menu and tap the Discover Mobile icon 48 Discover Mobile User Guide Note Ly start PEE 8 Today 10 34 AM tp Calendar a Discover Mobile u File Explorer Z Intemet Explorer Wner in Messaging PES SatViewer cerdisp BackCounc Battery Calculator g MyMobiler Logger 3 Discover Mobile F Pictures amp Videos I Programs cerdisp Contacts A Settings Mobile Help 2a m Messenger MyMobiler Notes ActiveSync 3 Select the Start gt Discover Mobile menu item or the Start gt Programs gt Discover Mobile icon If the Discover Mobile icon is not visible among the inst
202. g Default Styles for New Drawing Objects Range Styles GO gt Edit gt Range Styles The symbol style of numeric point data can be permanently altered with a Range Style library This functionality is similar to the Point Classification tool in the Discover Geochem module A Range Style library consists of a series of user defined numeric ranges each with an assigned symbol style These libraries can be created within Discover Mobile with the Go gt Edit gt Range Styles option see Range Styles for more information or recommended via the Discover Mobile desktop Range Style Editor Apply Range Style GO gt Edit gt Apply Range Styles Apply a Range Style library to a numeric field of a selected table This is a one off permanent style change see Range Styles for more information Range Styles can also be automatically applied as XRF data is captured see Appendix C Applying Range Styles for more information File Menu GO gt File The File menu item is used to open and restore recently accessed files create and open tables close individual or all open tables 126 Discover Mobile User Guide make copies of a table save a map session Geoset describing all opened tables and their display characteristics Discover Mobile e 4c 2 16 X Recent Files New Table Open Table Close Table Close All Tables Save Table Copy As Save Geoset Edit Table Structure Pack Table
203. g to a Known Point Tracking Your Path For information on setting up a DGPS connection and how to correct DGPS data see Working with Differential GPS DGPS For information on controlling the view with the GPS see Auto Rotate and Auto Centre For information on capturing GPS located objects see Creating GPS located Objects Connecting to the GPS Connecting to an NMEA GPS Receiver Troubleshooting an NMEA GPS Connection Connecting to a Trimble Receiver Connection Hardware 252 Discover Mobile User Guide Connecting to an NMEA GPS Receiver The basic process to connect Discover Mobile to a GPS for the first time is as follows 1 Under the GO gt Preferences menu option ensure that the GPS Protocol is set to NMEA If necessary turn on the GPS and check that it is connected correctly to the PPC device via the appropriate cables or connections e g a Bluetooth or serial port connection See Connection Hardware for further information Ensure that no other third party GPS software is running on the PPC most PPC devices will only allow one software application to access the GPS communication port at a time From GO gt Preferences gt Connection gt Setup or GO gt GPS gt Setup Connection open the GPS setup screen The connection port for the GPS receiver needs to be set manually as do the port settings Speed Parity Data and Stop The settings are typically provided by the manufacturer of
204. g to allow you to choose which table to apply the Select All query to After a Select All command is given all the objects in the selected layer will be highlighted and the items placed in the Selection table Clear Selection GO gt Query gt Clear Selection The Selection table can be populated from a query or a Select All menu command as described above If you wish to unselect the various items in the Selection table use this option G O gt Query gt Clear Selection Find GO gt Query gt Find The Find menu item allows a fast method of interrogating data and viewing the selection results With the Find dialog you can specify the target Layer and search for a keyword in the selected column The keyword needs to match exactly in case and spelling with the word in the search column 6 Using the GO Menu 99 When items are found and the search is successfully completed the number of found items is displayed in a message box The items are also shown in a preview window with the found objects highlighted You can then view and interrogate the objects found by the search Find Selection GO gt Query gt Find Selection Occasionally a query may be run and although the query successfully found one or more items it may not be obvious where they are in the map window due to the map zoom level In these circumstances the Find Selection command centres the display to indicate the location of the items in the Selection table Bro
205. g tools require you to first select the object before choosing the tool see Selecting Objects If the tool you need is not displayed on the toolbar tap the arrow button next to the current tool and change the mode Move an Object Edit and Delete Nodes Add Nodes Edit Attributes Edit Coordinates Edit Object Style Delete Objects 10 Working with Objects 219 k Move an Object Tap the Point Select tool on the Se ect View Toolbar If the Point tool is not active tap the arrow button to change the selection mode or choose GO gt Edit gt Edit Mode gt Feature Edit Mode When you select the object handles appear which you can drag to another location Edit and Delete Nodes Select the polygon or polyline and then tap the Vertex Edit tool on the Draw Edit Toolbar or choose GO gt Edit gt Edit Mode gt Node Edit Mode The polygon or polyline vertices are then displayed Move or delete each vertex as required by selecting and dragging or by tapping the delete button Add Nodes Select the polygon or polyline and then tap the Add Vertex tool on the Draw Edit Toolbar or choose GO gt Edit gt Edit Mode gt Add Node Mode The polygon or polyline vertices are then displayed Tap the stylus on the polyline or polygon in the position where you want the new node to be added You can also drag the node to a new position with the stylus as you add it Edit Attributes Use the Information button to display and edit attributes field v
206. g with a device to set up a COM port tap New Outgoing Port For other options tap and hold an existing port Incoming Port COM7 XL3t 34008 COM8 New Outgoing Port Devices Mode COM Ports Creating and configuring a New Incoming Port 3 The final port configuration On the Niton device go to System gt Bluetooth and press the Search option Highlight the PPC device name from the list press the Config button and set the Type to GIS Press Save Select the PPC device name from the list and press Connect On the PPC enter the Niton Passcode 0000 when prompted and press Done Connecting an Olympus Innov X XRF device with the PPC on Windows Mobile 2003 Follow these steps to set up the Bluetooth connection between the PPC and an Olympus Innov X XRF device 1 Switch on the XRF device and ensure that the Bluetooth Wireless Radio is switched on Switch on the PPC and ensure that the PPC Bluetooth Wireless Radio is switched on Pair the Olympus Innov X XRF with the PPC see Pairing an Olympus Innov X XRF device with the PPC Check the serial port settings on the PPC see Configuring the Serial Port on the PPC 316 Discover Mobile User Guide 5 Pair the PPC with the Olympus Innov X XRF see Pairing the PPC with the Olympus Innov X XRF Pairing an Olympus Innov X XRF device with the PPC Start the PPC The Windows Mobile Today Screen is displayed 1 Tap the Start button and select Set
207. gnments Check for Mapped Buttons 3 Press an appropriate hardware button on the device to which you want to assign the particular Discover Mobile function 4 Repeat the above process for any other hardware buttons you wish to map on your device To clear a function from one of the hardware buttons select the Clear Button Assignment entry from the Select Function pick list at the top of the dialog and then press the button you wish to clear You should note the button assignment description is then removed from the list at the bottom of the dialog 88 Discover Mobile User Guide If the Hardware Button assignments set via Windows Start gt Settings gt Buttons are to be used eg to access Word or Excel ensure that the Check for Mapped Buttons option is unselected disabled Alert Configurations Alerts such as sounds or warning messages can be setup to inform users when certain situations with their GPS unit arise These situations include instances when the GPS is reporting values derived from a bad position fix the user is trying to record a point outside the set distance tolerance limits an XRF measurement has been received or the GPS recording interval has been increased or reduced Directories GO gt Preferences gt Directories Project Root Current Project e Set Individually advanced users only Project Root The Project root setting will define where all Discover Mobile project data will be st
208. gs selected at the top of the dialog If the port is successfully opened and valid data is found it will be displayed in the output window Stop closes the GPS port Clear clears the data stream from the display window 254 Discover Mobile User Guide Once the connection Port for the GPS receiver and the appropriate settings Speed Parity Data and Stop have been specified press the Start button If Discover Mobile detects NMEA format data on the selected COM port it will display the raw sentence information in the window see below GPGSA A 3 24 07 05 28 rrrrr1r3 6 1 5 GPGSV 2 1 08 09 59 266 33 04 57 08 GPGSV 2 2 08 05 33 234 41 31 20 12 GPRMC 232546 095 A 3753 0999 S 14 232547 095 3753 0982 S 145 GPGSA A 3 24 07 05 28yrrrrr1113 6 1 5 GPGSV 2 1 08 09 59 266 29 04 57 08 GPGSV 2 2 08 05 33 234 41 31 20 12 DATA No Fx C tos to fie S St ae Sea g Example of Setup Connection dialog with a valid GPS connection If there is no NMEA data available on the selected COM port the display window will remain blank except for a message Output will be displayed here see figure below or an error Bad Data 11 Working with the GPS 255 File Zoom Tools Help DiscoverMobile en 4c 4 08 ok Port peed Parity Data Stop 2_ 9600_ None 8 i f DATA GPS 144 968 37 820 Setup Connection dialog indicating that no NMEA dat
209. h vector maps and is only enabled when the GPS is active The map rotation function cannot be used if a raster table is loaded in the map window See Auto Rotate and Auto Cenire for further information Deg Tolerance This control sets the angular tolerance for the Map Auto Rotate function An angular tolerance value refers to the angular difference between two consecutive GPS locations If the angle between two points is greater than the degree tolerance value then the map will rotate so the direction of travel is towards the top of the screen The default value is 45 degrees and is generally sufficient for most situations If you set a lower value the map display will rotate more frequently If your map is relatively complex and takes considerable time to redraw you may notice a performance decrease if the Auto Rotate function is turned on Speed Tolerance The speed tolerance control is used to set the minimum speed over ground below which the Auto Rotate function will be deactivated The default setting is 2 kilometres per hour however you can set it to any integer value For most situations 2 km h is generally adequate however you may find increasing the value to 30 or 50km h more appropriate when you are travelling in a vehicle When Off Determines what happens to the map window contents when the Auto Rotate map function is turned off The options are Rotate North this will return the map window display to its original posi
210. hardware buttons Setup alert sounds or warning messages Select directory to save all Discover Mobile data Select folder in Project Root to save all Discover Mobile data If required default Project Root and Current project Folders can be overwritten Appendix A Discover Mobile Quick Reference Guide 295 Preference Option Track Log Pick Lists Named Styles Hotlink Files New Tables Image Files Description Continued Select directory to save Track Log files Select directory to save Pick List files Select directory to save Named Style files Select directory to save Hotlink files Select directory to save New Table files Select directory where in built PPC camera stores image files Appendix B Structural Symbols 297 Structural Symbols The Structural True Type symbol fonts should be installed onto your system via the Fonts folder in Control Panel They are then available for use with any software that uses True Type fonts including MapInfo Corel Draw and MS Word Structural Symbols Ordered by Discover Code Structure Symbols Ordered by Name The symbols may be referred to in one of a number of ways Name Used with the Discover Structure Symbols gt Create Structure Symbols menu option when placing individual structural symbols There are three separate structural symbol fonts that are available Australian ET Structural Australia Canadian ET Structural Canada USA ET Structural
211. he Layer Control tool or choose GO gt View gt Layer Contro to display the Layer Control dialog 2 In the display list select a layer and then tap the Selectable check box Layer and Object Visibility Often it is convenient to have a layer open but not visible The layer control can be used to turn the visibility of a layer off removing it from the display without closing the table You can also control the visibility of objects on a layer based on a zoom range Specifying the zoom range for which a raster layer is visible can greatly increase map redraw speed and remove unnecessary detail from the map display at larger zoom levels particularly when dealing with complex or detailed map layers To change the visibility of a layer 1 Tap the Layer Control tool or choose GO gt View gt Layer Contro to display the Layer Control dialog 2 In the display list select a layer and then tap the Visible check box To change the visibility of objects when zooming 1 Tap the Layer Control tool or choose GO gt View gt Layer Contro to display the Layer Control dialog 2 In the display list select a layer and then tap the Display button 3 Select the Display withing range check box and type the range in the Min and Max boxes 4 Ensure the Automate labels check box is selected for the layer 7 Controlling Layers and the View 139 Note Zoom layering can also be set in MapInfo before transferring data to Discover
212. he following folder Program Files Encom Discover Mobile 32 bit or C C Program Files x86 Encom Discover Mobile 64 bit Select the file Di sc Mobi e MBX and click Open A new menu item called Discover Mobile should then appear on the MapInfo Professional menu bar You can add this tool to the Tools gt Tool Manager to set it to permanently auto load when MapInfo Professional is opened The tools available from this menu are e DiscoverMobile Manager Convert Hotlinks Name Style Editor Range Style Editor e Picklist Editor Table Merge Save Registered Raster For information on the steps involved in preparing and transferring data from the desktop to the mobile device see Discover Mobile Workflow 26 Discover Mobile User Guide Discover Mobile Workflow When transferring data to and from a mobile device and modifying the data over a number of sessions it is important that you follow a good workflow procedure to ensure data is efficiently updated and prepared for use in Discover Mobile Master Database Add update row Use Picklist Local ID and modified editor to subset fields p prepare or of database create Mobile tables Review and Use Style editor update data to prepare changes into styles library for local subset Discover Mobile using Merge Tables Retrieve from Transfer to PPC Use Save device using using Registered Disc
213. hen you can set the Map Projection to User Defined Discover Mobile will then display all coordinates e g GPS Map X amp Map Y in the Status window the Map X and Map Y attribute coordinates in the browser and the Map Grid coordinates in this projection The GPS Lat Long values in the Status Window and browser will always be displayed in Latitude Longitude WGS 84 projection A user defined map projection also overrides the coordinate units which are displayed when using the XY cursor point tool on the main button bar User Projection The user projection dialog allows you to select a preferred projection for the Map Grid and for capturing GPS data To enable a user projection select the appropriate projection category from the user projection dialog and then set the Map Projection above control to User Projection Distance In The Distance In option allows you to select a preferred unit for displaying distance measurements This controls the display units of the Distance and Measurement tool the Scalebar and the various Quick Pick measurement options Object Length and Perimeter Area In The Area In option allows specification of the preferred area units for area measurements eg using the Quick Pick Object Area option Grid Overlay The grid overlay dialog is used to override the default display settings for Discover Mobiles dynamic Map Grid The display properties for grid label size and colour grid line width line colour
214. hether they have a current position fix or not If the connected GPS has obtained a position fix the third status indicator will show the raw GPS Latitude and Longitude position EF DiscoverMobile 4 q 3 33 fok Port Spe Data Stop 5 r as00 Nene w e E GPGSA A 3 16 15 21 06 18 yprerer2D 0 2 GPGSV 3 1 10 21 68 192 41 18 64 33 GPGSV 3 2 10 16 31 250 34 26 31 0 GPGSV 3 3 10 10 06 137 30 30 05 35 Data GPRMC 053229 465 A 3753 1021 S 14 GPGGA 053230 465 3753 1020 S 145 GPGSA A 3 16 15 21 06 18 rrr11119 0 2 GPGSV 3 1 10 21 68 192 41 18 64 33 GPGSV 3 2 10 16 31 250 34 26 31 09 GPGSV 3 3 10 10 06 137 31 30 05 35 Position Information Signal Quality Signal Type When using Discover Mobile with a GPS is very important that you do not have any third party GPS software running This includes any software other than the necessary drivers that came with the GPS receiver Most PPC devices will only allow one software application to access the serial port at a time Therefore if you have two pieces of software trying to read data from the GPS port at the same time they will generally cause the connection to fail Enable RTS this tick box can be used to enable the Request to Send option When enabled the mobile device will send a signal to the GPS to instruct it to start transmitting This option should be enabled when working with GPS receivers connected via a serial device such as DGPS units Log to
215. ice Transferring Data Updating with New Device Data Connection Status 28 Discover Mobile User Guide Note Specify Data to Transfer Specify the data types which are to be copied to and from the mobile device Uncheck any data types which are not required to be copied The options include Tables Picklists NameStyles Images Hotlinks When a directory has been specified a series of folders are created in the root directory where the data resides these are called Encom DM Tables_ WM Encom DM Picklists Encom DM Namestyles Encom DM_ mages Encom DM Hotlinks To specify the directories on the mobile device where the data is to be copied navigate to GO gt Preferences gt Directories By default these will be set to My Documents itis advisable to re path this to a removable disk in case of a crash or hard reset which will delete these files Preparing Tables for Mobile Device Make sure any tables or files you have prepared for use on the mobile device are placed in the Project Directory root folder Before transferring your data to the device click on the Enable Table Marge button This will perform a check on all tables in that project directory that will be copied to the device Any tables which are fund not compatible for use with the Table Merge to preview and merge modifications back to the desktop tables will be listed and you should select any tables which you are going to modify on the
216. ick Apply To apply style description to objects 1 2 Select Data Entry gt Apply Style to open the Apply Style dialog Select the map object s in the Mapper window or Browser window In the Picklists box select the picklist In the Styles box select the style you want to apply Select the Insert style description check box Select the table you want to apply the style description Appendix D Digitizing and Data Entry in Discover 361 Note 7 Select the table column you want to apply the style description 8 Click Apply To apply a style when digitizing objects 1 Select Data Entry gt Apply Style to open the Apply Style dialog 2 In the Picklists box select the picklist 3 In the Styles box select the style you want to apply 4 Click Apply 5 The selected style will be applied to any new objects If you wish to insert the style description text in the new object record select the Insert style description check box and populate the table and column dropdown boxes Applying Multiple Styles from a Picklist Multiple picklist styles can be applied to selected map objects or applied when creating new map objects To apply multiple styles permanently to a table 1 Select Data Entry gt Apply Picklist to open the Apply Style dialog 362 Discover Mobile User Guide Ges Apply selected Picklist Style s through a permanent o to a Table or as a Thematic Map r Australian Surface Geol
217. iew It is therefore an excellent way to convert multiple layers datasets in a map window into a single image eg topographical data or convert a vector geology map into an image so it can be overlain on a magnetic or gravity image with a set transparency It can also be used to convert and crop gridded data e g a geophysical or geochemical grid into an image to be used in Discover Mobile The tool also supports ECW compression and adjustable detail size making it an excellent tool to clip and compress existing registered raster images opened in MapInfo Professional map window 20 Discover Mobile User Guide Note It is much better using a raster image as a background map instead of displaying the original vector layers This is because there is only one layer to redraw and may be up to 1000 times faster than re drawing large vector datasets The vector data can always be loaded temporarily if attribute data needs to be queried i e view assay results for selected samples or drillhole collar information It is opened via the DiscoverMobile gt Save Registered Raster menu See Save Registered Raster for more information on using this tool Clip Image The Clip Image tool allows multiple large registered images to be clipped down to a region more appropriate for use within Discover Mobile e g clipping a regional air photo down to the extent of a prospect It is recommended that if working over a large images area clip
218. ile User Guide Note If the Picklist does not appear check that it is in the correct format has been placed in the assigned Pick List directory and that it has the same name as the target field and same prefix as the Table name if required Example Pick Lists The Discover Mobile desktop installation includes an Example dataset This data is installed to an Example Data directory under the Discover Mobile folder default location C Program Files Encom Discover Mobile Example Data The example dataset includes a number of standard geological Pick List text files inan Example Data PickList subdirectory Grain_clast_size Lithology Lithology_example Occurrence Percentage Regime Regolith_example Sample_Type To use these files copy them to the mobile device s Pick List directory as set via GO gt Preferences gt Directories gt Pick Lists Then ensure that the appropriate field name in the capture table and the pick list name patch It is recommended to truncate edit the longer Pick Lists down to only those entries commonly used and then save these files with a new name e g Lithology to the removable storage card This will allow easier attribute selection within the Discover Mobile interface without having to scroll through the entire list Create a Pick List in Discover Mobile Only use the below creation and editing procedures in Discover Mobile if you do not have access to the desktop Pick ist Editor tool this
219. ile from Discover is a follows 1 Start the ColourMap function in Discover using the Discover gt ColourMap menu 2 Select Setup from the ColourMap menu and choose the Select Colour Table option from Colour Table Options on the left of the dialog Select the colour table you wish to use from the selection list on the right of the dialog and assign the column you wish to use as the unique code and click OK 3 Select Export to Discover Mobile from the ColourMap menu and assign an appropriate file name for the Named Style file and click OK 4 Copy the newly created TXT file to the Named Style directory on your mobile device Sample Named Styles Dataset The Discover Mobile desktop installation includes a sample dataset This data is installed to an Example Data directory under the Discover Mobile folder default location C Program Files Encom Discover Mobile Example Data This example dataset contains the tables and associated Geoset Field_Data used in the previous screenshots It also contains the Named Styles example Regional_Sampling txt and associated Pick Lists in the relevant subdirectories To setup the sample on the mobile device 1 Ensure that Discover Mobile is not running on the mobile device 2 Copy the various data tables soils lag rockchip etc and the Field Data gst geoset file into a PPC data directory 10 Working with Objects 231 File Explorer amp Ausmajrd amp Auscity amp
220. ile gt New Table 127 File gt Open Table 131 File gt Recent Files 127 File gt Save Geoset 133 File gt Save Table Copy As 132 Fill patterns 62 123 fill patterns 224 Index 381 Find Selection command 99 Fix Dilution 151 Float fields 129 Foreground patterns 224 Freehand Polygon button 63 203 Freehand Polyline 94 Freehand Polyline button 63 203 Functions of queries 98 193 G Geosets and usage 52 133 GIS 1 GO button 57 66 67 GO menu 49 Go to tool 64 GO gt About 69 GO gt Edit 119 GO gt Exit 68 GO gt File 125 GO gt GPS 104 GOs gt Licensing 69 GO gt Map 100 GO gt Preferences 70 GO gt Query 96 GO gt Tools 90 GO gt View 109 GO gt XRF 108 GPS connecting 327 NMEA 328 Trimble 329 GPS Connect button 65 GPS errors 76 GPS information 151 GPS Information Properties 64 GPS Insert Node 65 207 GPS Line Track Log 65 206 GPS location 338 GPS Map Position 151 GPS menu 104 GPS Point Capture 64 65 205 206 GPS Point Track Log 65 205 GPS Polygon Capture 180 GPS Polyline Capture 65 207 GPS Polyline Polygon Pause Button 65 208 GPS position 151 GPS receiver 70 73 GPS receivers 47 GPS Structure Symbol 65 206 GPS toolbar 49 56 58 64 205 GPS gt Capture Point 107 GPS gt Capture Polygon 107 GPS gt Capture Polyline 107 GPS gt Capture Structure Symbol 107 GPS gt Center Map on GPS 106 GPS gt Connect 105 GPS gt Default Styles 106 GPS gt Line Log 107 GPS gt Monitor Satellite Status 105 GPS gt Orient
221. ill be placed at the top of the Layer Control list and is set as the insertion layer For more information see Adding a Cosmetic Layer Set Insertion Layer GO gt Map gt Set Insertion Layer The Insertion Layer is where drawing objects created with the Drawing tools are stored Drawing objects will be stored on the selected layer until a new layer is selected 102 Discover Mobile User Guide For more information see Setting the Insertion Layer Create Theme GO gt Map gt Create Theme You can change the appearance of maps with themes For more information see Thematic Mapping Dataset The dataset specifies the layer to be used for the theme The various fields columns of the dataset are shown in the list box Type The theme Type determines the method of distributing the values within the nominated data field Select a theme type from Auto An automatically scaled data range determined from the numerical data field selected Ranged A type of thematic map which displays numerical data according to data ranges set by the user The ranges are shaded using colours or patterns Bar Chart A type of thematic map which displays a bar chart of thematic variables for each record in the table Pie Chart A type of thematic map which displays a pie chart of thematic variables for each record in the table Graduated Symbol A type of thematic map that shows symbols point objects sized
222. in styles select those styles 4 In the Style Structural Options box select the table you want to apply the structural style 5 Select the dip direction dip and discover code fields 6 If dip labels are required for the structural symbols click the Label Options button to open the Structure Text Labels dialog Structure Text Lobel O Dip Plunge Text Labels No Labels Maplnfo Auto Labels Style Cosmetic Text Labels Style Map Scale 1 OK Cancel Text label options No Labels Default state no dip plunge labels displayed MapInfo Auto labels Dip plunge labels created as MapInfo custom auto labels within the structure table Cosmetic Text Labels Dip plunge labels created on the Map Window Cosmetic Layer in the Map Window which is selected Click OK after selecting the label options 7 Click Apply to change the point objects into rotated structure symbols Make sure the MapInfo table is packed otherwise unexpected object attribution may result 366 Discover Mobile User Guide Note Configure Table for Data Entry The Data Entry gt Setup Table tool configures any TAB file with validation rules for data entry using the Discover Enter Data tool see Enter or Digitize Table Data and Map Objects The tables can be either mappable or non mappable The validation settings are stored as metadata in the TAB file TAB files linked to images grids and re
223. in the map or cancel the query If you choose to select the items Discover Mobile will extract the data from your base table and store the results in a temporary selection table The selection table contains only the rows and columns that meet your criteria The default name of the results table is Selection If you wish to save your query for re use at a later time then use the Save button and assign an appropriate name for the query To re use the query tap the Load button select the appropriate query file and the query will be restored Columns After you have chosen the layer to be queried the column drop down list displays the available data fields in the layer If you place the stylus over a field and select it the entry will be placed in the query expression area 98 Discover Mobile User Guide Operations Quite complex queries can be created using the operators and functions in Discover Mobile A drop down list of operators is available to assist in creating the query expression For information on Query operators see Operators Functions A drop down list of functions is available to assist in creating the SQL text of the query For information on Query functions see Functions Select All GO gt Query gt Select All The Select All menu item selects all records from a table and places the items in the Selection table The selection will only select objects from a single layer Discover Mobile displays a dialo
224. ine into the Insertion Layer To use position and tap the stylus at the line start point and then drag a line to an end point When you remove the stylus a straight line is drawn between the two points The Polyline Line tool is used to draw polylines by tapping the location of vertices nodes on the screen To use first tap a point on the screen to add the first node then move the stylus off the screen surface and tap another point Continue tapping vertices until the polyline is complete To finish double tap the screen at the position of the last node 10 Working with Objects 203 The Freehand Polyline tool is used to draw polylines on the screen using freehand drawing To use place the stylus at the start of the line and then while holding the stylus on the surface draw the required line To finish remove the stylus from the screen and the polyline will be automatically created The Polygon tool is used to draw a polygon node by node To use tap the stylus on the screen at the location of the first vertex and then continue by tapping the second and subsequent vertices Complete the polygon by double tapping the location of the final vertex The Freehand Polygon tool is used to draw polygons on the screen using freehand drawing To use place the stylus on the screen at the start location of the polygon and while holding the stylus on the surface draw the required shape To finish remove the stylus from the surface and the polyg
225. intend to use the post processing functionality of the Trimble TSIP protocol you will need Discover 2013 or later installed as well as Trimble GPS Pathfinder Office 4 00 or later See also Hardware and Operating System Requirements Licensing Discover Mobile Transferring Data Between Devices Reinstalling Discover Mobile on the PPC When Discover Mobile is installed on the PC the install file specific to the PPC device is copied to the C Program Files Encom Discover Mobile Application Files Windows Mobile 32 Bit or C Program Files x86 Encom Discover Mobile Application Files Windows Mobile 64 Bit folder on the PC To reinstall the software on the PPC 1 With the PPC synchronized to the PC copy DiscoverMobile Setup CAB file from the Windows Mobile folder on the PC to the My Documents folder on the PPC 1 Introduction 5 2 From the mobile device tap the Discover Mobile Setup CAB file to install Discover Mobile Licensing Discover Mobile When you start Discover Mobile for the first time you will be prompted to licence the software You will need to obtain a licence file from Pitney Bowes Software PBS You only need to license the software once on each installation To license the software 1 Check that the PPC system clock is correct You can change the date and time by either tapping the date in the PPC desktop display or by selecting Start gt Settings gt System gt Clock 2 On the PP
226. inue appending to the existing table or to create a new table 268 Discover Mobile User Guide EF crs Fix 2D Fi Eaa D lt 10 of 11 851827 550413213 5799223 09080163 37 884915 145 001601666667 8 19 04 4 21 0 pm 0 157740396 KIKI KUKE KTKT KEKI l li mea kpop h k PRJ akO El i x co k Ao mj Ej Left image shows a Point Track Log with Current position Red Circle and a point log grey circles of path travelled Right image shows the GPS attributes associated with one of the points GPS Line Log GO gt GPS gt Line Log Choose GO gt GPS gt Line Log to record a log of the travelled path as a series of line segments The Line Track Log will look like a continuous line on the screen however it is actually made up of a series of line segments rather than one continuous line This way the GPS attribute information can be stored for each segment of the Line Track Log any segment of the Line Log can therefore be queried to determine the GPS coordinates time date speed etc of that segment See the GPS Point Track Log section above for setup and use of the GPS Line Track log 11 Working with the GPS 269 GPS Fix 3D E 12009 amp Line Segment 851829 262466492 5799221 90503617 37 884925 145 001621666667 8 19 04 4 24 41 pm 0 175749244 KN RES EN EN KR KIKI Peo A e isle xt tt kaa eeth i x co w amp jl 8 m E Left im
227. ion select a folder to store the data tables and Sample Batch folders The structure under the Current Project folder will be Olympus Innov X XRF devices D Xplore i E batchnumber batchnumber_xrf_soil batchnumber_xrf_mining These correspond to the two different modes the Olympus Innov X XRF runs in Soil Mode is used for concentrations of up to 2 3 and as Mining Mode is for concentrations above 2 3 For soil geochemistry surveys Soil Mode is usual Appendix C Working with Portable XRF Devices 333 Niton XRF devices D Niton L oO batchnumber he batchnumber_xrf_data Configure the XRF Connection 1 2 Select the Go gt XRF gt Setup menu option In the following dialog set the appropriate Device Niton or Olympus Innov X Select the Incoming COM Port e g COM 7 for the Niton Bluetooth connection detailed above Move your desired Summary Elements to the Selected list These elements will be displayed in the initial Summary page when an XRF measurement is completed all other elements will be displayed in the following Data pages Press OK Once setup these configuration options are remembered between XRF device connections see Connect to the XRF device and do not need to be reconfigured for each connection Device XRF Setup Yx 1 29 ok COM Port Com 7 b Summary Elements Avaliable Selected Up 334 Discover Mobile User Guide Note Connect
228. ion value of the current object The rotation function can only be used with point objects e GPS specific output the various GPS specific output streams can be linked to custom fields of the appropriate formats i e Float fields for most GPS data types such as Map_X Pos_Lat etc Date field for Pos_Date etc These special fields record the data as displayed in the GPS Status Window The following additional options are available when the Quick Pick tag is set Press the adjacent browse button select the Auto Field List tab and choose a Quick Pick option Link File hotlink the file path of any file on the PPC device to a map object 9 Working with Tables 179 Link Image hotlink the file path of an image file on the PPC device to a map object Link New Audio hotlink the file path of a new Audio file such as a voice recording as an attribute to a map object This can be particularly useful for recording voice notes at sample locations Link New Pocket Word hotlink the file path of a new Pocket Word document as an attribute to a map object Link New Pocket Excel hotlink the file path of a new Pocket Excel document as an attribute to a map object Link New Custom hotlink the file path of any file on the PPC device an attribute to a map object Read Only set the pick list file to be read only If the read only flag is added to the pick list you cannot edit the pick list
229. iously to merge the changes into the original table Output Table Select the original and un modified copy of the table from the local disk to perform the merge action Merge Actions The merge actions can be modified by either selecting or deselecting the appropriate action The following merge actions are available e Append New Rows The Input and Output table ID fields are compared if an ID record doesn t exist in the Output table it will be appended to the Output table Note if there is multiple ID values they will be overwritten and only the last one used e Update Changed Field Values The Input and Output table Modified fields are compared if a Modified record is flagged with a T this will indicate a modification and this record will be changed in the Output table e Scan Geometry for Changes The geometry of the Input and Output tables are compared using the ID field as the join If the maps object geometry is modified from the Input table this is reflected in the Output table only records with the same ID will be modified Remove Deleted Rows The Input and Output table ID fields are compared if an ID record doesn t exist in the Input table it will be deleted from the Output table 44 Discover Mobile User Guide Mobile Table Merge Merge table changes together with an existing table Input Table Table to Merge From Geology_Mobile Merge Actions a New Rows v Rows which do not match an e
230. itic Foliation Vertical Glacial Striae Sense Known Glacial Striae Sense Unknown Dipping Shear Zone Bedding Facing Overturned Discover Code 76 77 77 78 78 79 80 81 82 ASCII Code 157 158 159 161 162 116 117 114 40 Australia Structure Symbols Ordered by Name Name Anticline F1 Anticline F1 Horizontal Anticline F2 Anticline F2 Horizontal Anticline F3 Anticline F3 Horizontal Anticline Overturned Anticline Recumbent Discover Code 20 20 21 22 ASCII Code 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 Australia Canada Canada USA 304 Discover Mobile User Guide Name Asymmetric Fold Verge Left Asymmetric Fold Verge Right Banding Platy Alignment Banding Platy Alignment Horizontal Banding Platy Alignment Vertical Bedding Bedding Facing Bedding Facing Overturned Bedding Facing Unknown Bedding Facing Unknown Vertical Bedding Facing Vertical Bedding Horizontal Bedding Overturned Bedding Overturned Horizontal Bedding Vertical Bedding Cleavage Bedding Cleavage Horizontal Bedding Cleavage S1 Parallel Bedding Cleavage S2 Parallel Bedding Cleavage S3 Parallel Discover Code 66 67 15 15 82 46 46 52 53 54 ASCII Code 147 148 62 64 63 33 38 40 130 131 39 34 36 37 35 56 57 72 73 74 Australia to gt
231. jects 202 Discover Mobile User Guide xj SE 2 Tap the Symbol tool or choose Go gt Tools gt Add Point 3 Tap on the display to locate the point 4 Depending on the options selected under GO gt Preferences gt Object Creation a number of dialogs may appear which will allow you to select and enter line style field values and coordinates For more information about object creation options see Setting Object Creation Preferences and Field Data Entry and Editing Creating Lines and Polygons Before creating objects you should open and set the insertion layer If an insertion layer has not been assigned when objects are created a dialog will appear allowing selection of the insertion layer 1 To select or change the line and fill style see Setting Default Styles for New Drawing Objects 2 Tap one of the line object tools see below or choose from the Go gt Tools menu 3 In the display tap or tap and drag see below for a description on the operation of each tool to create and terminate the line object 4 Depending on the options selected under GO gt Preferences gt Object Creation a number of dialogs may appear which will allow you to select and enter line style field values and coordinates For more information about object creation options see Setting Object Creation Preferences and Field Data Entry and Editing Line creation tools available from the Draw Edit toolbar The Line Tool draws a straight l
232. k Pick Options Hardware Button Options Named Styles New Object Styles Range Styles Apply Range Style The Edit menu options Buffer Edit Mode 120 Discover Mobile User Guide e Clear Custom Labels and Annotations Delete Raster Transparency Selected Point Location e Selected Object Style e Quick Pick Options e Hardware Button Options e Named Styles e New Object Styles e Range Styles Apply Range Style Buffer GO gt Edit gt Buffer A buffer selects objects that fall within a given distance of one or more selected objects 6 Using the GO Menu 121 DiscoverMobile en 11 28 ok Bu er Each abject separa tly O Buffer All objects into one per layer une Buffer each object separately Create a buffer around each selected object Buffer all objects into one per layer Create a single buffer around all selected objects Distance Type the buffer distance Unit Choose the unit of measurement for the buffer distance Edit Mode GO gt Edit gt Edit Mode gt Feature Edit Mode GO gt Edit gt Edit Mode gt Add Edit Mode GO gt Edit gt Edit Mode gt Node Edit Mode The edit modes enable different editing operations on selected objects For information on how to use these modes see Editing Objects 122 Discover Mobile User Guide Clear Custom Labels and Annotations GO gt sEdit gt Clear Custom Labels GOsEdit gt Clear Annotations
233. k from the list available command to pack multiple tables at the same time 3 Pack both graphical and tabular data Select Tables to pack Fault_coords SectionLines Pack Tabular Data Pack Graphic Data Pack Both Types of Data Help Cancel 4 Click OK Create Data Entry Pick Lists The use of Pick Lists e g look up tables of predefined rock or sample codes within Discover Mobile can greatly increase the efficiency and speed of data entry and minimize data entry errors See Pick ist Editor for more information on creating and using pick lists 3 Data Preparation 25 Create Named Styles The ability to apply an existing style to a new object can greatly simplify the display window in Discover Mobile particularly when dealing with large numbers of the same object type eg points with differing attributes eg rock chips soil and lag samples Creating and applying Named Styles to objects allows graphical differentiation minimizing duplication of sampling See Name Style Editor for more information Named Styles can also be configured so that each style is automatically placed into pre linked table with style rather than table specific Quick Pick options Desktop Tools Included with Discover Mobile are a number of desktop tools to be used in conjunction with MapInfo Professional These can auto load with Discover otherwise they can be accessed by navigating to Tools gt Run MapBasic Program and browse to t
234. l fields only Maximum field width is 254 for character fields and 10 for numeric fields The width of a decimal value includes the total number of numeric characters including the decimal point Projection All table TAB files in MapInfo Professional which have graphic objects i e a MAP file have an assigned native map projection When you create a new table in Discover Mobile the native map window projection will initially default to Latitude Longitude WGS84 You can specify an alternative projection for the table by selecting Set Projection option in the New Table dialog Discover Mobile supports the same range of map projections that are used in MapInfo Professional DiscoverMobile en 2 22 ok DiscoverMobile e7 4c 2 23 ok Category Universal Transverse Mercator WGS 84 v Universal Transverse Mercator WGS 84 v Turkish Coordinate Systems Lambert jal Universal Polar Stereographic Universal Transverse Mercator Corrego Aleg Universal Transverse Mercator ED 50 Universal Transverse Mercator NAD 27 for Ca Canada Modified Transverse Mercator NAD Z Modified Transverse Mercator ATS77 Universal Transverse Mercator NAD 27 for Ug Universal Transverse Mercator NAD 83 Universal Transverse Mercator SAD 69 Universal Transverse Mercator WGS 84 US State Plane Coordinate Systems 1927 US State Plane Coordinate Systems 1983 md US State Plane Coordinate Systems 1983 fed OR Snce UTM Zone 57 South
235. l the associated tables and restore the display settings for that Geoset DiscoverMobile er 10 55 Flier Fae gt Caneel Geoset Files gst v MapInfo Tables tab Name AEE Mt IsdGeoTiff Files tif All Files Searching and selecting one of the available Geoset files with GST filename extension 5 Mobile Interface 55 Mobile Interface The Discover Mobile user interface provides a simple and intuitive method of interacting and working with your mapping data Most tasks are accessed via button toolbars displayed at the bottom of the screen The Discover Mobile interface comprises four main parts Title bar Map Window Toolbars GO Menu tap the GO button to display You can also assign Discover Mobile functions to hardware buttons For more information see Customizing the Hardware Buttons DiscoverMobile er 4 10 55 X Title bar Map Window a fe tale i Ae Ble GPS Toolbar O B D Draw Edit Toolbar RHA amp Qe M Ble i x Select Toolbar GO Button e ot Sr Main Toolbar Hide Show Toolbars Layout and toolbars of Discover Mobile screen For information on using the stylus and accessing the various items in the interface refer to Interacting with the Software 56 Discover Mobile User Guide Note Title bar The Title bar displays useful information such as the GPS signal status time and volume controls plus the X button which
236. lates fields into the XRF Data Forms on the PPC All of the elemental data including the associated errors are recorded into the active table together with derived GPS coordinates Due to the large amount of data received the data is separated into several tabs i e Information Summary XRF Data1 XRF Data 2 Geography Information Tab The Information tab lists summary information about the analysis A Comments field is also available for operator descriptions such as sample horizon types regolith geology or any other useful and relevant field observations Additional Custom Fields can be added to the standard XRF tables and populated by the user for example with manual entries or via named styles and picklists 340 Discover Mobile User Guide GPS Fix GP G Yy d 1 42 ok XRF Data Explore Information XRF Data 1 XR A gt i XRF datasheet Information tab Summary Tab The Summary tab lists the elements selected via Go gt XRF gt Setup providing a quick way of browsing primary indicator elements pathfinders of interest GPS Fix GP Yy M 1 42 ok XRF Data Explore Information XRF Data 1 XRM gt i XRF datasheet Summary tab Appendix C Working with Portable XRF Devices 341 XRF Data Tabs The elemental concentration data from the XRF device is stored in the XRF Data forms with the associated analytical errors red The XRF Data tabs hav
237. ll labels from the annotation layer use the Clear Custom Labels sub menu accessible via the Label button on the Draw Edit toolbar or the GO gt Edit gt Clear Custom Labels menu 96 Discover Mobile User Guide Query Menu GO gt Query The Query menu items are used to create and maintain queries that may be used in interrogation of data tables DiscoverMobile en 4c 4 25 X Exit About Licensing Preferences Tools Select Select All Clear Selection Find Selection Browse Selection colar RE Bot hy Query menu Select Select All Clear Selection Find Find Selection Browse Selection 6 Using the GO Menu 97 Select GO gt Query gt Select The Select query dialog enables the concise construction of SQL queries within Discover Mobile The first step to creating a query is to select a Layer or base table to query DiscoverMobile en 459 50 ok Layers Isa_Geology v Type expression or choose element below UNITNAME Ballara Quartzite Columns Choose to Insert v Operations Choose to Insert X Functions Choose to Insert v The Query dialog with layer and query specified Construct the query using the appropriate columns and operators and then tap the Run button to initiate the query When Discover Mobile has found all the items which meet the selection criteria a prompt will appear asking you to either select the objects
238. ll objects 98 Select items tools 58 Select query 97 Select radius 59 215 Select toolbar 49 Select View toolbar 57 58 Selectable area 59 215 Selection button 59 215 Selection table 97 98 190 find contents 99 Selection using stylus 50 Serial devices 73 Session Coordinate Projection 116 Setup Fields button 127 Shortcut buttons 49 Size of fields 130 Size of Status Window 151 Small arrow for options 57 Small integer fields 129 Speed setting of GPS 73 Speed Tolerance 146 Stacked bar charts 156 Start Discover Mobile 47 Start menu 47 Status Window 58 115 150 Status Window Setup menu 58 Stop Map 58 Straight line 94 String expression in queries 193 String fields 129 Structural codes 181 Structural Data Mapper symbol codes 181 Structural True Type symbol fonts 297 Stylus operation 50 55 Submenu list 57 Symbol button 63 Symbol style 62 Symbol style dialog 222 System Settings Font Size 151 T Table copy 132 186 Table structure 119 187 Tables open and close 127 Tables open and close 184 Tap and drag the stylus 50 Tap the stylus 50 Text entry using stylus 50 Thematic colour 154 Thematic map controls 159 Thematic maps legend 159 Theme Type 154 Title bar 50 55 Toolbars 55 Tools menu 90 Tools gt Add Annotation 95 Tools gt Add Label 95 Tools gt Add Line 94 Tools gt Add Node 94 Tools gt Add Point 93 Tools gt Add Polygon 95 Tools gt Add Polygon Freehand 94 Tools gt Add
239. lose the dialog These settings will be automatically retained unless Discover Mobile is reinstalled or the settings are changed for instance if a different GPS receiver is used 7 Select the GO gt GPS gt Connect menu option to connect to the GPS receiver Once the receiver has found sufficient valid satellites use GO gt GPS gt Monitor Satellite Status to observe the current visible satellites a current position fix will be displayed A GPS Fix 2D or GPS Fix 3D message will be displayed at the top of the map window Discover Mobile is now ready for data capture After this initial GPS connection setup the user only has to enable the GO gt GPS gt Connect option to reconnect to the same GPS receiver assuming that the connection settings discussed in step 3 have not been altered Troubleshooting an NMEA GPS Connection The Setup Connection dialog is used to help configure and debug a NMEA GPS connection To display the setup dialog choose GO gt GPS gt Setup Connection or tap Setup from the Connection dialog The Setup Connection dialog displays raw data as it is received from the GPS receiver and gives an estimate of the signal quality if satellites are in view Discover Mobile will only be able to read and display the GPS data in the output window if the serial port communication settings are set correctly There are several controls available on this dialog Start opens the GPS port using the settin
240. ls 7 Controlling Layers and the View 143 Q View Controls e Zoom and Scale e Pan and Center Rotate Map Grid GPS Overlay Scale Bar Save and Restore View Zoom and Scale A selection of tools are provided for controlling the scale or zoom level of the display Set Zoom Width and Scale Zoom In and Out View Extents Set Zoom Width and Scale The zoom level can be set either from the Previous Zoom tool on the Select toolbar tap the arrow button next to the tool or by choosing GO gt View gt Zoom Level This allows you to specify a precise zoom level or map scale for the map window DiscoverMobile en 11 34 X Apply Close DiscoverMobile en 11 36 X Width 6400 0 4im Apply Close _ os a is Zoom Level dialogs setting zoom level by screen width or map scale 144 Discover Mobile User Guide Note Of x The map zoom level can be set using one of two methods The Width option allows you to set the display distance measured in metres for the screen width A range of preset values are available via the selection list however you can also type any value you require in the box Alternatively the map window display can be specified using a preferred Scale A range of preset scales are available via the selection list however you can also enter an alternative scale in the box if required The Scale option will adjust the map zoom level so the
241. m Out Pan Center e Info Cursor Position Add Point e Add Structure Symbol 6 Using the GO Menu 91 Add Node Add Line Add Polyline Freehand Add Polygon Freehand Add Polyline Freehand Add Polygon Add Polyline Add Annotation e Add Label Select GO gt Tools gt Select Radius Select selects objects within a radius around an initially located point All selectable objects within the radius are selected and highlighted Operate by placing the stylus at a point on the map and then dragging the stylus away from the point until the radial search area increases to the required diameter Polygon Select select objects within a user drawn polygon area Place the stylus at a start point and then tap out an enclosing polygon of any shape by tapping a series of vertices Complete the polygonal area by tapping twice All selectable objects within the polygon are selected and highlighted Rectangular Select select objects within a rectangular area drawn from an initially located point All selectable objects within the area are highlighted Operate by locating the stylus at a rectangle corner point and then drag the stylus away from the point until the search area increases to the required size Point Select activates the point select tool which allows single point picking of objects This is the default mode used for data entry object selection and editing Selection is don
242. meter or subfoot solutions and increasing the amount of data collected increased yield particularly in tough environments such as around tall buildings and under heavy tree canopy For more information see Trimble documentation Trimble Simulation Once enabled via the top most tick box Discover Mobile can simulate a live Trimble DGPS connection either by sourcing a data file txt previously generated or via simulating a circular movement path The latter option requires user specified latitude longitude altitude and radius parameters Update Interval The update interval controls the time interval or rate at which Discover Mobile updates the current GPS position location on the map This value is set to 2 seconds by default which is generally adequate for most situations If you do not need have your current position location updated as often then you may find it more appropriate to set this value to a higher interval say 10 or 20 seconds as this will reduce the amount of information that Discover Mobile has to process and may improve overall performance 76 Discover Mobile User Guide Note Preferred Interval Each time Discover Mobile updates your current location on the map with a new GPS position it must redraw the entire contents of the Map window to show the updated information If it takes longer to redraw the map window than the time set in the Update Interval control then Discover Mobile will not be able to re
243. mmit the image linking DiscoverMobile en e 2 34 lok Copper Hill Soils_Hotlink Ej gt Link Image s Edit List 10 Working with Objects 249 Be 7 To simply view the hotlink camera image navigate to the Select Toolbar Info icon and select Image This tool can be used to display the linked image by clicking on the object with the linked image If an object to select with no image link the following message is displayed No image to display 8 To inherit the image links when transferring the PPC data to the desktop laptop use the DiscoverMobile gt Convert Hotlinks tool 11 Working with the GPS 251 11 Working with the GPS Discover Mobile has been designed to connect to a wide selection of GPS receivers including handheld devices from Garmin Magellan and Trimble Receiver types include Compact Flash CF card GPS units Bluetooth units and backpack differential DGPS receivers Discover Mobile supports the industry standard NMEA National Marine Electronics Association 0183 version 2 protocol so any GPS receiver which outputs data using this protocol should work efficiently with Discover Mobile It also supports Trimble s proprietary TSIP protocol allowing the collection of high precision and differential GPS data both real time and post processed with the appropriate receivers Connecting to the GPS Displaying the Current Position Monitoring Satellite Status Navigatin
244. most tasks they do not possess anywhere near the computing power memory or the processor capacity of the average desktop computer It is therefore important that you keep this in mind when preparing your data for use in Discover Mobile When preparing data for the field review the topics under Supported File Types and Table Size Limits and Things You Can Do to Improve Performance A selection of Deskiop Tools are available to assist with the preparation of data on the desktop Supported File Types and Table Size Limits Discover Mobile cannot access non native MapInfo Professional tables such as Excel XLS XLSX Text TXT or MS Access MDB ACCDB These tables should be converted to native MapInfo Professional tables using the File gt Save Copy As command in MapInfo Professional prior to use In general vector tables with less than 2000 objects will give acceptable performance Discover Mobile does not support Time or Date Time fields Raster Images Discover Mobile can access raster data stored in BMP TIFF JPG GIF or ECW file format providing the images have an associated TAB file i e they have been opened in MapInfo Professional prior to being displayed in Discover Mobile Discover Mobile cannot open raster images directly apart from those saved in GeoTIFF format Ideally raster images should be kept below a couple of MB in size It is also more efficient to produce a single low resolution image for regional n
245. ms are Windows 8 32 or 64 bit Windows 7 32 or 64 bit SP1 Windows XP Professional 32 bit SP3 Pocket PC to Desktop PC Communication Requirements On Windows XP Microsoft ActiveSync version 4 5 or later On Windows 7 and 8 Windows Mobile Device Center 6 1 or later 1 Introduction 3 Desktop Post processing Software Requirements Post processing of field data collected using DGPS requires the following desktop software e Maplnfo Professional 10 5 or later Discover 2013 or later Trimble GPS Pathfinder Office 4 00 or later Installing Discover Mobile Installation of Discover Mobile is a three step procedure 1 Connect the mobile device to the desktop or laptop computer via ActiveSync or Windows Mobile Device Center For more information see PC Synchronisation 2 On the desktop or laptop run the Discover Mobile install program For more information see Software Installation The install program installs software documentation and sample data on the PC and also installs Discover Mobile on the mobile device 3 Register the software with the mobile device and install a licence file to activate the software This licence file must be obtained from Pitney Bowes Software For more information see Licensing Discover Mobile Software Installation Before you install the software Make sure that the Pocket PC device PPC is connected to the laptop or desktop computer and the PPC is
246. n 255 Auto Rotate Map Function 64 Auto Rotate Map North Up 66 152 Auto theme 102 Automatic Label option 142 B Background patterns 224 Backup battery 47 Bar chart thematic map 156 Bar Chart theme 102 Bitmap screen capture 101 Bluetooth connection 312 Bolding symbols 222 Browser information 61 219 Button toolbars 49 C Canadian Structural Symbols 181 Center button 144 Center tool 60 92 Character entry 58 Clear Annotations 242 Clear Selection table 98 Clipping objects at a polygon boundary 17 Clone File button for tables 131 170 Close tables 125 Colour of polygons 123 224 COM port 72 Communication between PC and PPC 8 Compact format legend 103 159 Comparison operators of queries 191 Connect to a GPS 64 Copies of a table 126 Copy files 8 Cosmetic Layer 62 101 136 201 made permanent 187 Create a buffer 216 Create the Cosmetic Layer 141 Current GPS Position 79 Current GPS position 58 Current Insertion Layer 151 Cursor location 58 Cursor Position tool 93 Custom XRF field 335 Customised labels 122 243 D Data Digitizing 343 380 Discover Mobile User Guide Data entry 58 Data protocol 1 Date fields 129 Decimal value of fields 130 Default map window projection 162 Default style 221 Degree of rotation 114 144 Delete button 61 220 for tables 128 169 Delete View 60 150 Delete Save views 60 150 Desktop PC 8 Dialogs 56 Digitizing Data 343 Discover 1 Discover Mobile icon 47 Display a
247. n Maplnfo Professional You can create and maintain tables on your desktop PC using MapInfo Professional and then transfer them to Discover Mobile for use in the field You can also create new Maplnfo Professional tables directly in Discover Mobile For information about managing tables see Cloning Tables Using Templates Opening Tables Closing Tables e Copying Tables e Viewing Tables Modifying Table Structure Packing Tables For information about individual commands see File Menu Opening Tables Discover Mobile supports standard Maplnfo Professional table formats TAB files These include MapInfo Professional native TAB files as well as TAB files which reference raster files BMP TIFF GIF JPG PCX SPOT ECW Discover Mobile can also open GeoTIFF images directly even if they do not have an associated TAB file To open a TAB file in Discover Mobile 1 Choose GO gt File gt Open Table or tap the Open Table button on the main toolbar 2 From the displayed file list of TAB files select the table to be opened After the table has been selected Discover Mobile automatically places it at the top of the Layer Control list and displays the table 9 Working with Tables 185 Important To open a recently opened table 1 Choose GO gt File gt Recent Files 2 Select the table and tap OK or double tap the table name To open a GeoTiff file 1 Choose GOs gt File gt Open Table 2
248. n Sample Points 15 points Precision Filter DGPS E Nieniaw CO Meee ba Recommended settings for post processed DGPS use with carrier phase logging enabled 272 Discover Mobile User Guide Post Processing This enables the enable the Carrier phase signal of the Trimble output to be logged Utilizing this signal in tandem with the default Code phase signal will increase the accuracy of the post processing correction however it requires the user to be within 50 kilometres of the base station and to maintain continuous Carrier phase lock for 10 minutes Three logging modes are available None no carrier phase data is logged The data set will not be able to be post processed Continuous carrier phase data is logged at 1 second intervals Classic carrier phase data is logged at heat beat rate when not capturing an object location and at the object logging rate when logging an object See Carrier Phase Logging for further information Min Sample Points This setting defines the number of point calculations required before a position is established A position is calculated by averaging the specified number of point calculations thus the higher this parameter is set the longer it will take to generate a position but the more precise the position will be It is recommended to use a setting of 15 points Precision Filter Various quality levels of position fix can be output b
249. n the radius are highlighted The origin of the radius is centred where the stylus was first placed on the screen Locate the stylus at a point on the screen and then drag it away from the point to define the radial search area Rectangular Selects objects within a rectangular area All selectable objects whose centroid is within the area are highlighted Locate the stylus at one corner and then drag out a rectangle Polygonal Select objects within a polygonal area Use the polygon select tool to enclose the required objects by tapping out a series of vertices All selectable objects within the polygon are highlighted Tap the stylus at a start point and then tap additional vertices to enclose the objects Close the polygon by double tapping the last point The Zoom In button increases the view of the display area Tapping once in the Display Area will operate the tool The tool magnifies the view by a factor of 2x and uses the point of the stylus tap as the centre of magnification Alternatively you can tap a location with the stylus then drag it to create a dotted rectangle When the stylus is removed the Display Area view zooms to fill the selected area The Zoom Out button increases the view of the display area A single tap of the stylus will halve the view area centred on the stylus tap point 60 Discover Mobile User Guide amp E The Previous Zoom button will restore multiple previous views To operate tap the button on
250. nating the current capture Tap the Pause button once to pause the current capture the button is depressed With the pause button depressed you can move without capturing further data When you are ready to capture the next node tap the pause button again to restart the capture 66 Discover Mobile User Guide Sl Auto Rotate Map North Up button turns on and off the Auto Map Rotate function The Auto Rotate Map function will automatically rotate the map view so that the top of the map is oriented towards the direction of travel The auto map rotation preferences can be configured from GO gt Preferences gt GPS gt Map Rotation Center Map on GPS option will re center the map window so the GPS position symbol is in the center if the map window Waypoint Navigation enables you to select an existing map object eg point polygon as a destination waypoint and Discover Mobile will then report the distance and bearing between your current GPS location and the selected waypoint feature to the waypoint readout window GPS Display Settings configures the GPS information displayed in the Status window See Display View Settings Tap the button to display the GPS display configuration dialog Select or clear the information you want displayed GO Menu The GO menu system of Discover Mobile is used to control and configure the application Many of the functions in the menu system are also available from the toolbars To display the men
251. nd the parameters assigned in the Setup dialog The quality of the current position fix is indicated at the bottom left of the map screen Discover Mobile allows a Precision Filter to be selected which prevents data capture when the position fix quality falls below a designated level These Filter levels are detailed below select the DGPS filter GPS Any current position fix GPS or DGPS will be accepted DGPS Requires a Differential GPS fix Real time or Post processed RTK LOW Requires a low quality Real time Differential solution RTK HIGH Requires a high quality Real time Differential solution This option is only designed for use with Trimble DGPS units Display GO gt Preferences gt GPS gt Display Re centre GPS Altitude in Speed in Default Scale 1 GPS Position Style Re centre GPS This option controls how the map window display redraws when the Current GPS Position marker approaches the edge or leaves the map window display The options are Off Map Window will re centre only when the Current GPS Position moves outside the display area 80 Discover Mobile User Guide Note Always Current GPS Position will stay fixed in the centre of the map The map window contents will redraw at the rate of the GPS Interval The Always setting can slow down map redraw performance significantly Only use this setting with simple vector maps or GPS Track Log function Nev
252. ndix C Working with Portable XRF Devices 319 7 Under Service Selection select ActiveSync Serial Port and then click Next to proceed 2 Connection wii f ZF 4 2 04 Bluetooth Connection Wizard Explore a Bluetooth device E Omega_61118 Service Selection ss ActiveSync Serial Port Please select the service s offered by this device you would like to create connection shortcuts for Security O Use a secure encrypted connection Cancel Back Next gt Ej 8 Tap Finish to complete 2 Connection Wiz gt 4 1 44 Bluetooth Connection Wizard Explore a Bluetooth device E Omega_61118 Shortcuts created Connection shortcut s for the service s you selected were successfully created To connect From the Bluetooth Manager My Connections screen double tap the connection Or tap and hold the connection icon and select Connect from the menu Ej The Olympus Innov X is now a registered Bluetooth device on the PPC 320 Discover Mobile User Guide Note If you have not previously given your Olympus Innov X a device ID name it will appear as a factory setting name usually appearing as Windows CE This can be changed within the Windows CE settings on the Olympus Innov X 9 Open the Bluetooth Manager again repeat steps 1 through 3 tap the Tools menu and select Paired Devices A Bluetooth Mana q 2 14 x Bluetooth My Shortcuts Gamin
253. ne node by node using the current GPS interval and minimum maximum tolerance values An audible beep from the PPC will be heard each time a new node is captured The beep sound cannot be disabled however the sound on the PPC can be turned down To control the node separation review the Tolerance Min and Tolerance Max values under the GO gt Preferences gt Point Capture option The minimum tolerance value should be set to a value that matches the mapping requirements and the accuracy of the GPS receiver If you are walking out a boundary with a conventional GPS receiver then a minimum tolerance of 10m should be adequate If you using DGPS you can reduce the minimum tolerance to 1m If mapping out roads or tracks using a vehicle then setting a minimum tolerance of 20 m to 100 m would be more appropriate When capturing a polyline be careful not to set the maximum tolerance to a small value Ideal values are 500 m to 1000 m If the Maximum Tolerance value is set too small say 100 m the polyline may terminate between points If this occurs tap the GPS Polyline button once to turn it off and then tap it again to commence a new polyline The GPS settings and the quality of the satellite signal will influence the time taken to capture a point For accurate point capture wait until the Please wait message disappears before moving to the next point To pause the capture of a polyline tap the Pause button on the GPS toolbar This all
254. ned when the table is first created Populating Fields The data table to be populated must include the required field types e g an integer field for Sample numbers a string field of 20 characters size for Lithology type a date field of date capture etc For information on creating tables and fields see Adding Tables Maps and Fields There are five methods of populating fields in Discover Mobile Select Value from Pick List For instance a Lithology picklist might include Granite Basalt Sandstone and Limestone Each time a rock chip is collected the user populates the Lithology column by selecting a rock type from the picklist The list can also contain sub categories for example a BIF category may contain the sequence numbers for each of the BIF layers Automatically Populate with User Defined Data Various automatically populating fields can be set as QuickPick Fields within a picklist a range of automatic functions can be applied such as Set as Constant e g for populating a sample type geologist or date column Increment by e g for incrementing sample numbers Same As Previous etc This functionality can also be used to populate custom fields with GPS specific data e g a custom Easting field could be assigned the GPS specific Map_X output data Automatically Populate with GPS Data Auto attribute with GPS specific information by assigning the preset GPS fields during the table crea
255. need to conform to a particular structure based on a previously created Named Style To create a new Named Style select either Point Line or Region object type from the Mobile Style Editor dialog Alternately styles can be created for all map object types To create a series of Named Styles type the attribute into the Description text box and define the Style Foreground and Background definitions 32 Discover Mobile User Guide To create a new style definition click the New Style button this will insert a new record for style definition To delete a style definition highlight the designated field and click the Delete Style button To reorder the current Named Style highlight the designated field and use either the Move Up or Move Down button Note To save a Description to the table when a style is applied an auto pick field can be set for the Table and Field See Linking a Style to Tables and Setting Auto fields Mobile Style Editor ors Create new or modify existing Named Styles for Discover Mobile Co Input File Hobie Se Points Lines Regions Description Basalt Sandstone Shale Limestone Click to add new entry Transparent Transparent j BJ o Output File Mobile Style C Discover Mobile Encom_DM_Namestyles New Style Library bt id Save Cancel Regions Named Style definition 3 Data Preparation 33 Note Linking a Style to Ta
256. neral symbol Color ET Rotation angle deg Background none Hav Box a Effects Sample L Bold L Italic Style dialog to control displayed symbols Character effects such as bolding halos drop shadows and italics are also available 10 Working with Objects 223 Line Style Line style properties can be modified for all line types When a line is selected the line style dialog appears DiscoverMobile er 23 16 lok OH ae a RE ct Line style dialog Available controls include line style line thickness in either pixels or points 32 points equals 2 54 cm or 1 inch and colour A preview sample of the line style is also displayed 224 Discover Mobile User Guide Fill Style This style controls fill patterns colour and outline style of polygon objects DiscoverMobile e 3 18 ok Background oo a Acl Fill style dialog All standard Maplnfo Professional fill patterns and colours are available The colour of both the pattern foreground and background can be modified The line style of the polygon border can also be adjusted using similar controls to the Line Style dialog Setting Default Styles for GPS Located Objects Choose GO gt GPS gt Default Styles to define graphical styles of various GPS object types point polyline polygon track logs etc Current Position Style Sets a preferred display style for the Current Position Sym
257. new object into the table the Quick Pick options will be used to populate the specified fields Note that for the Increment Decrement by and Same as previous options an initial field value will need to be specified otherwise numeric fields will start incrementing from 0 The following Auto Fields are available for use System Date populates the field with the current date as set on the Mobile device Start gt Settings gt System gt Clock This capture field must have a Date type Alternatively a string field of 20 characters width can be utilised System Time populates the field with the current time as set on the Mobile device Start gt Settings gt System gt Clock This field must be a string field of 20 characters width Set Constant Value assigns the user specified value every time a new object is created e g date sampler data type mesh size etc This value must entered into the Value column Same As Previous will update the current field with the same attribute as the previous record This function will only work if there is an existing record in the table with an attribute value Discover Mobile User Guide Increment by increments the current numeric value by any user specified value The increment value must be entered in the Value column default of 1 This function will work for both numeric and character string data fields For string fields it will add the increment value a
258. nstrated in the sample Named Styles dataset section previously migrating Named Styles libraries and related Quick Pick options between mobile devices is straight forward process Additionally field data templates and the necessary data and backup directories can also be replicated onto multiple devices using the procedure outlined below Ls On one device create the following directories on the storage card Field Templates stores templates for each field data table e g Soil_template These are not to be altered by the field user Field Data contains the working data files cloned from the templates e g Soil Lag etc 10 Working with Objects 239 Backups daily or weekly backups of the working data files are saved here using GO gt File gt Save Table Copy As e g Soil_AZ23 01 07 Config all named style libraries and associated quick pick files are stored here Alternatively separate PickList and NamedStyles directories could be created as with the example data Either on the desktop or on Discover Mobile create the various templates It is generally easiest to create the most complex one first then clone the other templates from this first table altering each as necessary Save or transfer these templates into the Field Templates directory on the mobile device Clone these templates and create the appropriate field data files soil lag etc Save these into the Field Data direct
259. ntire Layer ceecccceeeeeecccceeeeeeeceeeeeeseeceeeeeeeeeaeeeenseeaeeeeeeneaee 114 Map ROTO Meee ora etree A LET eA RA AAE NEE ARAT ARANA TE LAROS RASAS 114 Map Grids niine a a a O ee 114 GPS Oyerlay iranier a a a ea EE e 114 Scale Barsnri in ienai aee ele ts 114 Show Toolbars sayz see oeri eeesed ee Staessen a orada ai ed aN faae taa oai iait 115 Stat s WINJOW nosi iaai wa aie s i iiaa id anes 115 Table BrOWSO egie T A E 119 Table Structure snien iai eed een ed ee 119 E Cit MOMs EEEE EE L E E TT 119 Buffett ca E A E ae A ee 120 Ect MOTE dae ict iaviciins ect eg ee eee cea 121 Clear Custom Labels and Annotations ccccccceeeeeeseeeseteeeteneees 122 DIGI OS EOE EE E E LEE ENE E EE T E T 122 Raster TransparenC yoso eii a a a a aia 122 Selected Point Location 0 cecceeceeeceeeneeeeeteeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeesaeeeseaeees 123 Selected Object Style eeecccecsceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeceaeeeeeaaeeseeeeeeeeaeeseaees 123 Quick Pick Options 3 areeiro eia aate enaa e iara AAEE aaa 123 Hardware Button OptionS ssssesseeessseessieesisesrissrrnesrnessrnsssrnssrn nns 124 Named Styles erisin rnai aena eae anaana iadi 124 New Object Styles cceesccecccceeeseeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeesaaeeseneees 125 Range Slesia aei satik aai utai aa diaa aaea oi iiia 125 Apply Range Style cscs iini eine ie ties trii iiaa 125 FiS MEDU israse a EER EE A EE R 125 Recent Files cic cicdelinn deel ii bonnet a A REE nee 127 New TANO oa
260. o Picklist has been defined for this field table A tick indicates this filed is a special field which will be automatically populated from the mobile GPS data Edit indicates a Picklist has been defined for this field table o Cee tive New table definition with special fields 3 Data Preparation 39 Create Picklist Once all of the table fields have been defined Picklists can be created for the allocated fields To create a Picklist click on the New button next to the field you wish to create the Picklist Several controls are available to create Picklists these include adding Picklist items reordering and importing To reorder the current Picklist highlight the designated item and use either the g Move Up or Move Down buttons To add another item into the Picklist click the Add button and specify the item name If GPS derived data needs to be recorded the Special Item button allows the addition of items which will be automatically populated which the respective data type Examples of this include Map_X Map_Y Fix_Quality and FixNumSat mj m Picklist item can be further subdivided into Categories these allow a Picklist item to have subitems An example of this would be a rock type Picklist within the Picklist a category may be called volcanic this category may contain items such as tuff rhyolite basalt etc If a validation or value list is available in ei
261. o information such as assay result density copper geochemical results divided by area 156 Discover Mobile User Guide Below is an example of a range thematic map showing the use of colour to modulate the copper data value at each sample site in a geochemical sampling grid DiscoverMobile Copper_Hill_Solls J by Au 0 04 to 0 33 0 03 to 0 04 U U2 to 0 03 UULtwe vu 4 re 399 toU UL 18 0 a Rlak OF iF X mae IRA Oo Ranged thematic map of geochemical sampling for copper using colour Bar Chart Thematic Maps Bar charts can be used to analyse multiple variables per record Comparing the size of bars in each chart can be useful for obtaining information about a set of values in a table or comparing one bar in all the bar charts can also help draw conclusions about a variable across all records in a table Thin lines extending in the opposite direction to the bar chart orientation indicate negative values in the column Negative values do not display in stacked bar charts An example of a bar chart thematic map using assay geochemical sample results is shown below 8 Working with Maps 157 DiscoverMobile e 4c 3 10 X Copper_Hill_Solls re QQ Aly il x we FP Bc Example bar chart thematic map with expanded legend Pie Thematic Maps Pie charts are multi variable displays and can be used on a map to analyse several variables at a time You can compare the size of the pie wedges in each chart
262. o receive new drawing objects points lines or polygons by setting that layer as the insertion layer see Setting the Insertion Layer If an insertion layer has not been set you will be prompted to select one the first time you use any of the drawing tools This layer will then remain as the insertion layer until you either close it or select another layer For more information on working with layers refer to Managing Layers The insertion layer setting does not affect the storage of GPS located objects see Assigning GPS Capture Layers Discover Mobile provides a cosmetic layer for storing temporary map objects Unlike MapInfo Professional the cosmetic layer is optional in Discover Mobile For information about ding a cosmetic layer see Adding a Cosmetic Layer You can use the cosmetic layer to store temporary map objects rather than add them to an existing layer Any objects placed into the cosmetic layer will be permanently deleted if you exit Discover Mobile without saving them To save Cosmetic objects to a new table TAB use GO gt File gt Save Table Copy As Using the Drawing tools is further discussed in Working with Objects 5 Mobile Interface 63 jl Sl Al The tools available from the Draw Edit toolbar are Use the Symbol button to add a symbol point Tap the screen to insert the symbol See Creating Points and Symbols Use the Structure Symbol button to add a structural symbol Tap the screen to insert the s
263. o store the point objects and attribute data 180 Discover Mobile User Guide Structure measurements can be recorded to any open map table in Discover Mobile providing the table contains the required Custom Fields for structure mapping The following numeric fields must be present in the table in order to record structure data Map_X Map_Y Struct_Strike Struct_DipDir Struct_Dip Struct_Code The Map_X and Map_Y fields are used to store the easting and northing values of the structural data measurement and are automatically read from the GPS if it is connected and turned on For more information see e Azimuth Measurements e Structure Dip and Plunge Angles e Structure Codes and Symbol Libraries e Adding Structural Data Fields e Customizing the Structure Symbol Picklist Azimuth Measurements The orientation information for structural measurements may be recorded using either a Strike or Dip Direction measurement Strike orientation measurements are interpreted by Discover Mobile using the right hand rule convention Therefore all strike measurements are converted to dip directions by adding 90 If you intend to record data using the Strike convention you need to make sure the structure data table contains at least the Map_X Map_Y Struct_Strike Struct _Dip Struct _Code fields To record data using a Dip direction measurement make sure the table contains at least the Map_X Map_Y Struct_DipDir Struct _Dip Struct_C
264. ode fields If you include both the Struct_DipDir and Struct_Strike fields in a table Discover Mobile will automatically calculate and populate both fields from the measurement data you enter 9 Working with Tables 181 Many structural codes measure the direction of plunge rather than a strike or dip direction for example a lineation or fold axis For these codes the azimuth information is always used as plunge direction regardless of whether strike or dip direction has been selected Structure Dip and Plunge Angles A dip or plunge value may be entered for most of the structural types that Discover Mobile supports Selected structural types such as wrench faults trend lines monoclines etc do not require a dip value Discover Mobile expects a numeric value of between 0 and 90 degrees to be entered for the dip However there may be instances where a dip measurement cannot be measured for a variety of reasons Because dip values are stored in numeric columns the field value cannot be blank Therefore if you leave the dip entry box blank to indicate no dip measurement was taken Discover Mobile will automatically store a value of 99 in the dip column to represent a blank entry If you subsequently process the structural measurements table using the Structure Symbol utility in Discover it will interpret a value of 99 as a null dip value and will not display a dip value label next to the measurements Structure Codes and Symbol
265. ogy Field UNITNAME Picklist Name Mt ISA Geology Units Picklist Description On the Import MapInfo Table Styles dialog select a MapInfo Professional table from the Table dropdown If the picklist isn t open in MapInfo Professional navigate to the table using the Open Table button Select the field from the MapInfo Professional table which contains the style description from the Field dropdown EEdit the Picklist Name if required Type a Picklist Description if required Click OK to import the picklist 352 Discover Mobile User Guide Mobile Picklist Mobile Picklists Auntraion Sustace Geology Codes on Picklist Name Australian Surface Geology Codes Picklist Description Imported from Discover Mobile OK Cancel On the Import Mobile Picklist dialog select a Mobile Picklist from the Mobile Picklists dropdown If no picklists are displayed navigate to the table using the Browse button and locate the folder containing Mobile Picklists Edit the Picklist Name if required Type a Picklist Description if required Click OK to import the picklist Appendix D Digitizing and Data Entry in Discover 353 Mobile Style Discover Mobile Style Mobile Style Name Australian Surface Geology Codes v Picklist Name Pustralian Surface Geology Codes Picklist Description Imported from Discover Mobile OK Cancel On the Import Mobile Style dialog select a Mobile Named Style from the Mobile Style
266. ogy Unitnames X Description Surface Geology of Australia Unitnames 1 1 000 000 scale 2 Styles 289 items Alluvium 38485 Alluvium 38494 Amamoor beds Amphibolite 74334 Andover Intrusion Aranbanga Volcanic Group Argyle Lamproite Arrowie Formation Ashburton Formation Style Table Options Output Type Source Table Thematic Map Table sa_Geology Column UNITNAME 2 In the Picklists box select the picklist 3 In the Styles box select the style you want to apply Note By default all styles are selected if you wish to apply certain styles select those styles 4 In the Style Table Options box select Source Table 5 Select the table you want to apply the style description 6 Select the table column you want to apply the style description Ta Click Apply Appendix D Digitizing and Data Entry in Discover 363 To apply multiple styles to a table as a Thematic Map 1 Select Data Entry gt Apply Picklist to open the Apply Style dialog change to a Table or as a Thematic Map Australian Surface Geology Unitnames Description Surface Geology of Australia Unitnames 1 1 000 000 scale 2 Alluvium 38485 Alluvium 38494 Amamoor beds Amphibolite 74334 Andover Intrusion Aranbanga Volcanic Group Argyle Lamproite Arowie Formation Ashburton Formation Style Table Options Output Type Source Table Thematic Map Table sa_Geology Column UNITNAME
267. ojection of an existing table as a template particularly if you wish to add several new fields to an existing table You can use any open table as a template for the new table To clone a table from an existing table 1 Choose GO gt File gt New Table command The New Table dialog is displayed 2 Under Create Layer tap the browse button and type a name for the new table and select a folder in which to store the table 3 Tap the Clone From button 4 Select the table you want to clone and tap OK 5 To add and remove fields in the new table tap the Setup Fields button Make sure that you fully define the table structure when it is cloned because it cannot be changed later 6 When you are finished modifying the table structure tap OK and the new TAB file will be created Any Quick Pick Fields setup for the source table will be copied across for the cloned table No data will be transferred to the new table from the old table only the table structure will be copied To copy the data and structure see Copying Tables 9 Working with Tables 171 Using Templates It is good practice to create a standard set of templates from which tables are cloned see Cloning Tables This saves time when creating new tables and these templates can be provided to all field users to ensure that field data collection is standardised It also minimises data loss in the case of user error multiple daily or weekly files
268. olbar are summarised below and described in more detail in e Capturing Points Capturing Lines Capturing Elevation Data Capturing Structure Objects GPS Point Track Log button turns on off the Point Track Log function Discover Mobile can record a continuous Track Log showing your path as a series of points The point track log is recorded to a GPS_Point_Log table The log table can be configured to record some or all of the GPS attribute information available for each point The points are collected at the same rate as the GPS Connection interval which can be configured under the GO gt Preferences command For more information see GPS Point Log Discover Mobile User Guide GPS Line Track Log button turns on off the Line Track Log function To activate the function tap the button and then setup the GPS attribute fields you wish to log Discover Mobile will then record a Line Track Log showing your path The Line Track Log is made up of a series of consecutive line segments rather than one continuous polyline The reason for this is that GPS Line Track Log function needs to record GPS attribute information for each segment in your travelled path Therefore if you wish to examine the GPS attribute information for any segment of your path at a later date the information is readily available If you wish to record a single continuous line e g a fault trace or track then use the GPS Line Capture function instead You can use the T
269. olbar to configure the GPS information in the Status window The items available for display in the Status Window are described in Status Window 8 Working with Maps 153 Working with Maps In this section Thematic Mapping Controlling the Map Projection Raster Transparency For information about individual commands used to control the map display see Map Menu Thematic Mapping The display of map objects points lines and polygons can be modified with a temporary fill pattern or colour based on the value of attributes associated with an object eg geology type size geological age date Such shading is called thematic mapping or theme mapping An example of a thematic map display is shown below Discover Mobile r 4c 2 57 X Copper_Hill_Reglonal_Geology by Age Devonian 31 Devonian intusions 4 tanler Ordikklan Intrusions 7 Later Ordivklan Intrusions Ordiviclan Ordivician Ladusions Ordivician Lnoushes Slurlan ra Q Q amp ij x mee OOS Thematic geology map based on the ages of mapped unit e Creating a Theme Theme Type 154 Discover Mobile User Guide Note Thematic Legend e Modifying Themes Creating a Theme For a permanent style modification use Range Styles When creating a theme objects with attributes of similar value are shaded with the same thematic colour To add a theme layer to a map use the GO gt Map gt Create Theme command The
270. olyline or polygon e g point Object Style for the specified object Type the adjacent browse button allows the appropriate graphical style to be set e g blue triangles for rock chips red cross hatched region for granite outcrop Capture Table optional specify the open table into which this named style will be captured e g soil_sampling Quick Pick options optional for the specified capture table define Quick Pick options relevant for this data type For example a size field in the table may assigned as Set Constant Value of 80 To remove a Named Style select the style and tap the Delete button Multiple Named Style Libraries can be created and edited using the pull down list at the top of the dialog 230 Discover Mobile User Guide If the Capture Table option is not set the styles are not table specific and the new object will be stored in the current insertion table regardless of the object type If the Quick Pick option is not set the only Quick Pick options that will be applied are those that have been set in the table with GO gt Edit gt Quick Pick Options Creating Named Styles on the Desktop For non table specific named styles the structure of the Named Styles file used by Discover Mobile is identical to a ColourMap table used in Discover You can use the ColourMap function in Discover to create a Named Style file for Discover Mobile The procedure for creating a Named Style f
271. om fields Only use the following creation and editing procedures in Discover Mobile if you do not have access to the desktop Pick isi Editor tool which is much quicker and easier to use To set a Quick Pick option select the GO gt Edit gt Quick Pick Options menu option Select the required table from the pull down list at the top of the following dialog The table view will show three columns Field name Action and Value Quick Pick options can only set for custom fields not preset GPS fields Custom fields will have a Quick Pick option displayed in the Action column though it is not recommended to set Quick Pick options for Structural fields An easier way to add QuickPick Auto field to Create a Pick List in Discover Mobile Tap the Quick Pick pull down arrow adjacent to the target field e g Sample_number A list of available Quick Pick options will be displayed Select the required option e g Increment by If a value or character string is required by the Quick Pick option Set as Constant Value Increment by and Decrement by type this into the adjacent Value column Both the Increment by and Decrement by options will automatically set a default value of 1 9 Working with Tables 177 DiscoverMobile en 4c 4 28 ok Table Copper_Hill_Soils v Set Constant Value Same As Previous The Quick Pick list Press OK to save these settings Upon capturing a
272. omponents of an expression to evaluate first This is called precedence By convention certain operators are assigned different levels of precedence Those with the highest level are evaluated first The following table lists the Discover Mobile operators in the order in which they are evaluated Operators at the same level of precedence are evaluated from left to right Highest priority parenthesis exponentiation negation multiplication division addition subtraction not and Lowest priority y or 9 Working with Tables 193 Functions A drop down list of functions is available to assist in creating the SQL text of the query DiscoverMobile er 4c 4 58 lok Abs num Cos num UNITNAME Int num Maximum num num Round num Sin num Tan num CurDate Day date Month date Columns Weekday date Functions available in a drop down list from the Query dialog A query can include one or more function calls In the following list num is any numeric expression or value e g 5 or a column in a table containing numeric values str is any string expression e g km or a column in a table containing strings and obj is any object expression e g an object in a table Math Functions Description Abs num Returns the absolute value of a number Cos num Returns the cosine of a number num is in radians Int num Returns the integer whole number portion of a number Maximum num
273. on will be automatically created Creating Structure Objects First ensure that you have created a table containing all the mandatory structure field columns to collect GPS and structural measurement attribute information 1 Tap Add Structure Symbol tool on the Drawing toolbar or choose GO gt Tools gt Add Structure Symbol 2 Select the appropriate Structure Type e g Bedding from the pull down list at the top of the dialog e7 4c 2 59 lok Structure Type Bedding v Structural Data Dip Direction nuog oo Be Preview shown at double size DiscoverMobile Entering structural data Discover Mobile User Guide 3 In the Structural Data entry boxes type the Strike or Dip Direction using the number pad on the right and also the Dip box Dip values must be between 0 and 90 degrees If you leave the box empty Discover Mobile will assume no dip is to be recorded and will enter a value of 99 in the table 4 To change between the Strike and Dip Direction conventions tap the Setup button to display the configuration dialog Select the appropriate option to record azimuth using Dip Direction and Dip or Strike and Dip right hand rule DiscoverMobile e 53 00 ok Symbol Set Australian Symbols Mod AGSO fg Record Structure Orientation by Dip Direction and Dip C Strike and Dip Right Hand Rule _ i Specifying the Symbol Set and preferred Structure Orientation
274. onal and copied to Discover Mobile or you can create a new table in Discover Mobile using the GO gt File gt New Table menu to create a new table 244 Discover Mobile User Guide Creating a Hotlink To create hotlink attribute 1 Add a map object to your table Tap on the map object with the Information Tool to display the current objects attributes Click the dropdown button located next to the hotlink field You will be presented with an Edit List Click the Edit List option DiscoverMobile a 4c 1 51 lok Copper Hill Soils_Hotlink res oem Hotlinking a field Tap on the Auto Field list at the bottom of the screen Use the scroll bar to display the available hotlink options e Link File Link Image e Link New Audio e Link New Pocket Word e Link New Pocket Excel Link New Custom 10 Working with Objects 245 DiscoverMobile e 51 56 ok Add Quick Pick Selecting the Hotlink type 5 Select the appropriate hotlink file type and tap OK to return to the attribute list In the pull down list next to the column designated to store the hotlink path select the link new file entry e g Link New Pocket Excel document is displayed if the Link New Pocket Excel Auto Field was selected DiscoverMobile e 21 58 ok Copper Hill Soils_Hotlink ems Co f gt Link New Poc s Edit List 6 Pocket Excel will then load and ask you for a file name or new file To cre
275. ons will still consume power while the device is switched off To preserve battery power when you are not using your mobile device make sure all applications are closed before turning the power off To close all applications 1 Tap Start gt Settings navigate to the System tab and then tap the Memory icon 2 Select the Running Programs tab and stop all running applications on the device Alternatively perform a Soft Reset 6 Using the GO Menu 69 About Menu GO gt About Use the About command to display information about the Discover Mobile installation version and copyright details DiscoverMobile r 4c 3 51 lok r m Discover Mobile Version 3 8 Copyright c 2013 7 Pitney Bowes Software Pty Ltd All Rights Reserved Web http www pbencom com Support software support pb com About dialog Licensing Menu GO gt Licensing Use the Licensing command to display information about the Discover Mobile licence including version UnitID and Licence No details 70 Discover Mobile User Guide File Zoom Tools Help DiscoverMobile en q 1 45 lok Licence Details Licence save The system date must be set correctly for the licence to validate Licence Information Version 3 8 0 Name User Company PBS UnitID 00700CB420132 Licensing dialog Preferences Menu GO gt Preferences The Preferences menu is used to control various systems session and dis
276. ored By default this is setto the My Document s folder however it is strongly recommended this is changed to a removable storage card e g SD or CF memory card so that your data will not be lost if the battery on the PPC becomes fully drained Current Project This sets the current project folder By default after data is transferred using the Desktop DiscoverMobile Manager tool it will be set to the last transferred project directory Set Individually advanced users only The following settings will be automatically set when the Project Root and Current Project is set they should only be modified by advanced users By default they will be placed in the Project directory or relevant sub folders To manually over ride the project settings first change the Project settings to none set 6 Using the GO Menu 89 Track Log You can specify a preferred directory in which to save your GPS Track Log files By default this is in the current project directory Pick Lists You can specify a preferred directory in which to store and save pick list files which can be used in the Discover Mobile browser By default Discover Mobile will store the picklist files in the Encom DM Picklists directory in the current project directory Named Styles You can specify a preferred directory in which to save your Named Style Library files By default Discover Mobile will store the Named Style Library files in the Encom_ DM Namestyl
277. ormats e Tabl eName_ FieldName txt this naming convention means that the pick list file will only be available for the field name in the specified table name For example if your table is called Geology and the field you want to use the pick list with is called Lithology then you would give the pick list the name Geol ogy_Lithology txt This is the default convention for pick list files which are automatically created in Discover Mobile e FieldName txt this naming convention means that the pick list file will be available for all tables which contain the specified field name For example if you call your pick list Comment s txt then that pick list will be available for all tables which contain a field called Comments This Picklist convention is referred to as a global Picklist To create a global Picklist select the Global picklist check box It will be available globally for any table with the matching field name Rename Picklist and Table To rename a MapInfo Professional Table and associated Picklists click the Rename bution 42 Discover Mobile User Guide Saving Table and Picklists When all the table fields have been defined and Picklists created click the Save button You will be prompted to add an ID and Modified field if they do not exist in the table which are required for Discover Mobile and the ID will be populated with the row number Table Merge The Table Merge tool enables modifications perform
278. ory Open these field tables into either a Maplnfo Professional or Discover Mobile window and create a Geoset session file On the desktop use the Tools gt Tool Manager gt MapX Geoset Utility in Discover Mobile use the GO gt File gt Save Geoset function Place this Geoset in the Field Data directory In Discover Mobile set the GO gt Preferences gt Directories gt Named Styles options for Named Styles and Pick Lists to point to the Config directory or whatever directories will be used for these files Create any required Pick Lists and name them after their destination fields in the existing tables Place them in the Pick List directory e g Config Create a Named Style library and set the required Quick Pick options for each style type Setup is now complete Close Discover Mobile and copy the four directories created in step 1 to a directory on the desktop PC Field Setup Disconnect the mobile device from the PC and connect the next PPC to the PC Ensure that Discover Mobile is not running on the PPC and then copy the four directories from the PC to the mobile device On the mobile device set the GO gt Preferences gt Directories gt Named Styles options for Named Styles and Pick Lists to point to the new Config directory 240 Discover Mobile User Guide 11 Ensure that any user specific Quick Pick options i e sampler name or initials are configured via GO gt Edit gt Named Styles
279. ot have a separate Cancel button and rely completely on the OK button to dismiss the window se DiscoverMobile er 10 50 ok E GPS HE Connection GPS Protocol Trimble Sim Setup Trimble sin a The Discover Mobile software has been especially designed for users familiar with MapInfo Professional Existing MapInfo Professional users will find many similarities between the Discover Mobile interface and the desktop MapInfo Professional application 4 Getting Started 51 Data Formats Discover Mobile reads and writes native MapInfo Professional Tab files and can access raster data stored in BMP TIFF JPG GIF or ECW file formats providing the images have an associated TAB file Discover Mobile cannot directly open files which do not have TAB files already associated with them The only exception to this is raster images saved in GeoTIFF format Any Tab files which reference non native MapInfo Professional data such as Excel XLS Text TXT or MS Access MDB files cannot be opened in Discover Mobile These non native data types must first be converted into MapInfo Professional Native format using File gt Save Copy As menu before copying the data to the PPC for use in Discover Mobile Map Window The Discover Mobile desktop uses a layered map window display which is similar to MapInfo Professional except that Discover Mobile has a single map window Each open table is displayed in the map window as a Layer
280. oth wireless GPS make sure to turn off the Bluetooth radio when it is not in use This can be carried out using the Bluetooth Manager Charging Before venturing into the field make sure the Pocket PC is fully charged Make sure the device is connected to the Universal Desktop cradle or AC Adaptor when not in the field If the device fails to turn on as a result of extended use the Pocket PC will need to be fully charged and a normal reset performed before the charge indicator light will flash again Discover Mobile User Guide External Batteries Invest in at least one external battery to extend the life of the Pocket PC between charging The external battery or expansion pack is removable and rechargeable and can also be used to run PC CF or SD cards depending on the type of expansion pack Charging takes place when the Pocket PC is in the Desktop cradle or on the optional battery charger For extended periods of field work it is worth investing in more than one external battery so one can be charging while the other is in use Alternatively a portable 12 volt battery may be purchased relatively inexpensively which will provide a continuous power source to the Pocket PC in the field although the battery must be carried at all times If using external batteries with a PC device make sure the batteries are connected properly and fully charged If the batteries go completely flat and will not turn on connect them to a power source an
281. otocol 270 Discover Mobile User Guide Note Note Desktop post processing of field data requires installation of Discover 10 1 or later as well as Trimble GPS Pathfinder Office 4 00 or later There are three distinct phases to DGPS usage 1 Configuring Discover Mobile for DGPS Work 2 Field Data Collection The field rover DGPS unit generates a Trimble Rover SSF file which is captured by Discover Mobile along with the MapInfo Professional TAB files containing the field data geochemical samples structural and geological mapping etc 3 Post processing Rover SSF File Correction At the conclusion of data collection the relevant closest reference base station is accessed via internet or the data is accessed electronically and the appropriate Trimble Base Station SSF file is acquired with reference to the field data time stamp The Base Station SSF file which incorporates the base station s known position coordinates is used to calculate a GPS error correction This correction is then applied to the Rover SSF file Rover File Export the corrected SSF file is exported as a Maplnfo Professional MIF file to allow field data correction e Field data correction the field data TAB files are corrected using the corrected Rover SSF file now a MIF file This section only details Discover Mobile setup configuration and data correction for Post Processing DGPS with a Trimble DGPS unit it does not c
282. over setup configuration for Real Time RTK DGPS Configuring Discover Mobile for DGPS Work The Discover Mobile Preferences screen GO gt Preferences contains a number of options under the GO gt GPS gt Connection section integral to DGPS configuration and Rover file generation GPS Protocol Ensure that this option is set to Trimble 11 Working with the GPS 271 Setup After assigning the GPS Protocol as Trimble the Setup option should now indicate Trimble Select the button adjacent to this option to open the General tab of the Trimble DGPS Configuration dialog This screen allows the control of various parameters which affect the efficiency and precision of the DGPS position These parameters are fully detailed in Trimble Protocol When these parameters have been set press OK to return to the main Preferences screen SSF Logging Set this option to On to create a Trimble SSF format Rover file with the same name as the file into which data is being captured This rover file is required to allow postprocessing differential correction to be carried out on captured data but needs to be populated with one of the following options DiscoverMobile e 4 19 lok GPS Connection GPS Protocol Trimble Setup Trimble Update Interval 5 0 sec Preferred Interval 5 0 sec M Stop after error 20 M SSF Logging On Post Processing Continuous E Point Capture M Tolerance Min 10 0m M Tolerance Max 100 0 m Mi
283. overMobile DiscoverMobile Raster to subset Manager lt Manager _ other map data for Discover Mobile When you are preparing your data on the desktop you should collect all the relevant files and place them in your Project Directory set in the Discover Mobile DiscoverMobile Manager tool inthe Encom DM Tables directory Similarly once you have retrieved data from the device via the tool the modified and new Discover Mobile data tables will be inthe Encom DM Tables WM directory which will need to be manually updated to the Encom DM Tables copy 3 Data Preparation 27 DiscoverMobile Manager a Manage Discover Mobile data Discover Mobile Data Location Directory C Discover Mobile Copy Data Tables Picklists NameStyles Image Files Hotlink Files Device Connection Status Connected The first step in using the desktop tools is to specify a directory to store and copy data for Tables Picklists Name Styles Image Files and Hotlink Files The specified directory will be used by the Style Editor Picklist Editor Range Style Editor and Table Merge tools Navigate to DiscoverMobile gt DiscoverMobile Manager and browse to a folder on your local disk or network drive where the mobile data is located e g C ProgramData Encom Discover Mobile Data You can then do the following see Discover Mobile Workflow Specify Data to Transfer Preparing Tables for Mobile Dev
284. ows the user to move around and determine where the feature being mapped extends e g where precisely the fault trend continues When this has been determined return to the position where the next node is to be added and then tap the Pause button again to continue capture You can also use the Pause button to capture polylines one node at a time by pausing capture while moving to the new node position 210 Discover Mobile User Guide JE To complete polyline capture tap the GPS Polylines Capture button again If the capture layer has not been assigned you are prompted to select a table Depending on the options selected under GO gt Preferences gt Object Creation a number of dialogs may appear which will allow you to select and enter line style and field values For more information about object creation options see Setting Object Creation Preferences and Field Data Entry and Editing To add a node to the polyline tap the Insert Node icon once and a new node will be added using the current GPS coordinates Capturing Regions Open the region capture table see Opening Tables containing fields for recording the GPS polygon data and custom fields see Assigning GPS Capture Layers If a GPS capture table has not been assigned when data is captured a dialog will appear allowing selection of the capture layer To capture points along a closed boundary regions outcrops paddocks etc tap the GPS Polygon Capture button on the
285. oximity to selected objects 120 Polygon selection 91 216 Polygonal selection 59 216 R Polyline 95 Polyline line button 63 202 Port for GPS 72 Portable XRF 311 Power is lost 8 Precedence of operators 192 Preferences menu 70 Preferences gt Directories 88 Preferences gt GPS gt Connection 71 Preferences gt GPS gt Display 79 Preferences gt GPS gt Map Rotation 81 Preferences gt GPS gt Point Creation 77 Preferences gt Object Creation 82 Preferences gt Session 83 Preferences gt System Settings 85 Previous View button 143 Previous Zoom button 60 150 Previous zoom level 58 Projection management 164 of tables 130 Projection of display 51 Radius selection 59 91 215 Range of values for themes 102 154 Range styles 240 applying 227 applying with XRF capture 227 334 creating 240 creating on desktop 242 editing 242 Ranged Thematic Map 155 Ranged theme 102 Raster images 165 Recentre GPS 79 Rectangular selection 59 91 215 Remove a layer 137 Remove All button of themes 103 Remove annotations 122 Remove button of themes 103 on Layer Control 137 Remove custom labels 122 384 Discover Mobile User Guide Restore and open files 125 Rotate the view 114 144 Rotation angle 145 Rotation Degree Tolerance 146 Run button for queries 97 189 S Safe storage media 8 Satellite positions viewing 331 Saving a copy 187 Saving Views 60 150 Scale mode 60 Screen interaction 50 Screen width 116 151 Select a
286. p redraw by up to 100 To ensure the best map redraw performance make sure that all your map tables share a common projection To convert a number of vector tables to the same projection 1 In Maplnfo Professional select Discover gt Table Utilities gt Multi Table Reproject Reproject multiple tables Tables to reproject Surface_Geology AMG Zone 55 AGD SectionLines AMG Zone 55 AGD Collars AMG Zone 55 AGD Open Table New Projection Select All Unselect All Options C Overwrite existing tables Create new tables IV In specific directory with name suffix D Data Mt Isa Duilling Field filename _reproject Cancel Help 2 Check the box next to the tables to re project or choose Select All 3 Press New Projection and select a projection from the pull down lists 4 Choose to Overwrite existing tables or Create new tables 5 Type a directory location 6 Choose to annotate new tables with name suffix 7 Click OK to create the newly projected tables 22 Discover Mobile User Guide To reproject an image into a new projection Preferably the same projection as the vector data 1 2 Ensure the registered image is open within MapInfo Professional Open Discover gt Images menu and select Reproject Image Ensure that the correct source image is selected in the top pull down list Use the Browse button to set the New projection Browse for an output directory location and
287. picklist D e e Description Delete the selected style Rename the selected style Edit the selected style Moves the selected style up and down in the Styles box 1 Select Data Entry gt Picklist Manager to open the Picklist Manager 2 Under Picklists click the Configure button and select the Create new picklist option The Create Picklist dialog is displayed j Create Picklist E Berana Picklist Name Picklist Description E Create from existing picklist Ci Encom Point Styles No Objects Point Objects Line Objects Polygon Objects OK Cancel Appendix D Digitizing and Data Entry in Discover 347 3 10 Type the Picklist Name and Picklist Description Select the type of picklist Point Line Polygon or No object You can also create a picklist from an existing picklist and then modify it Click OK to create a blank picklist Under the Styles box click the GJ Add New Style button The MapInfo style dialog is displayed from which you can define a style for the selected object type Click OK and type in a description for the new style e g Shale into the New Style Description dialog Click OK Repeat steps 6 and 7 until you have defined all the required styles in this list Use the other controls below the Styles box to Delete Rename Edit and order styles in the pickilist Click the Save button To create a picklist from an existing dataset 1 2 Sel
288. play settings in Discover Mobile It is also used to configure the communication settings for an attached GPS receiver The GPS configuration settings are described in the GPS Connection section of this chapter The Preferences dialog allows you to configure the following parameters Connection GPS Protocol Setup Update Interval Preferred Interval Stop after error SSF Logging Post Processing Point Capture Tolerance Minimum and Tolerance Maximum Minimum Sample Points Precision Filter Display Re centre GPS Altitude units Speed units Default Scale GPS Position Style Map Rotation Degree Tolerance Speed Tolerance When Off Object Creation Edit Attributes Named Styles Point XY Editing Session Autoload last Map Projection User Projection Distance Units Area Units Grid Overlay Waypoint Tolerance 6 Using the GO Menu 71 e System Settings Busy Cursor Font Size Confirm Deletion Hardware Buttons Alert Configuration e Directories Project Root Current Project Track Log Pick Lists Named Styles Hotlink files New Tables Image Files nE DiscoverMobile en 43 59 ok E GPS HE Connection M GPS Protocol Trimble Sim Setup Trimble Sirr Update Interval 2 0 sec Prefeired Interval 5 0 sec Stop after error 20 SSF Logging On Post Processing None HE Point Capture M Tolerance Min 10 0 m M Tolerance Max 100 0 m M Min Sample Points 1 points Precision Alter
289. processing efficiency The Trimble SSF format Rover file created when the SSF Logging option is set to On in Preferences will also be saved to the same location as its parent file with the same file name and a SSF suffix GPS Connection To connect to the DGPS either select GO gt GPS gt Connect or open the GPS toolbar by selecting the GPS button and then select the Connect button 274 Discover Mobile User Guide a ie ft ewe secede wc wccccebscccccccdcccccccccbccccncccbesccccccdscce J TETIT Pm RHA AQ Mb Mle i x co S e aali el The initial GPS connection screen tap the screen once to refresh the display This will display a Connecting to GPS message tap the screen once to refresh Once connected a GPS Overlay red target will be placed on the screen with a Waiting for GPS Time message whist a position fix is acquired This may take some time depending on the GPS preferences set number of satellites available amount of overhead cover eg foliage and the amount of sky visible due to cliffs buildings etc To monitor the current number of acquired satellites and their strength select GO gt GPS gt Monitor Satellite Status 11 Working with the GPS 275 sA Pied Pe AHR ARO le i x co gt 2 h al B Initial display while DGPS unit acquires satellite feed 4 10 13 Ok Date 27 4 2005 a Time 10 13 51 Latitude 37 884840 Longitude A 145 001767 7
290. pture an object s X and Y coordinates can be manually edited 6 Using the GO Menu 83 Session GO gt Preferences gt Session Autoload last Map Projection User Projection Distance In Area In e Grid Overlay e Waypoint Tolerance Autoload last This option functions in a similar manner the Quick Start dialog in Maplnfo Professional Each time you exit Discover Mobile it saves a default Geoset called DiscoverMobile gst to the MY DOCUMENTS folder on your PPC When you start the application you can configure the Autoload last function to perform one of the following functions Never the application will never load the Default Geoset file Ask the application will prompt you to load the last saved Geoset file You can then elect to either load or cancel the operation Always the application will always load the default Geoset file on startup Map Projection This option governs the projection to be used for capturing GPS data as well as for displaying the Map Grid This can be set as either the Default system projection or a User preferred projection The Default option will display coordinates using the default map window projection Latitude Longitude WGS 84 GPS 84 Discover Mobile User Guide If you wish to display the current GPS position coordinates or the map Grid coordinates in a different projection to the map window e g Australian Map Grid AGD 66 Zone 55 t
291. q mi or sq km Returns the x coordinate of the object centroid Returns the y coordinate of the object centroid Returns the distance between two locations The first two parameters specify the x and y value of the start location the next two parameters specify the x and y value of the end location the str parameter is a distance unit name such as mi or km 196 Discover Mobile User Guide Geographical Functions ObjectLen obj str Perimeter obj str Object Functions Centroid obj Description Continued Returns the length of the object The str value specifies a distance unit name such as mi or km Only line polyline and arc objects have non zero lengths Returns the perimeter of the object The str value specifies a distance unit name such as mi or km Only region ellipse and rectangle objects have non zero perimeters Description Returns a point object located at the centroid of obj Searching Tables by Keyword Use the GO gt Query gt Find command to quickly search for a keyword and view the selection results DiscoverMobile e 4E 5 03 Layer Isa_Geology Column UNITNAME v Find Ballara Quartzite lt DiscoverMobile A 212 item s found v The Find dialog and the result of successfully interrogating the data To find a keyword in a table 1 Select GO gt Query gt Find 9 Working with Tables 197 2 Choose a Layer 3 Choos
292. r Mobile or from a text editor interface see Picklists section in Attributing Field Data chapter the Picklist Editor provides a more functional user interface The Picklist Editor tool is separated into two sections The Table Options controls the creation of tables and selection of table for creating Picklists from as well as renaming tables and Picklists The directory of the Picklists and new tables are specified by the Data Manager tool The Table Fields allows the customisation of table structures and also the defining of Picklists To edit an existing picklist file you need to set the current Working directory to the appropriate folder containing the picklists and open the associated Tables Select the corresponding table and you will then be able to edit the picklists 36 Discover Mobile User Guide o Table and Picklist Manager dialog Create Table The first step in creating a Picklist is to either have an existing Maplnfo Professional table for which the Picklist will be utilised or to create Maplnfo Professional table If you select an existing open table from the drop down list it will be automatically copied to the DiscoverMobile working directory and a prompt displayed to enter the name for the DiscoverMobile copy The original table will be closed 3 Data Preparation 37 Note To create a table click the Create button and type in a Table Name into the Create New Ta
293. rack Log and GPS Polyline capture functions simultaneously For more information see GPS Line Log GPS Point Capture button will capture a single point to any chosen layer in the map using the current position coordinates from the GPS receiver To use this function first create a layer containing default columns for each GPS attribute field you wish to capture as well as any additional custom fields you wish to populate This layer must be created before you capture the point so that the required attribute information can be recorded for the point Alternatively you can add the GPS point to an existing layer however only attribute information for the fields in that table will be recorded When you are ready to capture the point object tap the GPS Point button once A symbol will be placed on the screen at the current GPS location To automatically prompt for a named style or to edit attributes or coordinates see Object Creation on the Preferences menu GPS Structure Symbol button is used to capture structural measurements readings to any chosen layer in the map using the current position coordinates from the GPS receiver To use this function first create a table containing default columns for each structure measurement field you wish to collect as well as any GPS attribute data you wish to capture You can also add any other custom fields you wish to populate This table must be created before you capture the structure reading so that Discov
294. range value will then be percentiles and must be between 0 100 percentile Note that percentile differ from percentage and percentile reflect the number of observations that fall within the range For example if you have 10 range and 10 sample points there will be one point in each percentile range regardless of the measured data values and data range Left click in each of the other columns to define the Font file Point symbol Style colour and symbol size 3 Data Preparation 35 Cd Note To create a Range Style from an existing file click the Open existing range style and an existing Named Style styles The text file will need to conform to a particular structure based on a previously created Named Style To create a new style definition click the New Style button this will insert a new record for style definition To delete a style definition highlight the designated field and click the Delete Style button To reorder the current Named Style highlight the designated field and use either the Move Up or Move Down button Picklist Editor The Pick Editor facilitates the creation and management of Picklists for Discover Mobile from a desktop interface Picklists are fully customisable validation lists used when digitizing and attributing objects in Discover Mobile Picklists streamline the repetitive data entry tasks and ensure consistent valid data entry Traditionally Picklist can be created directly in Discove
295. rdinate System Site System Australian Map Grid Zone Zone 55 Datum AGD 1984 Higgins Coordinate Units Meters New Delete Properties Export Rover file dialog If necessary Browse for the appropriate corrected Rover files and specify the Output folder Select the Sample MapInfo Professional MIF Setup option from the Choose an Export Setup pull down list and press OK An Export progress dialog will appear followed by an Export Completed dialog 284 Discover Mobile User Guide Export Completed 1 input files read 165 position s read total of 25 feature s read or created 25 point feature s read 25 feature s exported File exp1910a txt contains a detailed log More Details Export Completed dialog Post process Field Data File Open the field data TAB file in MapInfo Professional Select the PostProcess gt Post Process Field TAB file menu option Trimble Post Processing Input Table to Correct Outcrop_mapping x Correction File oP_mapping Point _Generic mi Output i Corrected Object File mapping_corectedtab _ J Include Uncorrected Items Select the field data TAB file in the Table to Correct pull down list Press the Browse button adjacent to the Correction File option to browse for the appropriate corrected Rover MIF file as previously exported 11 Working with the GPS 285 Note By default the corrected object file post p
296. re discarded 142 Discover Mobile User Guide To save objects in the cosmetic layer lls Choose GO gt File gt Save Table Copy As 2 Select the cosmetic layer from the list of available tables and save it as a new table To remove objects from the cosmetic layer 1 Select the objects using one of the select tools or to select all objects in the layer choose GO gt Query gt Select All 2 Tap the Delete tool or choose GO gt Edit gt Delete Labelling Objects The Layer Control provides an option for automatically labelling objects within a layer using an attribute column in the table Select the layer you wish to label and then tap the Labels button The Labels dialog is displayed from where you can adjust the label placement options After setting the label properties return to the Layer Control dialog and select the Automate Labels check box All objects in the selected layer table will be labelled with their corresponding attribute DiscoverMobile er 10 55 lok Label with Label lines Dataset Isa Geology w None Geld ME See ae Arrow O Display within range Style Aa 16093440 Orientation J O Allow overlapped EEE is Allow duplicates a O Label partial objects eom Maximum labels Rotate label with line Label offset APAE Label dialog accessed from the Layer Control for automatic labels For information about the labelling options on this dialog see Labe
297. reate Named Styles ccesccceceeeeeneeeseeeeeeeeaeeseceeeeaeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeee 25 Desktop TOOS isena Eire EEE dee vee cl elena 25 Discover Mobile Workflow 0 cccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaaes 26 DiscoverMobile Manager ccccceceeeesceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaaeeeeeeenaaeeeeeenaees 27 Specify Data to Transfer cccceccccecsceeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesssaeessenees 28 Preparing Tables for Mobile Device 28 Transferring Dala snega nee aeee a e a a aa 28 Updating with New Device Data 0 ee cceeeeeeeeeeeettteeeeeeenteeeeees 29 CONNECTION StatuS 0 eecccece cee eeseeeececeeeeeeeaeeeeceeeeeeaeeseeeeeeesnaeessnnees 29 Convert Hotlinks itirir auteell i eave dene 29 Name Style Editor ccccccecsceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeseeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeseaeeesenes 30 Create Named Style cccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeneees 31 Linking a Style to Tables and Setting Auto fields 0 eee 33 Saving Named Style cccccceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeteeaees 33 Range Style Eqitor cccceccecesceceeceeeeeeeececaeeeeeeeececaeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaaeeee 33 Create Range Style ou eccccceccecsesneececeeeeaeeeseaeeeseaaeeseeeenenneees 34 PICKIISHECIOF s c 5 hecseeece thee Aree eG A hese ide eG ae aes 35 Create Table w cascvity ena iii ea ea aie 36 Modify Table Structure cccccceeeeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeee 37 Picklist Field Types einlassen N 3
298. recision HDOP V Dilution Vertical Dilution of Precision VDOP GPS Satellites in View GSV Contains GPS information received from the GSV sentence of the NMEA data stream The GSV sentence provides data about which satellites may be able to provide GPS information based on its viewing mask and almanac data Examples of this data sentence are provided below GPGSV 2 1 08 07 83 111 36 28 42 115 43 26 38 283 29 32 313 79 GPGSV 2 2 08 08 24 047 45 09 24 226 04 20 026 44 11 08 138 74 The information reported from the GSV sentence includes Sats Unique satellite numbers used for the position solution 6 Using the GO Menu 119 Table Browser GO gt View gt Table Browser Use this command to view data records within a table You can enter new data or modify existing data in this browser view To display the attributes for a single map object use the Info icon on the Select View Toolbar Table Structure GO gt View gt Table Structure Use this command to display a summary view of the fields columns within a layer and their associated data types You can view the structure of different tables but you cannot modify the table structure Edit Menu GO gt Edit The Edit menu consists of five grouped options and appears as shown DiscoverMobile en 11 15 X Buffer Edit Mode Clear Custom Labels Clear Annotations Delete Raster Transparency Selected Point Location Selected Object Style Quic
299. res GPS display options for floating Status Window Settings Appendix A Discover Mobile Quick Reference Guide 293 Preference Connection Point Capture Display Map Rotation Preference Settings Option GPS Protocol Setup Update Interval Preferred Interval Stop after error SSF Logging Post Processing Tolerance Min Tolerance Max Min Sample points Precision Filter Re Center GPS Altitude in Speed in Default Scale 1 GPS Position Style Deg Tolerance Description Sets the GPS Protocol as either NMEA or Trimble GPS configuration connection options dependent on assigned protocol Minimum communication speed with GPS Sets preferred communication speed with GPS may vary depending on Map redraw speed Number of consecutive bad data readings before GPS connection is disconnected Enables recording of an Trimble SSF rover file for DGPS post processing Enables the capture of Carrier phase data for high precision DGPS either in Continuous or Classic modes Sets the minimum distance between GPS data points Sets the maximum distance between GPS data points Specifies the minimum number of sample points to be used to calculate the DGPS position Assign a precision filter displaying a warning if an object is captured using a low quality fix Configures options for re centering the map when using GPS Sets units of measure for GPS altitude Sets units of measure for GPS Speed Sets
300. rizontal measurements latitude and longitude A HDOP value of 4 is recommended Min Elevation Use this field to set the elevation mask Use the elevation mask to allow the GPS receiver to only use those satellites above a specified elevation in the sky The GPS receiver does not use satellites below the set elevation mask to compute positions A minimum elevation of 15 is recommended Min SNR Use this field to set the Signal to Noise Ratio SNR mask measured in decibel Hertz dBHz The SNR value is used to determine whether the signal strength of each satellite is sufficient for that satellite to be used by the GPS receiver If a satellite s SNR is below the SNR mask it is not used to compute positions An SNR value of 39 is recommended Min Satellites Specify the minimum number of satellites required for a position fix A value of 5 is recommended 6 Using the GO Menu 75 Apply Velocity Filter Use this check box to enable or disable the velocity filter Velocity filtering smooths the positions from the GPS receiver as they are generated using velocity information This filter reduces the effects of multipath error on positions computed by the GPS receiver Use GLONASS Enables tracking of GLONASS satellites in the connected GPS receiver if the receiver is GLONASS capable Tracking both GLONASS and GPS satellites can improve productivity by reducing the time required to achieve real time or post processed deci
301. rocessed field data file will be suffixed corrected and created in the same directory as the field data Use the adjacent to the Corrected Object File option to change this if desired Press OK to run the Post Processing utility Upon completion the Status window will update with relevant information If successful the postprocessed field data file will be opened in a new map window For further information on any of these topics please consult the detailed Trimble Help files built into the relevant utility This guide draws extensively on these Help files Appendices 287 Appendices Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D Discover Mobile Quick Reference Guide Structural Symbols Working with Portable XRF Devices Digitizing and Data Entry in Discover Appendix A Discover Mobile Quick Reference Guide 289 0 s Discover Mobile Quick Reference Guide Toolbars Main Toolbar Select View Toolbar Draw Edit Toolbar GPS Toolbar Main Toolbar GO Button Accesses menu system Open Open TAB or GST or TIF files Layer Control Control display and properties of objects in map view Select View Shows Hides Select View toolbar Draw Edit Shows Hides Draw Edit toolbar GPS Shows Hides GPS toolbar Status Window Shows Hides Status Window XY Shows map coordinates at location of stylus tap Keyboard Selects input method for alphanumeric data entry 290 Discov
302. rocessing Code Processing Only Carrier Phase Processing Only Differential Correction dialog 280 Discover Mobile User Guide In the Rover Files section browse for the Rover SSF files that have been transferred from the PPC Then select the relevant Base files via the Internet Search button If this is the first time the Internet Search has been accessed you will need to update the list of Internet base data providers After this is complete select the appropriate Base Data Provider from the drop down list A Confirm Internet Setup dialog will appear press Yes to continue In the following Select a Base Provider dialog select the appropriate provider from the list This will open the Provider Properties dialog press OK to accept these settings The Internet Search dialog will appear from now on this will dialog will appear directly after the Internet Search button has been pressed as this utility has now been configured Press OK to begin the search with the current settings Internet Search Base Data Provider Land Victoria DSE GPSnet Melbourne Observ ikg New Delete Properties Help The Confirm Internet Setup dialog will again appear press Yes to continue The Copying files from Internet dialog will appear 11 Working with the GPS 281 Confirm Internet Setup Your Windows settings will only allow you to connect to intranet servers that are directly connected to your LAN
303. s ogoaam oe Save Close Appendix D Digitizing and Data Entry in Discover 345 Creating and Managing Picklists A picklist list can be created from a new list or generated from anexisting dataset On the Picklist Manager a picklist can be selected from the Picklists box The following tools are provided to create and manage Picklists these tools are loacted under the Configure dropdown button coniowe _ 7 F Create new picklist M Delete existing picklist tel Save picklist modifications al Rename picklist and description Append picklist Import picklist y Export picklist Tool Create new picklist Delete existing picklist Save picklist modifications Rename picklist and description Append picklist Import picklist Export picklist Description Create a new picklist Delete the selected picklist Save edits to a picklist Rename a picklist and description text Append an existing picklist to another picklist Create a new picklist from numerous file formats Export picklist to numerous file formats The Styles box displays the styles available in the selected picklist The following tools are provided to create and manage styles Tool Add New Style Description Create a new style 346 Discover Mobile User Guide Tool Delete Selected Style Rename Style Edit Style Move Item Up Down To create a new
304. s Named Style will override the default capture point polyline or polygon style see Named Styles Way Point Navigation Style Sets a preferred display style for the Way Point Navigation The default style is an orientated red triangle The symbol style can be adjusted for the Way Point Navigation tool to any symbol style supported by Discover Mobile Applying Named Styles Named styles can be applied to any type of object including drawing objects and GPS objects Before you can apply named styles you must create a style library For information on creating and assigning names styles see Named Styles To apply named styles to new objects Set the GO gt Preferences gt Object Creation gt Named Styles option to Always The Named Styles dialog is then displayed when a drawing object or GPS object is created When an object is created the Named Styles dialog is displayed 226 Discover Mobile User Guide Note 3 In the Style drop down list choose a Syle Library from the top pull down list The available named styles are displayed Only those styles applicable to the object type are displayed i e if a point object is created only the point type named styles will be displayed 4 Either double tap a named style or select the style and tap the Use button DiscoverMobile er 11 09 ok Regional_sampling tikd DSL into CRC Lag into Soil Rockchip into Lag Soil 20 into Soil Soil 40 into
305. s and can therefore have adverse effects on map redraw performance It is highly recommended that you convert all large data tables e g with more than 1000 objects which are to be used in Discover Mobile to the same native map projection Discover Mobile provides two methods for altering the data projection depending on whether data is being captured using the Drawing tools or GPS tools To set the map projection for capturing drawing objects 1 Choose GO gt Map gt Map Projection 2 Select the projection Category and Category Member Discover Mobile supports the same range of map projections as Maplnfo Professional 164 Discover Mobile User Guide DiscoverMobile en 4e 2 22 lok DiscoverMobile e7 2 23 lok Category Universal Transverse Mercator WGS 84 v Universal Transverse Mercator WGS 84 v Turkish Coordinate Systems Lambert a Universal Polar Stereographic Universal Transverse Mercator Corrego Aleg Universal Transverse Mercator ED 50 Universal Transverse Mercator NAD 27 for Ca UTM Zone 52 Sania Hemisphere WGS 84 UTM Zone 53 Northern Hemisphere n a Modified Transverse Mercator ATS77 Universal Transverse Mercator NAD 27 for U Universal Transverse Mercator NAD 83 Universal Transverse Mercator SAD 69 Universal Transverse Mercator Tokyo Datum Universal Transverse Mercator WGS 84 US State Plane Coordinate Systems 1927 US State Plane Coordinate Systems 1983 mg US State Plane Coordin
306. s in the table Toggle editability of selected table Appendix D Digitizing and Data Entry in Discover 375 Note The Data Entry tool supports the selection of singular map and browser records and objects Multiple record or object selections are currently not supported 8 Click the Save button to save your changes to the current table All validation errors must be resolved before the table can be saved and the Data Entry tool can be closed amp Enter valid data into Mapinfo Professional table ee eRe Isa Structure Data ee Mapcode Group Name Geology Age Source Oei Ordivician Intrusi E Undifferentiated f Ordivician Intrusi Golden Cross Re Oei Ordivician Intrusi Undifferentiated f Ordivician Intrusi Golden Cross Re Dag Grega Group Gara Formation Fossilferous limes Devonian 250K Bathurst G Dgg Grega Group Gara Formation Fossiliferous limes Devonian 250K Bathurst G Oco Cabonne Group Oakdale Formation Mafic vole sandst Ordivician 250K Bathurst G Oei Ordivician Intrusi Undifferentiated f Ordivician Intrusi Golden Cross Re Oef Eater Ordivician R Felsic compositio Earlier Ordivician 250K Bathurst G Oei Ordivician intrusi Undifferentiated f Ordivician Intrusi Magnetic Interpre Oef Eater Ordivician Felsic compostio Earlier Ordivician 250K Bathurst G Oei Ordivi
307. s made up of a series of consecutive line segments rather than one continuous polyline If you want to record a single continuous line e g a fault trace or track then use the GPS Line Capture function instead See GPS Line Log GPS Point Capture button captures a single point at the current position coordinates from the GPS receiver See Capturing Points GPS Structure Symbol button captures structural measurements readings using the current position coordinates from the GPS receiver See Capiuring Structure Objects GPS Insert Node button adds a new node to the current GPS polyline or polygon while the pause button is active To use tap the Insert Node button when you wish to add a node to your line You can return to continuous node logging mode at any time by turning off the Pause button GPS Polyline Capture button captures a continuous polyline using the GPS position coordinates Tap the button again to stop the polyline capture The node separation is controlled by the Tolerance Min and Tolerance Max settings on the Preferences menu GPS Polygon Capture button captures a polygon using GPS position coordinates Tap the button again to stop the polgon capture The polygon will automatically close by joining the last captured node to the first The node separation is controlled by the Tolerance Min and Tolerance Max settings on the Preferences menu GPS Polyline Polygon Pause pauses the capturing of a polygon or polyline without termi
308. scover Mobile User Guide Map Projection GO gt Map gt Map Projection For information about the native map projection and how this changes as you open tables and raster images see Controlling the Map Projection Use the GO gt Map gt Map Projection command to specify the map projection This is the projection into which objects are captured with the Drawing tools Discover Mobile supports the same range of map projections as MapInfo Professional GPS Menu GO gt GPS The GPS menu provides full control of GPS connections data capture logging GPS object display styles and GPS debugging GPS Fix GPS er 10 41 X v Connect Monitor Satellite Status Setup Connection Setup Data Capture Tables Default Styles gt Center Map on GPS Orient Map Ahead Waypoint Navigation Capture Point Capture Polyline Capture Polygon Capture Structure Symbol Line Log Point Log Connect Monitor Satellite Status Setup Connection Setup Data Capture Tables Default Styles 6 Using the GO Menu 105 Center Map on GPS Orient Map Ahead Waypoint Navigation Capture Point e Capture Polyline Capture Polygon Capture Structure Symbol Point Log Line Log Connect Go gt GPS gt Connect Make a GPS connection For instructions on setting up and connecting the GPS see Connecting to the GPS Monitor Satellite Status GO gt GPS gt Monitor Satellite
309. scover Mobile and MapInfo Professional both support hotlinks from a Tables fields to documents and resources stored on the computer When moving a Table from Discover Mobile back to the desktop MapInfo Professional the hotlink file paths can be edited to convert the folder locations of the linked files To convert hotlinks in a table 1 Copy the TAB file and linked files to the preferred location on your desktop computer Discover Mobile User Guide 2 From the DiscoverMobile menu select the Convert Hotlinks item In the Discover Mobile Hotlink Converter dialog select the table which contains the hotlinks you wish to remap and then in the fields to check list box select the column which contains the link path 3 Under Options check the box Change link directory path to and enter the file path or browse to the location of your hotlink files 4 If you have linked Pocket Word or Excel files then leave the Convert extensions options ticked and click OK to complete the re link function To activate the new hotlinks in MapInfo Professional go to the MapInfo Professional Layer control and select the layer which contains the hotlinks Click the HotLink button Select the field which contains the file path and check the appropriate options from the bottom of the dialog Click OK to finish the setup process To activate a Hotlink click on the lightning bolt icon and then click on the object to bring up the linked file Name Style Editor
310. scover Mobile named style 4 Select the details for each file type as appropriate see instructions for each file type below 5 The imported file is displayed as a standard picklist in the Picklist Manager dialog 6 Use the other controls in the Picklist Manager dialog box below the Styles box to delete rename edit and order styles in the picklist 7 Click the Save button Legend ga ars X Export Picklist to An File Name Australian Surface Geology Codes 356 Discover Mobile User Guide On the Export Legend File dialog edit the File Name if required Click OK to export the picklist The exported Legend file is saved in the legend folder typically C Users username AppData Roami ng Encom Common Legends LU T set by the Settings option in the Drillholes gt Legend Editor tool Mobile Picklist Export Picklist to Mobile Pickli Picklist Name Output Options v Export Group entries as Categories Export picklist as Read Only Folder C Discover Mobile Encom_DM_Pickiis KS Goa On the Export Mobile Picklist dialog edit the Picklist Name if required Under the Output Options select Export Group entries as Categories convert picklist groups into Discover Mobile Picklist Categories e Export picklist as Read Only make the Discover Mobile Picklist read only Folder click the F browse button to change the location where the picklist is saved Click OK
311. shes a secret key that is used in all future connections to authenticate device identity and encrypt data 14 Click OK to complete the pairing Appendix C Working with Portable XRF Devices 323 A Bluetooth Mana q 2 25 Q Bluetooth Paired devices 2 Garmin GPS 10 Omega_61118 Ej The Olympus Innov X is now a paired Bluetooth device Configuring the Serial Port on the PPC 1 Open the Bluetooth Manager see steps 1 through 3 in Pairing an Olympus Innov X XRF device with the PPC and select the Services tab 2 Under Services select Serial Port and then tap the Advanced button to configure the COM Port settings 324 Discover Mobile User Guide 2 Bluetooth Setti GP 462227 D Bluetooth Services Enable service L Authorization required Authentication Passkey required E Encryption required 3 Check that the Inbound COM Port setting is the default value of 8 and the Outbound COM Port setting is 7 A Bluetooth Setti 2 q 240 Bluetooth Serial Port settings Ports Default device for outgoing serial connections Omega_61118 Display the device selection screen the next time an outgoing serial connection is attempted Ej 4 Click OK to finish Appendix C Working with Portable XRF Devices Pairing the PPC with the Olympus Innov X XRF 1 On the Olympus Innov X device select the Setup tab on the control screen 2 Scroll to the bottom of
312. show other toolbars Display Status window to show GPS position and map information Display screen coordinates Select the data entry method Tap the GO button to display the Discover Mobile menu system When selected a menu and sub menu list is displayed See GO Menu for additional details Use the Open file button to browse for and select files to display When a TAB file is opened it will be automatically added to the Layer control list and the map objects will be added to the map display Use the Layer Control button to add extra tables change the display order control visibility editability and override display attributes Hide and show the Select View Toolbar 58 Discover Mobile User Guide s Hide and show the Draw Edit Toolbar Hide and show the GPS Toolbar Display a Status Window showing GPS information and other map properties used by Discover Mobile Items such as the zoom level of the map window current GPS position and other user definable GPS parameters By tapping and holding the stylus within the bounds of the Status window you can access the Status Window Setup menu to configure the items which are displayed see Display View Settings It can be resized by dragging the red square at the bottom right of the window Display the Coordinates of the stylus as a map easting X and northing Y l in a moveable text display window The map coordinates are displayed using the current projection
313. some cases a null modem adapter may also be needed to connect the GPS receiver to the sync cable on the PPC device The reason for this is that both mobile PPC devices and PC computers use pin 2 on their serial ports to receive data and pin 3 to transmit data Therefore a PPC could not communicate with a desktop PC using a standard serial cable because both devices would be trying to send and receive data on the same pins To overcome this problem most PPC devices use special sync serial cables These cables differ from standard serial cables in that pins 2 and 3 have been swapped on the end which connects to the PC computer This enables the PC and PPC to communicate because data is now being sent and received between the two machines on the correct pins 260 Discover Mobile User Guide r GPS Because most GPS serial cables are designed to connect directly to the serial port on a PC computer they too have pins 2 and 3 swapped on the end which connects to the PC This enables the GPS to communicate with the computer in exactly the same way a PPC would do using a sync cable However this poses a problem again when the GPS cable is connected to the sync cable on the PPC In this case both the GPS and the PPC serial cables have pins 2 and 3 swapped and therefore send and receive data on the same pins again To overcome this problem a null modem adapter is available The purpose of a null modem adapter is to cancel the reversal of pins 2 and
314. some control over the following system settings e Busy Cursor Font Size 86 Discover Mobile User Guide Warning Warning Confirm Deletion Hardware Buttons Alert Configurations Busy Cursor When Discover Mobile is processing a request from the user such as reading data from a file processing a query redrawing a map or loading a dialog it will generally display a system busy cursor Opening large datasets or raster images may take considerably longer on Discover Mobile than it does on you desktop or laptop computer This is mainly because the system resources memory and CPU speed etc are considerably less powerful on the PPC The busy cursor can be recognised as a spinning colour wheel button On some PPC devices this icon may remain i e appear to get stuck on the screen after the PPC has completed a requested task If this occurs you can generally clear it by tapping on the screen with the select tool If you find that the busy cursor seems to get stuck on the screen regularly you can disable it by setting this option to off In most cases Discover Mobile will then suppress the busy cursor from symbol If you turn the busy cursor off you will no longer have any visual indication when Discover Mobile is processing data Font Size The font size setting controls the size of the font used for displaying data in the Status and Browser windows The default size is 8 point however if you find this size tex
315. starting value updating fields with an object X and Y centroid coordinate object area perimeter length or object rotation angle If you do not wish to assign an action to a field in the table select Quick Pick as the default action It is recommended you use the Desktop Pick isi Editor tool to create and edit picklists Quick Pick options auto picks and special fields are synonyms 124 Discover Mobile User Guide DiscoverMobile e 2 13 ok Table Copper_Hill_Soils v Object X Object Y Map_X Map_Y Quick Picl Quick Pick Table Setup For more information see Quick Pick Fields Hardware Button Options GO gt Edit gt Hardware Button Options Select Function Choose a function from the pull down list and then press the desired hardware button on the hand held device Check for Mapped Buttons Select to use an existing button mapping configured through Windows Start gt Settings gt Buttons Named Styles GO gt Edit gt Named Styles Assign named styles when creating new objects such as points lines and polygons Styles can also be linked to specific tables with specific Quick Pick options for each style For more information see Applying Named Styles 6 Using the GO Menu 125 New Object Styles GO gt Edit gt New Object Styles Set the default display style for newly created objects The default styles can be applied to symbols lines and polygons For more information see Settin
316. steeeeees 181 Structure Codes and Symbol Libraries ceceeeseeeeeeteeeeees 181 Adding Structural Data Fields 0 0 cceeseceeeeteeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 182 Customizing the Structure Symbol Picklist ccceeseeeee 183 Managing Tables onnie aii ee a oeiia 184 Op nitig Tables srrrnpa turasan aaeiaen aneri oinei ie tiae anid nni aiiin 184 Closing Tables v i2 2 a0 eel Gee ee ee 185 Gopying Tables e aaria iaraa era aa iotas aks 186 Viewing Tabl Snus iaeiiai e eN TEER EAEE A ARNES 187 Modifying Table Structure cccceceeeeeeeeeceeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesenaeeeeeaeees 188 Packing Tables tise eteet eect ec cgevsteles cebu i ti rage geste aay 188 Searching for Data eccccceceeceeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeecaaeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseeeeseceeseeeeeees 189 Searching Tables by QUETY cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaeeteeaees 189 Using Query Operators and Functions ccseceeeeeeeeseeeeeees 190 Operator Siin tain in nl Cetin eh eae 191 FUNCIONS ra a RE N eae dt deniten 193 Searching Tables by Keyword ssssssseessseessisssirsssrrssrrnssrnsrrnenne 196 10 Working With Objects cccccecceseeceseeeeeseneeseseeeeeseeesesneeeeeeeeaeseeeeneees 199 Creating Objects eee cceceeecenececeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeseeneeeesaaaesseneeeseaeeeeeaneeees 199 Setting Object Creation Preferences ccccccccsseceeeesssteeeeeeeenaees 200 Edit AttriDUteS see iccededeschaed seen feeds henge Meneses bod
317. t Geography tab Save Reading in Discover Mobile To save the analysis results and GPS location tap OK The data is written to a MapInfo Professional table TAB and a location point is displayed on the screen VS GPS Fix GP G Yy d 1 44 ok XRF_Data v Name Value NewField 0 SAMPBATCH 668 TEST_DATE 01 12 10 READING_NO 742 ANALYSIS_TIME 32 020000 UNIT_OF_MEASURE ppm NO_ANALYTES 36 WGS84_LAT 37 8123042620797 WGS84_LONG 144 971813644109 WGS84_ELEV 99 7692718311093 USER_DATUM USER_PROJ Browser view of XRF data Appendix D Digitizing and Data Entry in Discover 343 Note Digitizing and Data Entry in Discover This section refers to functions available from the Data Entry menu in the Discover desktop application These functions are not available from the Discover Mobile desktop application The tools on the Discover Data Entry menu streamline the entry of table data and creation of digitized map objects Attribute data in a column can be incremented automatically validated or selected from a look up table Customized styles can also be applied to objects as they are created Picklist Manager Apply Style Apply Picklist Apply Structural Symbols Setup Table Enter Data gaano Exit Data Entry The tools on the Data Entry menu perform the following functions Picklist Manager Use this tool to manage picklist s
318. t Log to record a log of the travelled path as a series of points The frequency at which the points will be collected is determined by the GPS Connection Interval and the GPS Point Capture Tolerance Min values under the GO gt Preferences gt GPS menu If a minimum tolerance value of 20m is set then the Point Track Log will only be updated with a new point when the distance between the last point and the new point exceeds the 20m minimum This enables the user to remain stationary and take notes or enter data while the Track Log function is still running and not have a series of unnecessary points added to the log file Starting the GPS Point Track Log function for the first time in a Discover Mobile session will prompt for a table name and location in which to save the data Either a new table can be created or a previously created Track Log table may be selected By default the Point Track Log is saved toa GPS_Point_Log TAB file in the My Documents folder in main memory This default can be accepted or a new name and file location can be specified The Point Track Log can also save any information available from the GPS receiver as attributes for each point in the log The attribute data is automatically added to the appropriate column or field in the point track log table A default set of common fields is automatically added when a new Point Track Log table is created To change the fields or to add additional fields tap the Setup button
319. t difficult to read you can increase the text size by adjusting this control Confirm Deletion This controls whether Discover Mobile will provide a Confirmation dialog before attempting to delete an object from a table The default value is set to YES If you do not want to be prompted before deleting an object you can set this option to NO There is no undo function in Discover Mobile so when you delete an object from a table it is permanently removed and cannot be recovered 6 Using the GO Menu 87 Hardware Buttons The hardware button mapping dialog allows you to configure the hardware buttons on your PPC device so that they can be used to perform certain Discover Mobile functions For example you can assign a hardware button to capture a GPS point toggle the zoom tool pan tool or selection tool or even to power off the screen to help conserve battery power In Discover Mobile you can map virtually any inbuilt function to a hardware button on the device To setup the hardware buttons on the device 1 Tap the Browse button next to the System Settings Hardware Buttons entry to bring up the hardware mapping dialog 2 Select the particular function you want to map to a hardware button from the Select Function pick list at the top of the dialog DiscoverMobile e 42 4 13 ok 1 Select a Function Power Off On Screen v 2 Press a hardware button to assign selected function to the button Current Button Assi
320. te providing there are no raster layers present in a map window When the Map Rotation function is active and the map grid is displayed you may not be able to see all the text labels for each grid line as they may be positioned off the screen 7 Controlling Layers and the View 149 Note GPS Overlay You can display the Satellite Strength Plot information in the bottom left hand corner of the map window Use the GO gt View gt GPS Overlay command to hide and show the GPS information GPS Fix GPS a 41 57 X E A kjo et Ble 2 kl RRR Ole Bele ih x oo ae 2 BS My Discover Mobile map window showing the Satellite Strength Plot as series of green bars in bottom left of screen Scale Bar You can display a dynamic scale bar on the map window Like the map grid the scale bar is automatically updated to the most appropriate distance interval as you zoom in and out of the map window The scale bar is always displayed as the top most layer in the map window and its position is fixed in the lower right corner of the screen The Scale Bar uses the same line colour and label size properties as the map grid see Map Grid To change the distance units 1 Choose GO gt Preferences 2 Under Session select Distance In and choose the distance units Changing the distance units will also affect the operation of the distance measurement tools on the Select View toolbar 150 Discover Mobile User Guide
321. the GPS receiver in the accompanying documentation Once these settings are set press Start to test the connection After a short period of time up to about 30 seconds a continuous NMEA data stream should be displayed each line starts with GP which indicates a successful connection with the receiver f g DiscoverMobile ar 3 33 fok GPGSA A 3 16 15 21 06 18 1511 9 0 2 GPGSV 3 1 10 21 68 192 41 18 64 33 GPGSV 3 2 10 16 31 250 34 26 31 09 GPGSV 3 3 10 10 06 137 30 30 05 35 GPRMC 053229 465 A 3753 1021 S 14 GPGGA 053230 465 3753 1020 S 145 GPGSA A 3 16 15 21 06 18 r5r11179 0 2 GPGSV 3 1 10 21 68 192 41 18 64 33 GPGSV 3 2 10 16 31 250 34 26 31 09 GPGSV 3 3 10 10 06 137 31 30 05 35 DATA GPS 145 002 37 885 C Log to fie Startl Stop Clear Scan E Example of Setup Connection dialog with a valid GPS connection 11 Working with the GPS 253 Note 5 If uncertain about the receiver settings or the data stream fails to appear or a message Bad Data is displayed the settings are incorrect Try pressing the Scan button at the bottom of the dialog Discover Mobile will run through every permutation of settings attempting to establish a connection to your GPS receiver See Troubleshooting an NMEA GPS Connection for further information 6 Once a valid data stream from the GPS is displayed press the Stop button Make a note of the various settings for future reference and c
322. the GPS unit 262 Discover Mobile User Guide e No other applications on the PPC are sourcing the GPS data e If using NMEA protocol the raw GPS data is visible in the Setup Connection dialog after pressing the Start button If the above settings appear correct and you still have difficulties connecting to the GPS receiver perform a soft reset of the PPC device and try again DiscoverMobile GPS is not connected Check Preferences and try again Error message indicating that communication cannot be established between Discover Mobile and the GPS receiver Monitoring Satellite Status Choose GO gt GPS gt Monitor Satellite Status to display the Monitor Satellite Status dialog which shows the number and position of satellites currently in view If a satellite is red it is not used in the GPS fix Each available satellite is numbered and the corresponding signal strength is displayed as a bar in the Satellite Strength Plot File Zoom Tools Help GPS Status e 4 4 14 ok aS Date 12 11 2013 Time 5 14 50 am Latitude 37 820972 Longitude 144 968159 PDOP 3 151 MDOP 1854 VDOP 1854 DUDO DOODO Fix GPS 2D Speed 3 5 km h Alt 98 32 m Course 210 9 Example of the available satellites and their signal strength 11 Working with the GPS 263 A mini version of this bar graph can be displayed at the bottom left of the map window using the GO gt View gt GPS Overla
323. the Setup screen and select the Bluetooth Options icon Se Customize Printer Display Date Time Exit aoe Kn Note If the Bluetooth icon is not available select Factory Settings and Enable Bluetooth Streaming Refer to the Olympus Innov X XRF Manual for more details on this feature 326 Discover Mobile User Guide 3 Under Bluetooth Radio select Enabled An hourglass is displayed while the Olympus Innov X searches for available Bluetooth devices Disabled Paired Device Properties Device Name JBSNomad2 Device Address 00124710 Reset Connection Stream Test Data _ Stream Analysis Results 4 Select the PPC from the list and ensure that the Stream Analysis Results check box is selected 6d65 ect Device 5 Tap the Select Device button Appendix C Working with Portable XRF Devices 327 Note X HH ECL Bluetooth Radio Enabled Disabled Paired Device Properties Device Name JBSNomad2 Device Address 001747106d65 Device Search 46 NOTEBOOK 1 00037 IBSNomad2 001747 106 Reset Connection _ stream Test Data M Stream Analysis Results If you have not previously given your PPC a device ID name it will appear as a factory setting name usually appearing as PPC or a Bluetooth address This can be changed within the Windows Mobile settings on the PPC Connecting to the GPS Receiver If you have previously made a succ
324. the clipping boundary This object may be part of an existing table or digitized into the cosmetic layer 3 Choose Discover gt Object Editing gt Clip to Polygon 18 Discover Mobile User Guide Clipping options all tables Clipping Suffix Operate on copy of data Suffix to be appended to all tables Clip outside selected region Cancel Clip inside selected region Help Clipped data T able Names MtISA_Tenement MtISA_T enement M J ISA DRAINAGE_IM ISA_DRAINAGE_1M ooo z 1SA_ROADS_1M I1SA_ROADS_1M v Isa_Faults Isa_Faults a Isa_Geology Isa_Geology v Selected region clipping boundary and Clip Layers Dialog Choose to clip outside or inside the selected polygon boundary All tables by default are selected for clipping and new tables will be created for the clipped layers with a _CLIP extension Select a folder to save the new clipped data tables and click OK The clipped tables are automatically opened into the current map window 3 Data Preparation 19 Mt_ISA_Tenement_CLIP Isa_Geology_CLIP Map Resulting clipped layers opened in new map window Save to Registered Raster Tool The Clip to Polygon tool only works with creating data subsets for vector data The Save to Registered Raster tool will create a registered image of the visible contents of any map window to the extent of that map windows v
325. the default map window scale Sets default GPS position symbol Sets minimum angular deviation in course required to cause the map to rotate 294 Discover Mobile User Guide Preference Option Description Continued Speed Tolerance Sets minimum speed below which the Auto Rotate function will be suspended When Off Sets behaviour for map window when Auto Rotate function is deactivated Object Creation Edit Attributes Specify data entry options when attributing new objects Named Styles Specify object style options when creating new object Point XY Editing Specify coordinate position options when capturing new objects Session Autoload last Sets quick start workspace settings System Settings Directories Map Projection User Projection Distance in Area in Grid Overlay Waypoint Tolerance Busy Cursor Font Size Confirm Deletion Hardware Buttons Alert Configuration Project Root Current Project Set Individually Configures map projection settings GPS capture projection map grid Selects a preferred map projection to be used if User Projection is selected above Sets preferred units for distance measurements eg scalebar Sets preferred units for area measurements Configures map grid overlay Defines minimum distance for waypoint navigation Turns On Off the system busy cursor Sets the default fonts size for the Status window Controls confirmation options when deleting objects Setup options for PPC device
326. then trace the region s extent keeping the stylus in continuous contact with the screen Removing the stylus from the screen will complete and close the polygon 6 Using the GO Menu 95 Add Polygon GO gt Tools gt Add Polygon Draw a Polygon into the current Insertion layer using the point and tap polygon mode Use by tapping the first vertex of the polygon and then continue by tapping in a second and subsequent vertices Complete the polygon by double tapping the final vertex Add Polyline GO gt Tools gt Add Polyline Draw a Polyline using the point and tap Polyline mode To use tap a start location then move the stylus to another point and tap the next vertex Continue tapping vertices until complete To finish the line double tap the last point Add Annotation GOsTools gt Add Annotation The Annotation tool allows text annotations to be added to or removed from the annotation layer Text labels placed in the annotation layer are temporary and cannot be saved To remove all annotations use the Clear Annotations sub menu accessible via the Label button on the Draw Edit toolbar or the GO gt Edit gt Clear Annotations menu Add Label GOs gt Tools gt Add Label The Label tool allows text labels to be placed on individual objects The information for the labels is retrieved from an attribute column in the associated table To alter the source column used for labelling use the Labels button on the Layer Control dialog To remove a
327. ther CSV or TXT format the Picklist importer can import and automatically create a Picklist Q Picklist items can be deleted by clicking the Delete button x 40 Discover Mobile User Guide ae eal es as Singular picklist items set as default value E Global picklist Read Only picklist Picklist Example Picklist with associated Category Editing a Category To edit the contents in a category click on the Edit button in the category column of the picklist editor Further Sub Categories can be added within each category Assign Default Picklist Value Default Picklist behaviour can be controlled by numerous options on the dialog If only one item exists you can enforce this value to be the default by either selecting the Default check box next to the item or select the Singular picklist items set as default value check box 3 Data Preparation 41 Note Note If only one default Special Items GPS auto field is set in a pick list it is identical to adding a Special Field to the table structure If several Picklist items are present the default value can be assigned by checking the Default check box next to the item A Category or a Category s contents cannot be set to a default Make Picklist Read Only To ensure the integrity of the Picklist select the Read only picklist check box Picklist Format The pick list file name must conform to one of the following f
328. this function to filter out unwanted points caused by bad GPS signal reception The default value is 10000m Be careful not to set the GPS Maximum Tolerance value too small particularly if the GPS signal quality is poor Ideal values are between 500m and 10000m If the Maximum Tolerance value is set to small say 100m and you are travelling in a car at 80 100 km hr it is possible that you could travel further than the tolerance value between consecutive points especially if an error was encountered in one of the readings In this case Discover Mobile would consider any additional point to be outside the maximum tolerance and would not continue to record the polyline Min Sample Points This setting defines the number of point calculations required before a position is established A position is calculated by averaging the specified number of point calculations thus the higher this parameter is set the longer it will take to generate a position but the more precise the position will be It is recommended to use a setting of 15 points This option is only designed for use with Trimble DGPS units 6 Using the GO Menu 79 Note Precision Filter Various quality levels of position fix can be output by DGPS receivers depending on factors such as the number of satellites the quality of the satellite signal influenced by the amount of satellite coverage and overhead cover the quality of radio reception for Real Time DGPS a
329. time 10 minutes unless the user is certain Carrier Lock will not be lost Lowering some of the Setup parameters eg Min SNR Min Satellites Max HDOP and PDOP and Min Elevation will allow better maintenance continuity of Carrier Lock but with a loss of precision Post processing Transfer the relevant field data files and their associated Rover SSF files from the PPC PDA to the desktop Run MapInfo Professional and run the PostProcess MBX Tools gt Run MapBasic Program browse tothe C Program Files Encom Discover Mobile folder default location and select this MBX This will open the PostProcess menu below 11 Working with the GPS 279 PostProcess Correct Rover SSF File Export Corrected Rover File Post Process Field TAB file Exit PostProcess There are 3 steps involved in post processed differential correction 1 Correct Rover SSF File 2 Export Corrected Rover file 3 Post process Field Data File Correct Rover SSF File Select the Correct Rover SSF File option form the PostProcess menu This will open the Differential Correction dialog Differential Correction Rover Files Folder E Data DGPS te Selected Files Tepes Outcrop_mapping SSF Browse Help Settings Base Files Folder C Pfdata Selected Files Local Search Internet Search Browse Corrected Files Output Folder E Data DGPS File Extension cor Processing Smart Code and Carrier Phase P
330. tings 2 Tap the Connections tab and select the Bluetooth icon E a Beam A Dell WLAN Network Odyssey Utility Cards Client O P 12 40 amp TE Bluetooth Connections Personal system Connections Appendix C Working with Portable XRF Devices 317 3 On the General tab tap the Bluetooth Manager option 2 Bluetooth Setti Po 46 1 23 Bluetooth General Current profile N Bluetooth status Bluetooth is ON Use the Bluetooth Manager fo set connections Genera accent eras Aba Ej 4 Tap New to open the Connection Wizard Z Bluetooth Mana 4 1 30 tx Outgoing Connections Incoming Connections 318 Discover Mobile User Guide 5 From the Connection Wizard select Explore a Bluetooth device and tap Next to proceed Connection Wiz gt 4 1 32 Connection Wizard devices to share files collaborate or play multiplayer games Exchange business cards P Send retrieve or exchange business cards with one or more Bluetooth enabled devices Explore a Bluetooth device Discover the services another device offers and create connection shortcuts for them Cancel Next gt Wait for the list of detected Bluetooth devices to display and then select the Olympus Innov X and then tap Next to proceed Bluetooth Connection Wizard Explore a Bluetooth device Cancel Back Next View Ej Appe
331. tion process These include the Map_X Map_Y Pos_Lat Pos_Long etc fields 10 Working with Objects 215 Note Py l If only one default QuickPick GPS auto field is set in method 2 it is identical to setting the GPS field type in step 3 Auto prompt for Structural Data Auto prompting for Structural specific information using either the GO gt GPS gt Capture Structure Symbol or GO gt Tools gt Add Structure Symbol tools Both of these options require the addition of the preset structure specific fields during the table creation process these are Struct_Strike or Struct_DipDir Struct_Dip and Struct_Code fields Ad Hoc Values Custom fields can be attributed manually by the user using the popup keyboard Selecting Objects Using the Selection Tools Viewing Graphical Selections Selecting Objects Within a Buffer Using the Selection Tools The Selection tools on the Select View toolbar has four modes for selecting object s in the display area To change mode tap the arrow next to the currently selected mode button Point Select a single object or item This default mode is used for data entry object selection and editing Selection is done by positioning the stylus over the required object and tapping A selected object is highlighted Radius Selects objects within a controllable radius All selectable objects within the radius are highlighted The origin of the radius is centred where the styl
332. tion to reconnect to the same GPS receiver assuming that the connection settings discussed in step 3 have not been altered Connection Hardware If you have a Compact Flash card CF GPS Navman sleeve GPS or a Bluetooth GPS you do not require any cables to connect the GPS receiver to the PPC device These GPS units are designed to attach and communicate directly with the PPC using a standard expansion slot or communication protocol If you intend to use a Bluetooth GPS receiver you will also need a Bluetooth equipped PPC device or you will need to purchase a separate Bluetooth expansion card Conventional hand held GPS units such as those from Garmin or Magellan will also require an accessory cable to connect the GPS receiver to the PPC device Many GPS and mobile devices have unique fittings so you may have to shop around to find the appropriate serial cable and adapter to connect the two units Most serial cables which connect a GPS to adesktop PC are designed to connect directly to the serial port using a standard 9 pin DB9 serial connector Most PPC devices have proprietary data connections so a special serial cable is generally required to connect a GPS to these devices Most GPS serial cables and proprietary PPC serial cables have 9 pin DB9 female connectors on their ends Therefore to connect these two female cables together you may need a 9 pin male to male gender changer These can be purchased from most electronics stores In
333. tion with north up Keep Rotation will keep the map window positioned at the current rotation angle If you need to reset the map window later so that north is towards the top of the screen you can do this using the GO gt View gt Map Rotation control 82 Discover Mobile User Guide Object Creation GO gt Preferences gt Object Creation The following editable criteria are available when capturing object data e Edit Attributes Named Styles Point XY Editing The preferences for these can be set as follows Always Upon data capture the user is taken directly to the appropriate editing dialog Ask The user is prompted as to whether the specified criteria is to be edited If Yes the appropriate editing dialog is opened if No the dialog is skipped Never The criteria is skipped without display of a prompt or the editing dialog Edit Attributes The Edit Attributes option opens a browser for the new object allowing the user to edit any of the object s attributes as well as assign attributes from predefined Pick Lists Named Styles An existing style can be applied to the new object from the Named Styles library This is an excellent way to visually differentiate identical object types eg point samples such as rock chips lag and soil samples can have differing existing symbol types applied during data capture See Named Styles for further information Point XY Editing After data ca
334. to the XRF device Once the XRF connection has been setup see Configure the XRF Connection in Discover Mobile you can connect to the XRF device 1 Select the GO gt XRF gt Connect menu option Batch Files 2 In the Select a Layer section enter a Batch Name or select an existing Batch Name in the pull down list if you wish to append to an existing data file Existing batch files do not need to be open in Discover Mobile this will list any XRF datafiles on your PPC XRF data is stored into data files and directories named by Sample Batch this allows data to be separated stored by date location etc See Specify the XRF Project Path for more information on batch file naming and storage locations This function is extremely useful for jobs that span multiple field sessions ie before and after lunch or days working on the same project It also enables recommencement at any time in case of an unscheduled break or technical difficulties Olympus Innov X XRF devices create two data files per batch for Soil and Mining modes Soil Mode is used for concentrations of up to 2 3 and as Mining Mode is for concentrations above 2 3 For soil geochemistry surveys Soil Mode is usual Niton XRF devices generate only one datafile per batch Applying Range Styles XRF point data can be coloured styled automatically as the data is captured using a Range Style library see Range Styles This allows geochemical trends to be instantly visualiz
335. ttributes 57 Display labels on Layer Control 110 135 Display location 58 Display screen 48 Display window zoom level 58 Distance along a Polyline 61 Distance between points 61 Distance Measurement tool 61 Dot density map 158 Dot Density theme 102 Down buttons on Layer Control 111 137 Download ActiveSync 9 Drag and drop files 8 Dragging and dropping files 8 Draw a polygon 62 201 Draw a polyline 62 201 Draw a straight line 62 200 Draw Edit toolbar 58 62 200 Drawing Editing toolbar 49 56 Drop shadows 222 Dynamic map grid 114 146 149 E Edit menu 119 Edit modes 121 Edit object vertices 62 Edit gt Apply Range Styles 125 Edit gt Buffer 120 Edit gt Clear Annotations 122 Edit gt Clear Custom Labels 122 Edit gt Delete 122 Edit gt Edit Mode 121 Edit gt Hardware Button Options 124 Edit gt Named Styles 124 Edit gt New Object Styles 125 Edit gt Quick Pick Options 123 Edit gt Range Styles 125 Edit gt Raster Transparency 122 Edit gt Selected Object Style 123 Edit gt Selected Point Location 123 Editability 57 110 135 Entry method 58 Ethernet 8 Ethernet connection 8 Exit Discover Mobile 68 Exit from Discover Mobile 56 Exiting Discover Mobile 68 Exiting the application 67 Expressions in queries 192 193 expressions in queries 194 Extent of layer 114 extent of layer 144 F Feature Edit mode 219 Field name 129 Field type 129 File menu 125 File gt Close All Tables 131 File gt Close Table 131 F
336. turned on and has established a synchronization connection to the PC via Microsoft ActiveSync Windows XP or Windows Mobile Device Center Windows 7 or 8 For more information see PC Synchronisation Make sure that there is at least 28MB of free space in the PPC main memory To install the Discover Mobile software on your PC and mobile device 1 Download or copy the Discover Mobile installation file DiscoverMobile 3 8 Setup Windows Mobile exe onto the PC Discover Mobile User Guide Note Note 2 On the PC run the install program To run the program locate the executable file with Windows Explorer and then either double click the file name or right click on the file name and select Open 3 Follow the prompts press Next to proceed to the next step and when complete press Finish to install the software on the PC 4 When the installation on the PC is complete you will be asked to confirm installation of the software on the mobile device The software is now ready to be licensed see Licensing Discover Mobile After Discover Mobile has been installed on the PC it can be installed on a synchronised mobile device at any time by running Set up exe which is located underC Program Files Encom Discover Mobile Application Files Windows Mobile 82 Bit or C Program Files x86 Encom Discover Mobile Application Files Windows Mobile 64 Bit Alternatively rerun the install program on the PC If you
337. tyles by either modifying existing picklists or creating new picklists by importing from external files or creating a brand new picklist For information about how to use this tool see Creating and Managing Picklists e Apply Style Use this tool to apply a single picklist style to either selected map objects or to newly created map objects For information about how to use this tool see Applying a Single Style from a Picklist Apply Picklist Use this tool to apply multiple selected picklist styles to map objects in a table either permanently or as a thematic map For information about how to use this tool see Applying Multiple Styles from a Picklist 344 Discover Mobile User Guide e Apply Structural Symbols Use this tool to apply structural symbols to a point dataset For information about how to use this tool see Applying Structural Styles from a Picklist Setup Table Configure tables with validation rules and defaults for data entry For information about how to use this tool see Configure Table for Data Entry e Enter Data Digitize spatial or enter non spatial validated data with attributes For information about how to use this tool see Enter or Digitize Table Data and Map Objects Object styles are managed with the Picklist Manager The Picklist Manager is used to create map object and textural validation lists used for the creation of new map objects and applying map styles and attributes to selected map object
338. u tap the GO button in the lower left corner of the main toolbar For details of the commands available from the Go Menu see Using the GO Menu Customizing the Hardware Buttons GO gt Edit gt Hardware Button Options To customize the hardware buttons choose GO gt Preferences and under System Settings select the Hardware Buttons option Choose a function from the Select Function pull down list and then press the desired hardware button on the hand held device To use an existing button mapping configured through Windows Start gt Settings gt Buttons eg for Word or Excel ensure that the Check for Mapped Buttons option is unticked disabled 6 Using the GO Menu 67 Using the GO Menu The GO menu system of Discover Mobile is used to control and configure the application Many of the functions in the menu system are also available from the toolbars The main menu is displayed by tapping the GO button in the lower left corner of the main toolbar Additional functions are available on some toolbar buttons see Toolbars Exit Menu exit and close the application About Menu description of Discover Mobile Licensing Menu User information and licensing details Preferences Menu GPS communications system and session preferences and maintenance Tools Menu controls the buttons on the Draw Edit toolbar Query Menu create queries on data tables find objects by attributes Map Menu Create Cosmetic Layer Set
339. ural symbol options for digitizing structure points 2f Editable Toggle editability of selected table Note The Data Entry tool supports the selection of singular map and browser records and objects Multiple record or object selections are currently not supported 9 To digitize rotated structural symbols the table must be set up correctly in the Setup Table tool The table must be mappable and have three numeric fields with the following parameters Dip DipDirection and DiscoverCode There must also be a character field defining one of the standard structural picklists with Exclusion and Map Style options enabled 83 Format Mapinfo Professional Table for valid data entry Table Options Table Isa_Structure_Data Projection AMG Zone 54 AGD 66 Directory C Encom Training Mt Isa Structure lsa Structure Data TAB Table Fields Parameter Lookup Table Default Value Map Style AGSO_CODE TYPE Discover_Code lt Structural table setup An advantage of using the structural symbols component of the Data Entry tool is the dynamic ability to modify the structural points When the DipDirection and Dip value are modified the structural map object will change accordingly When the structure type is selected from the Structural Picklist the structural map object is modified 378 Discover Mobile User Guide 10 Click the Save button to save your changes to the current table All validation errors must be resol
340. us was first placed on the screen Operate by locating the stylus at a point on the screen and then drag it away from the point until the radial search has reached the required diameter Rectangular Selects objects within a rectangular area drawn from an initially located point All selectable objects whose centroid is within the area are highlighted Operate by locating the stylus at a start point and then drag out a rectangle until the search area reaches the required size 216 Discover Mobile User Guide Polygonal Select objects within a polygonal area Use the polygon select tool to enclose the required objects by tapping out a series of vertices All selectable objects within the polygon are highlighted Operate by tapping the stylus at a start point and then tapping additional vertices to enclose the required objects Complete the polygonal area by tapping twice on the screen Viewing Graphical Selections To easily view selected map objects in a Browser Window navigate to the GO gt Query gt Browse Selection A Browser Window will be presented only displaying records for map object selected Selecting Objects Within a Buffer You can create a buffer around a single object or around a collection of objects Creating a buffer around an object defines an area of influence around that object to a user specified distance A buffer can be used to select objects that fall within a given distance of one or more selected objects Th
341. ved before the table can be saved and the Data Entry tool can be closed a p Enter valid data into Mapinfo Professional table EASTING _ NORTHING DIP_ AGSO CODE TYPE 426 339 04340005 7 735 669 59295 224 408 304 3925823 7 733 880 27078 824 407 173 33897642 7 734 365 6837 824 404 585 61043107 7 734 814 39397 824 405 342 16116001 7 734 497 62732 824 399 321 13088051 7 736 208 415189 824 397 902 5849642 7 764 246 82825 321 412 718 43387817 7 755 329 97125 821 409 949 74137357 7 739 564 6401 821 414 658 40776121 7 775 720 34356 821 398 257 80064095 7 745 906 48576 8732 of 8732 gt i P New Record Q Delete Record F Fitter Validate lt Label F Editable seve s w A a dl o o jo lo o lo Jo jlo Jo jo jo Enter Data dialog showing entry of data in a structural table Index 379 Index A ActiveSync 9 Add a layer 137 Add Annotation 95 Add button for tables 128 169 on Layer Control 137 Add Custom Labels button 63 243 Add extra tables 57 Add Label 95 Add labels 62 Add Node Mode 219 Add Structure Symbol 93 Add Vertex button 63 Add Insert Node 94 Adding new objects 139 All Layers viewing 60 alphanumeric characters 129 Annotation tool 95 Annotation Label button 63 242 Arrow Select tool 91 Australian Structural Symbols 181 Auto Detect 255 Auto Detect butto
342. vert Hotlinks tool to remap the file paths and extensions so they will work on the desktop computer 10 Working with Objects 247 Hotlink Images from the PPC Camera To create image hotlink from camera 1 Navigate to GO gt Preferences gt Directories gt Image Files ensure that the path for the Images files is set to the path where images created from the PPC camera are stored Using the PPC camera take a photo Create a new map object within a specified layer The object can be a point line or polygon After the graphical object has been created the table browser record is presented Alternatively an existing map object can be used and selected Ensuring a Hotlink field is present in the layer preferably string field 254 width Click the dropdown button located next to the hotlink field You will be presented with an Edit List Click the Edit List option DiscoverMobile e 4c 1 51 lok Copper Hill Soils_Hotlink ems oeno s Edit List Tap on the Auto Field list at the bottom of the screen Use the scroll bar to display the Link Image option and select Click OK to have this as a Quick Pick option 248 Discover Mobile User Guide DiscoverMobile e 1 56 lok gt Link New Custom gt Map_X Add Quick Pick ES 6 Click on the gt Link Image option This will open a directory where the camera images were saved Select the relevant image Click OK within the Browser Window to co
343. vices will use null Parity or None so this is the default setting for Discover Mobile If you are not sure what the parity setting for your GPS should be then try setting it to none Trimble Protocol only for use with Trimble Post Process DGPS receivers See Connecting to a Trimble Receiver for a full description of the use of these options Port Specify the Port to which the DGPS receiver is connected Discover Mobile User Guide DOP Type Dilution of Precision DOP is an indication of the current satellite geometry It is the result of a calculation that takes into account each satellite s location relative to the other satellites in the constellation A low DOP indicates that the visible satellites are widely separated in the sky which allows better position information to be recorded When the DOP value rises above the DOP mask set in the following options the GPS receiver stops generating positional data until the DOP value falls below the DOP mask This option allows the DOP type to be specified either as Position PDOP or Horizontal HDOP The HDOP mask is useful when you are more concerned with horizontal accuracy rather than vertical accuracy Max PDOP Use this field to set the Position PDOP mask PDOP refers to horizontal and vertical measurements latitude longitude and altitude A PDOP value of 6 is recommended Max HDOP Use this field to set the Horizontal HDOP mask HDOP refers to ho
344. w records If text field and Lookup Table option is selected click to select a default value from the picklist Otherwise type a value If a date or time field pick the default date time If a numerical field type a value Select this option to use the graphical style of the selected picklist when creating new map objects Map Style field has bold font for the field title in the Enter Data tool Increments a numerical field or a character field containing numbers by a fixed value Minimum numerical value Maximum numerical value Minimum date value Maximum date value Minimum date time value Maximum date time value Minimum time value Maximum time value To clear a selection in the Setup Digitizing Table right click in the cell and select Clear Value Enter or Digitize Table Data and Map Objects Data can be entered into standard TAB files without validation or TAB files with validation settings created with the Discover Setup Digitizing Table tool see Configure Table for Data Entry Tables can be either mappable or non mappable Appendix D Digitizing and Data Entry in Discover 371 Note Icon Table type and validation status Mappable vector table with validation SA vA Mappable vector table without validation Ly Mappable vector read only table E3 Non mappable table with validation Non mappable table without validation Non mappable read only table Data can only
345. will accept before recording a new point or line segment For example if the distance value is set to 5m then Discover Mobile will only record a new line segment in a polyline or polygon if the distance travelled between the previous position and the current position is greater than 5m Any position data received which is closer than 5m will be filtered out The default Tolerance value is 10m the approximate accuracy of standard GPS receivers 78 Discover Mobile User Guide Note The minimum tolerance should be set at a value which is appropriate for your mapping requirements and GPS receiver accuracy If you are using Discover Mobile with a conventional GPS receiver to walk out object boundaries then a minimum tolerance of 10m should be sufficient If you were using a differential GPS you may reduce the value to 1m or 5m This will allow you to stop and take notes without Discover Mobile adding a series of unwanted points to your polyline If you were mapping out roads or tracks with Discover Mobile using a vehicle then a minimum tolerance between 20m to 100m would be more appropriate Tolerance Max This option controls the maximum separation distance that Discover Mobile will accept when recording a new point or line segment For example if the maximum tolerance distance value is set to 100m Discover Mobile will only record a new point if the distance between the current position and the previous position is less than 100m Use
346. wse Selection GO gt Query gt Browse Selection The Browse Selection tool enables the viewing of selected map objects in a Browser Window Only the map objects which were selected will be displayed in the Selection Browser 100 Discover Mobile User Guide Map Menu GO gt Map The Map menu items are used to set the Insertion Layer add a Cosmetic Layer to the map display create themes for a given layer or modify the projection of the map window DiscoverMobile er 10 35 X Exit About Licensing Preferences Tools Query Save Window As Add Cosmetic Layer Set Insertion Layer Create Theme Modify Themes Map Projection cs a Map menu For more information see Save Window As Add Cosmetic Layer Set Insertion Layer Create Theme Modify Themes Map Projection 6 Using the GO Menu 101 Save Window As GO gt Map gt Save Window As Any display can be saved as a Windows compatible bitmap The GO gt Map gt Save Window As menu option requires that a filename and folder be specified The output filename specifies a bitmap having a default BMP file extension DiscoverMobile en 10 37 Location Specify the name and location to save a display window as a bitmap file Add Cosmetic Layer GO gt Map gt Add Cosmetic Layer The cosmetic layer is a temporary layer which can be used to hold graphic objects When a cosmetic layer is created it w
347. xisting ID field will be added to the output table 25 Update Changed Field Values v Fields marked as Modified will be updated in the output table to match those from the input Scan Geometry for changes Scan Geometry for changes This will check all the geometry in both tables so may take some time aes Remove Deleted Rows v Rows which do not match an existing Input table ID field will be deleted from the output table Output Options Table to Merge Into Geology Save Registered Raster The Save Registered Raster tool will convert the select map window view into a raster image in a number of compressed formats including ECW at the selected level of detail and resolution To convert any data into a registered raster open a new map window in MapInfo Professional that contains the required tables or make an existing map window the active window 1 Set the window dimensions and scale so the map window contains the information to save Whatever is visible within the map window will be saved as the raster image 2 Select the menu DiscoverMobile gt Save to Registered Raster option to display the Create Registered Raster dialog 3 Data Preparation 45 Create Registered Raster Save a window as a raster image Select Window to Save Preview Sylvania Geology Map Output Options Image Type ECW v C Set Background Transparent Detal 2 X C Create World File Transparency 0 S z Output Table
348. y DGPS receivers depending on factors such as the number of satellites the quality of the satellite signal influenced by the amount of satellite coverage and overhead cover the quality of radio reception for Real Time DGPS and the parameters assigned in the Setup dialog The quality of the current position fix is indicated at the bottom left of the map screen Discover Mobile allows a Precision Filter to be selected which will display a warning when data capture is attempted with a fix quality lower than the set Precision Filter These Filter levels are detailed below select the DGPS filter for post processed DGPS work e GPS Any current position fix GPS or DGPS will be accepted e DGPS Requires a Differential GPS fix Real time or Post processed e RTK LOW Requires a low quality Real time Differential solution 11 Working with the GPS 273 Q cs RTK HIGH Requires a high quality Real time Differential solution Field Data Collection Data Storage GPS Connection Carrier Phase Logging For information on capturing objects see Creating GPS located Objects Data Storage It is strongly recommended that all field data capture tables are created and saved onto the memory card rather than main memory This ensures that in the event of a flat battery or system crash the collected data is not lost A high speed memory card is recommended low speed memory cards can significantly impact data handling and
349. y menu option EA raa QM i x co e B Ej Map window with GPS Overlay mini Satellite Status displayed highlighted in red Navigating to a Known Point Discover Mobile provides a Waypoint Navigation tool for use with a GPS receiver The waypoint navigation tool allows the selection of an existing map object eg point polygon as a destination waypoint it will then report the distance and bearing between the current GPS location and the selected waypoint feature in a waypoint message window The waypoint navigation tool is accessed from the Waypoint Navigation button on the GPS button bar or choose GO gt GPS gt Waypoint Navigation To use the waypoint navigation tool 1 Open an existing layer that already contains the destination point or add a Cosmetic Layer to the map window and then add a point to the cosmetic layer which represents the destination location 2 Connect and start the GPS 3 Tap the Waypoint Navigation button on the GPS button bar A status window should appear prompting the selection of the destination waypoint Discover Mobile User Guide E 909 amp Select item as waypoint m llli oh A eid fe xt ee 2 amp l OD OR gt RHR Aa S Bl i Xx co See Select the destination point the black flag in the above screenshot to select it The waypoint status window will change to show the distance and bearing from the current position to the waypoint The
350. y to capture the polyline tap the GPS Polyline button to start the line recording You will see the line draw on the screen as you map out the polyline path Tap the button again to stop the polyline capture You will be prompted for a table in which to save the line The node separation is controlled by the Tolerance Min and Tolerance Max settings on the Preferences menu To automatically prompt for a named style or to edit attributes or coordinates see Object Creation on the Preferences menu GPS Polygon Capture button will capture a polygon to a chosen table using GPS position coordinates To use this function first create a layer containing columns for all the default GPS attribute fields you wish to record as well as any additional custom fields you wish to populate Alternatively you can add the new polygon to an existing layer Tap the GPS Polygon button when you are ready to capture the polygon object You may need to toggle between the polyline and polygon tools first A line will then draw on the screen as you map out the polygon boundary To finish the polygon tap the button again The polygon will automatically close by joining the last captured node to the first The node separation is controlled by the Tolerance Min and Tolerance Max settings on the Preferences menu To automatically prompt for a named style or to edit attributes or coordinates see Object Creation on the Preferences menu 208 Discover Mobile User Gui
351. ygon New objects can only be added to one layer or table at a time You can set a layer to receive new objects points lines or polygons by setting that layer as the insertion layer see Setting the Insertion Layer If an insertion layer has not been set you will be prompted to select one the first time you use any of the drawing tools This layer will then remain as the insertion layer until you either close it or select another layer For additional information on working with insertion layers refer to Managing Layers Discover Mobile provides a Cosmetic Layer for storing temporary map objects Unlike Maplnfo Professional the Cosmetic Layer is optional in Discover Mobile and can be added to the map window with GO gt Map gt Add Cosmetic Layer You can use the Cosmetic Layer to store temporary map objects rather than add them to an existing layer Any objects placed into the Cosmetic Layer will be permanently deleted if you exit Discover Mobile without saving them The tools available from the Draw Edit toolbar are described in e Creating Points and Symbols Creating Lines and Polygons e Creating Structure Objects Creating Points and Symbols Before creating objects you should open and set the insertion layer If an insertion layer has not been assigned when objects are created a dialog will appear allowing selection of the insertion layer 1 To select or change the symbol style see Setting Default Styles for New Drawing Ob
352. ymbol See Creating Structure Objects Use the Line tool to draw a straight line Tap the stylus at the line start point and then drag to an end point See Creating Lines and Polygons Use the Polyline tool to draw a polyline node by node Tap the screen to add the first node then move the stylus off the screen surface and tap another point Continue tapping vertices until the polyline is complete To finish double tap the last node See Creating Lines and Polygons Use the Freehand Polyline tool to draw a free hand polyline Place the stylus at the start of the line and then while holding the stylus on the surface draw the line To finish remove the stylus from the screen See Creating Lines and Polygons Use the Polygon tool to draw a polygon node by node Tap the stylus on the screen at the first node and then tap the subsequent nodes in sequence Complete the polygon by double tapping the the final node See Creating Lines and Polygons Use the Freehand Polygon tool to draw a closed free hand polygon Place the stylus at the start of the line and then while holding the stylus on the surface draw the line To finish and close remove the stylus from the screen See Creating Lines and Polygons Use the Add Label button to label objects with selected attributes See Labels and Annotation Use the Add Annotation button o add text to the display Ensure the pop up keyboard is open before selecting this tool See Labe s and Annotation

Discover Mobile 3.8 - Pitney Bowes Business Insight

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents